Setup Manual 0if-Plus B-64647en - 01 - 01

< +HMI
SETUP MANUAL
B-64647EN/01
• No part of this manual may be reproduced in any form.
• The design and specifications of this product are subject to change due to
improvements.
The products in this manual are controlled based on Japan's "Foreign Exchange and
Foreign Trade Law".
Furthermore, the product may also be controlled by re-export regulations of the United
States government.
Should you wish to export or re-export these products, please contact FANUC for advice.
This manual attempts to include information as much as possible.

There are, however, a very large number of operations that must not or cannot be
performed, and if the manual contained them all, it would be enormous in volume.
It is, therefore, requested to assume that any functions not described in this manual are
"not equipped in this product."
Program and device names belonging to companies other than FANUC in this manual
include registered trademarks of their respective companies.
However, the ® and ™ marks may be omitted for some of those names.
B-64647EN/01
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS 
DEFINITION OF WARNING, CAUTION, NOTE, AND MEMO
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS 1
When using FANUC iHMI, you must comply with the instructions written in "SAFETY 2
PRECAUTIONS".
3
DEFINITION OF WARNING, CAUTION,
4
NOTE, AND MEMO
This manual includes safety precautions for protecting the user and preventing
5
damage to the machine. Precautions are classified into " ! Warning" and " !
Caution" according to the degree of the risk or severity of damage. 6
Also, supplementary information is described as "Note" and "Memo".
Read these indications thoroughly before using this product.
7
! Used if a danger resulting in the death or serious injury of the user is
WARNING expected to occur if he or she fails to observe the approved procedure.
8
Used if a danger resulting in the minor injury of the user or equipment
! damage is expected to occur if he or she fails to observe the approved
CAUTION procedure. A1

NOTE
Used if points to keep in mind not related to WARNING or CAUTION are to
be indicated. A2
 Used if supplementary explanations for operation or additional information

not related to WARNING or CAUTION are to be indicated.
Z
MEMO
* Read this manual carefully, and store it in a safe place.
s-1
B-64647EN/01
GENERAL PRECAUTIONS
GENERAL PRECAUTIONS
The following warnings and cautions provide information to be noted when
1 handing the CNC device for safer use of the machine with the CNC device.
2 • Carefully check that data you want to enter is correctly entered before
performing the next operation. Operation with incorrect data may cause
unexpected behavior of the machine, resulting in damage to the work or
machine or injury.
3 • Carefully check that program command value, offset value, current
position, and external signal settings, etc. are correct before starting the
machine for operation, such as machining the work. Also, perform trial
4 operation, such as using the single block, feed speed override, or machine
lock function, or operating without a tool or work, to carefully check that the
machine operates correctly.
5 • Check that an appropriate feed speed value is specified for the operation.
The maximum feed speed is normally limited for each machine. Follow the
!
WARNING manual of the machine as well because the optimal speed is different
6 depending on the operation.

Operation with an incorrect speed may cause unexpected load to the
machine, resulting in damage to the work or machine or injury.
7 • Before using the tool offset function, carefully check the offset direction and
value. Operation with incorrect data may cause unexpected behavior of the
machine, resulting in damage to the work or machine or injury.
8 • Optimal values are set to the CNC and PMC parameters, so they do not
normally need to be changed. If you change the parameter for some
reason, fully understand its function before change. An incorrect parameter
A1 setting may cause unexpected behavior of the machine depending on the

setting value, resulting in damage to the work or machine or injury.
A2
• After pressing the power on button, do not touch any key on the keyboard
Z until the screen appears. Some keys are used for maintenance or special
operation and may cause unexpected behavior.
• NC programs, parameters, and variables are stored in the non-volatile
memory in the CNC device. These data are usually not lost by powering
on/off. However, precious data stored in the non-volatile memory may be
! lost due to incorrect operation or may have to be erased due to fault
CAUTION recovery.
To recover fast from such an unexpected situation, back up all kinds of
data beforehand.
• There are some embedded machine operations and screen functions
installed by machine tool builders (MTB). For how to use them and
precautions, refer to the appropriate manual provided by each
manufacturer.
s-2
B-64647EN/01
GENERAL WARNINGS FOR CNC APPLICATION DEVELOPMENT
0.1
GENERAL WARNINGS FOR CNC

APPLICATION DEVELOPMENT
1
Be careful enough for the following warnings when you develop two or more
applications or use networks.
2
If you neglect them, there is a danger of the user being injured or there is a
danger of both the user being injured and the equipment being damaged.
3
1.Be careful enough if you write an identical NC data, an identical PMC data
or a series of related data set by two or more above applications including
network functions. Because they are executed based on each individual
4
cycles (in other words, asynchronous cycles), there is a possibility that the
data will be written in an unexpected order. 5
Therefore, do NOT write above data in the following cases.
- Applications and network functions
- Two or more applications
6
- Two or more network functions
Data, applications and network functions of interest are listed in below.
However, all may not be listed completely because new features will be
7
added in the future.
! 8
WARNING 2.Be careful enough that you must prevent PMC signals in the same byte
from being written by the following two or more applications including
network functions. While an application reads and writes one byte of PMC A1
signals, other applications may write the same byte.
3.Be careful enough if you process a PMC signal set that is related to a NC A2
function by using the following two or more applications including network
functions. Because they are executed based on each individual cycles (in
other words, asynchronous cycles), there is a possibility that the NC may Z
receive the PMC signal set in an unexpected order.
4.Generally, when multi-byte data are read or written at once among the
following two or more applications including network functions, the
coherency of the read multi-byte data (in other words, reading all latest
data at once) is not guaranteed. To ensure the coherency of the multi-byte
data, prepare flags to notify the completion of reading or writing process
that is separated from the entity of the data and make the handshaking
process to access the data by using the flags.
s-3
B-64647EN/01
GENERAL WARNINGS FOR CNC APPLICATION DEVELOPMENT
Data List Table
Category Data
1 General data for NC Parameter, Tool compensation value and related
data,
2 Work zero offset value and related data,

Workpiece coordinate system shift value and related
data,
Macro variable, P-CODE variable, Program and
related data,
3 Tool management function data, Tool life
management data,
Error compensation related data ,
4 Overtravel check (Interference check) related data ,
Software operator’s panel related data
PMC data PMC signal, PMC parameter
5 Data for Laser, Tool data for punch press and related data, Safety
Punch press or Wire zone data and related data, Laser cutting condition
cut data and related data, Laser oscillator setting data
6 and related data, Wire consumption compensation
data, Guide position compensation data, Workpiece
! leveling data
7 CAUTION Other data Parameters for Data Server, Parameters for network
setting
8 List Table of Applications and Network Functions
A1 Category
Applications
Functions
PMC Ladder, Macro Executor, C Language
Executor, FANUC PICTURE, FOCAS2
A2 Network functions FL-net, EtherNet/IP, PROFINET, Modbus/TCP,

PROFIBUS-DP, DeviceNet, CC-Link
Z 5.CNC has functions that read or write PMC signals in other than the G/F
address. Be careful enough if the above mentioned applications and
network read or write PMC signals used by these functions. When reading
or writing the same PMC signal, applications or CNC functions may work in
an unexpected manner.
As for the CNC functions of interest, refer to the connection manual
(Function) (B-64483EN-1) ”Appendix B. List of Functions Using PMC
Signals Other Than G/F Address”.
s-4
B-64647EN/01
PREFACE 
RELATED MANUALS
PREFACE 1
The iHMI consists of applications that support CNC operations and the "Home 2
screen" that starts each application. The iHMI allows you to customize each
application and add your custom applications to the Home screen. This manual
describes the customization method and specifications of the iHMI. 3
For details about the iHMI and iHMI applications, see "FANUC iHMI Home Screen
OPERATOR'S MANUAL" (B-64644EN) and "FANUC iHMI CNC Operation Screen
OPERATOR'S MANUAL" (B-64644EN-1). 4
0.1
1 RELATED MANUALS 5
The table below lists related manuals. 6
Table1 Related Manuals List
Manual name Specification
7
number
FANUC iHMI Home Screen OPERATOR'S MANUAL B-64644EN 8
FANUC iHMI CNC Operation Screen OPERATOR'S MANUAL B-64644EN-1
FANUC iHMI Machining Cycle OPERATOR'S MANUAL B-64644EN-2
FANUC iHMI Set-up Guidance OPERATOR'S MANUAL B-64644JA-3 A1
FANUC Series 30i-MODEL B
FANUC Series 32i-MODEL B PARAMETER MANUAL
B-64490EN
A2
FANUC Series 32i-MODEL B MAINTENANCE MANUAL
B-64485EN
Z
FANUC PICTURE OPERATOR'S MANUAL B-66284EN
B-64483EN
FANUC Series 32i-MODEL B CONNECTION MANUAL
(HARDWARE)
B-64483EN-1
FANUC Series 32i-MODEL B CONNECTION MANUAL
(FUNCTION)
p-1
B-64647EN/01
PREFACE 
RELATED MANUALS
Manual name Specification

number
B-64484EN
1 FANUC Series 32i-MODEL B Common to Lathe System/
Machining Center System OPERATOR'S MANUAL
2 FANUC Series 30i-MODEL B

B-64513EN
FANUC Series 35i-MODEL B PMC PROGRAMMING MANUAL
FANUC MANUAL GUIDE i Common to Lathe System/Machining B-63874EN
3 Center System OPERATOR'S MANUAL
FANUC MANUAL GUIDE i SET-UP GUIDANCE FUNCTIONS B-63874EN-1
4 OPERATOR'S MANUAL
FANUC Interactive Programming Function for Complex Lathe B-64654EN
OPERATOR'S MANUAL
5 CNC Screen Display Function OPERATOR'S MANUAL B-63164EN
6
7
8
A1
A2
Z
p-2
B-64647EN/01
CHAPTER CONTENTS
1 OVERVIEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1 1
2 SETTING UP iHMI APPLICATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13 2
3 CREATING A USER APPLICATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .185 3
4 MAINTENENCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .205 4
5 PARAMETERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .231 5
A APPENDIX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .313 A
c-1
B-64647EN/01
1
2
A1
A2
c-2
B-64647EN/01
TABLE OF CONTENTS 1
2
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . s-1
DEFINITION OF WARNING, CAUTION, NOTE, AND MEMO ...........s-1 3
GENERAL PRECAUTIONS ................................................................s-2
GENERAL WARNINGS FOR CNC APPLICATION 
DEVELOPMENT..................................................................................s-3 4
PREFACE ............................................................................................... p-1
1 RELATED MANUALS .......................................................................... p-1
5
1 OVERVIEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1
1.1 iHMI SETUP OVERVIEW ..............................................................2
1.1.1 Setup Overview ................................................................................ 2 6
1.1.1.1 Customizing applications registered with the iHMI ................... 2
1.1.1.2 Overall iHMI settings ................................................................. 6
1.1.2 Environment Required for iHMI Customization ................................ 8
7
1.1.2.1 User application ........................................................................ 8
1.1.2.2 FANUC PICTURE ..................................................................... 9
1.1.2.3 Machine alarm diagnosis guidance table ................................ 10
8
1.1.3 iHMI Hardware Performance Table ................................................ 10
1.2 iHMI MAINTENANCE OVERVIEW .............................................12 A1
2 SETTING UP iHMI APPLICATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13
2.1 iHMI APPLICATION SETUP OVERVIEW ...................................14
2.1.1 iHMI Folder Configuration .............................................................. 14
A2
2.1.1.1 Folder configuration inside the CNC ....................................... 14
2.1.2 Customizable Applications ............................................................. 15 Z
2.2 CONFIGURATION FILES THAT AFFECT THE ENTIRE iHMI ...17
2.2.1 Application Definition File ............................................................... 17
2.2.1.1 Starting an application with a screen specified ....................... 19
2.2.1.2 Starting iHMI applications from shortcuts ............................... 19
2.2.2 iHMI Whole Configuration File ....................................................... 22
2.2.3 Individual Settings Common to the Applications ............................ 24
2.2.3.1 Hiding the vertical soft keys .................................................... 24
2.2.3.2 Setting an animation to be used when a slide is displayed ..... 25
2.3 SETTING UP BASIC FUNCTIONS .............................................27
2.3.1 Customizing the Home Screen ....................................................... 27
2.3.1.1 Changing the background of the home screen ....................... 27
2.3.1.2 Adding a shutdown button ...................................................... 27
c-3
B-64647EN/01
2.3.2 Customizing the Status Display ..................................................... 29

2.3.2.1 Adding status icons and character string display ................... 29
2.3.3 Setting the Machine Alarm Diagnosis ............................................ 36
2.3.3.1 Alarm and operator message types that can be added .......... 36
2.3.3.2 Diagnosable numbers ............................................................. 36
1 2.3.3.3 Environments required to create failure diagnosis messages 37
2.3.3.4 Machine alarm diagnosis guidance table ............................... 37
2 2.3.3.5 Creating failure diagnosis messages ...................................... 42
2.3.3.6 Creating different language messages ................................... 50
2.4 SETTING UP THE PLANNING APPLICATION .......................... 54
3 2.4.1 Setting Up Tool Management Function ......................................... 54
2.4.1.1 NC tool database management .............................................. 54
2.4.1.2 Tool management function customization .............................. 56
4 2.4.2 Setting Up Cycle Time Estimation Function ................................... 57
2.4.2.1 Application definition file ......................................................... 57
2.4.2.2 Auxiliary function time setting window .................................... 57
5 2.4.2.3 Adding an auxiliary function time ............................................ 58
2.4.2.4 Changing an auxiliary function time ........................................ 60
2.4.2.5 Deleting an auxiliary function time .......................................... 60
6 2.5 SETTING UP THE MACHINING APPLICATION ........................ 62
2.5.1 Setting Up the CNC Operation Screen .......................................... 62
2.5.1.1 Configuration file to use the multi-path edit function ............... 62
7 2.5.1.2 Setting the coordinate axes display and soft key display ....... 64
2.5.1.3 Setting the number of divided areas of the multi-path display 65
8 2.5.1.4 Hiding the modal G codes ...................................................... 68

2.5.1.5 Settings related to each mode base screen ........................... 68
2.5.1.6 Setting the spindle rotation direction icon display ................... 70
A1 2.5.1.7 Setting the uniform peripheral speed control mode icon 
display .................................................................................... 73
2.5.1.8 Setting the traveling direction guide in the JOG, HND, INC, 
A2 and REF mode base screens ................................................. 74
2.5.1.9 Setting the workpiece coordinates slide ................................. 76
2.5.1.10 Setting the program manager slide ........................................ 77
Z 2.5.1.11 Opening/closing the custom macro variable slide .................. 78
2.5.1.12 Displaying custom macro variable numbers and values ........ 79
2.5.1.13 Editing custom macro variables .............................................. 82
2.5.1.14 Displaying custom macro variable names .............................. 86
2.5.1.15 Conditions to use the machining simulation function .............. 87
2.5.1.16 Configuration file to use the machining simulation function .... 88
2.5.1.17 Machining simulation screen .................................................. 90
2.5.1.18 Configuration file to use the machining cycle creation 
function ................................................................................... 98
2.5.1.19 Display settings of the MEM mode base screen .................... 99
2.5.1.20 Setting program guidance messages ................................... 101
2.5.1.21 Setting up M code input function .......................................... 105
2.5.1.22 Setting up the fixed sentence function .................................. 109
c-4
B-64647EN/01
2.5.2 Setting Up the iHMI Machining Cycle ........................................... 113

2.5.3 Setting Up the iHMI Set-up Guidance .......................................... 113
2.5.3.1 Manually setting in the P-CODE variable .............................. 114
2.5.3.2 Setting on the MANUAL GUIDE i screen .............................. 121
2.5.4 Setting Up the Machine Collision Avoidance Function ................. 125
2.5.4.1 Creating a 3D machine model .............................................. 125 1
2.5.4.2 Setting various settings of the machine collision avoidance 
function ................................................................................. 127
2.5.4.3 Setting the common items .................................................... 129 2
2.5.4.4 Setting the machine configuration ......................................... 131
2.5.4.5 Configuring the individual path settings ................................ 149
2.5.4.6 Preview time of the machine collision avoidance function .... 153
3
2.5.4.7 Signals available during the execution of the machine 
collision avoidance function .................................................. 156
2.6 SETTING UP THE IMPROVEMENT APPLICATION ................159
4
2.6.1 Importing/Exporting Logs Collected with the Data Logger 
Function ........................................................................................ 159
2.6.1.1 Log item configuration file ..................................................... 159
5
2.6.1.2 Log file .................................................................................. 164
2.6.2 Setting Up the Maintenance Manager .......................................... 166 6
2.6.2.1 Setting parts placement information ..................................... 167
2.6.2.2 Standard icons list ................................................................. 168
2.6.2.3 Switching maintenance items display ................................... 169 7
2.6.2.4 Outputting the display switch settings of the maintenance 
items ..................................................................................... 170
2.6.2.5 Maintenance items display switch configuration file ............. 170 8
2.7 SETTING UP THE UTILITY APPLICATION ..............................173
2.7.1 Setting Up the Manual Viewer Function ....................................... 173
2.7.1.1 Manual information configuration file .................................... 173 A1
2.7.1.2 Manual viewer tag list ........................................................... 174
2.7.1.3 Import folder configuration .................................................... 177
2.7.1.4 Naming rules for manual file update ..................................... 178
A2
2.7.2 Setting Up the Web Browser Function ......................................... 179
2.7.2.1 Description of the Web browser configuration file ................. 179
2.7.2.2 Setting the start page ............................................................ 180
Z
2.8 CREATING PROGRAM STORAGE FILES ...............................181
2.8.1 Program Storage Files ................................................................. 181
2.8.2 Creating a Program Storage File (Ncprog.bin) ............................. 181
2.8.3 Program Storage File Edit Library (Ncprog.dll) ............................ 181
3 CREATING A USER APPLICATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .185
3.1 OVERVIEW OF CREATING A USER APPLICATION ..............186
3.1.1 Adding an Application to the iHMI ................................................ 186
3.1.2 User Application ........................................................................... 187
3.2 HOW TO CREATE A USER APPLICATION .............................188
3.2.1 Overview of Creating an Application ............................................ 188
c-5
B-64647EN/01
3.2.2 Using the iHMI Library ................................................................. 188

3.2.2.1 Application Manager ............................................................. 189
3.2.2.2 Overlapping the user application with the iHMI application .. 190
3.2.2.3 Starting a specific application from the user application ....... 192
3.2.2.4 Displaying a specific screen when starting the user 
1 application ............................................................................ 194
3.3 CUSTOMIZING A SCREEN WITH FANUC PICTURE ............. 196
2 3.3.1 Creating a New Operator's Panel Screen .................................... 196
3.3.2 Changing an Operator's Panel Screen ........................................ 199
3.3.3 Simultaneous Display with Another Application ........................... 201
3 4 MAINTENENCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .205
4.1 DATA BACKUP/RESTORE ...................................................... 206
4.1.1 Starting the Backup Screen ......................................................... 207
4 4.1.2 Saving Data in a Batch ................................................................ 212
4.1.3 Restoring Data in a Batch ............................................................ 213
4.1.4 Saving Data Individually ............................................................... 214
5 4.1.5 Restoring Data Individually .......................................................... 214
4.1.6 Displaying the Details of Batch Save and Restore Results ......... 214
6 4.2 AUTOMATIC DATA BACKUP .................................................. 216

4.2.1 Backing Up to External Memory .................................................. 217
4.2.1.1 List of output text data .......................................................... 218
7 4.3 HOW TO UPDATE THE SOFTWARE ...................................... 220
4.3.1 Preparation .................................................................................. 220
4.3.1.1 Checking the iHMI version ................................................... 220
8 4.3.1.2 Checking whether the EWF is enabled/disabled 
(for PANEL iH Pro only) ....................................................... 221
4.3.2 Updating the iHMI Basic Software for the PANEL iH .................. 222
A1 4.3.2.1 Folder configuration .............................................................. 222
4.3.2.2 Backing up iHMI data ........................................................... 222
4.3.2.3 Installing the iHMI ................................................................. 223
A2 4.3.2.4 Restoring backed-up iHMI data ............................................ 225
4.3.3 Updating the iHMI Basic Software for the PANEL iH Pro ............ 226
4.3.3.1 Backing up iHMI data ........................................................... 226
Z 4.3.3.2 Disabling the EWF ................................................................ 227
4.3.3.3 Uninstalling the iHMI ............................................................ 228
4.3.3.4 Installing the iHMI ................................................................. 228
4.3.3.5 Restoring backed-up iHMI data ............................................ 228
4.3.3.6 Enabling the EWF ................................................................. 229
c-6
B-64647EN/01
5 PARAMETERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .231
5.1 PARAMETERS TO DISABLE EDITING OF PROGRAMS ........233
5.2 PARAMETER OF SUBPROGRAM CALLS ...............................238
5.3 PARAMETER OF PROGRAM PROTECTION KEYS ...............239
5.4 PARAMETERS TO DISABLE EDITING IN THE AUTOMATIC  1
OPERATION STOP STATE ......................................................240
5.5 PARAMETER TO CHANGE THE NUMBER OF DIGITS FOR 
PROGRAM NUMBERS .............................................................242 2
5.6 PARAMETER TO SELECT A DEVICE .....................................243
5.7 PARAMETERS OF THE TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FUNCTION .244
5.8 PARAMETERS OF THE MACHINING SIMULATION  3
FUNCTION ................................................................................247
5.9 PARAMETERS OF THE CURRENT POSITION/REMAINING
TRAVEL DISTANCE DISPLAY TILES ......................................251
4
5.9.1 Parameters to Display Axis Names .............................................. 251
5.9.2
5.9.3
Parameters to Display Extended Axis Names and Subscripts ..... 253
Parameters to Display Coordinate Values ................................... 255
5
5.9.4 Parameters of Increment System 0.1 nm Display ........................ 257
5.9.5 Parameters of Programmable Diameter/Radius Switching .......... 259 6
5.9.6 Parameters to Show/Hide Control Axes ....................................... 261
5.9.7 Parameters to Align Control Axes to the Top ............................... 261
5.9.8 Parameters to Change the Order of Displaying Control Axes ...... 262 7
5.9.9 Parameters to Preset a Workpiece Coordinate System 
(Absolute/Overall) ......................................................................... 262
5.10 PARAMETERS OF SERVO LOAD METER DISPLAY ..............264 8
5.10.1 Parameters to Display Axis Names .............................................. 264
5.10.2 Parameters to Display Extended Axis Names and Subscripts ..... 264
5.10.3 Parameters of Axis Name Switching ............................................ 264 A1
5.10.4 Parameters to Show/Hide Control Axes ....................................... 264
5.10.5
5.10.6
Parameters to Align Control Axes to the Top ............................... 264
Parameters to Change the Order of Displaying Control Axes ...... 265 A2
5.11 PARAMETERS OF MODAL INFORMATION DISPLAY ............266
5.11.1 Parameters of Modal G Codes ..................................................... 266
5.11.2 Parameters of Modal HD.T and NX.T Codes ............................... 268
Z
5.11.3 Parameters of Modal SRPM, SSPM, and SMAX ......................... 271
5.11.4 Parameters of Modal F Codes ..................................................... 271
5.11.5 Parameters of Modal T, D, and H Codes ..................................... 272
5.11.6 Parameters of Modal T Codes ..................................................... 273
5.11.7 Parameters of Modal S Codes ..................................................... 274
5.11.8 Parameters of Modal M Codes (First to Fifth M Codes) ............... 275
5.11.9 Parameters of Modal B Codes (Second Auxiliary Function) ........ 276
5.11.10Parameters of Modal C Codes (Third Auxiliary Function) ........... 279
5.11.11Parameters of Modal A Codes (Fourth Auxiliary Function) ......... 279
5.11.12Parameters of General Modal Information .................................. 280
c-7
B-64647EN/01
5.12 PARAMETERS OF MACHINING INFORMATION DISPLAY ... 282

5.13 PARAMETER TO DISPLAY FEEDRATE INFORMATION ....... 287
5.13.1 Parameter to Display Feedrate Information ................................. 287
5.13.2 Parameters of the Actual Feedrate Unit ....................................... 287
1 5.13.3
5.13.4
Parameter to Display the Actual Feedrate ................................... 289
Parameters of the Actual Feedrate Speed Meter ........................ 289
2 5.14 PARAMETERS OF SPINDLE INFORMATION DISPLAY ........ 291

5.14.1 Parameters of Extended Spindle Names and Subscripts ............ 291
5.14.2 Parameters of the Actual Spindle Speed ..................................... 295
5.14.3 Parameters of the Spindle Speed Meter ...................................... 296
3 5.14.4
5.14.5
Parameters of the Spindle Load Meter ........................................ 296
Parameters of the Current Load Ratio ......................................... 297
5.15 PARAMETERS OF MACHINING PROGRAM DISPLAY .......... 298
4 5.15.1 Parameters of Subprogram Calls ................................................. 298
5.15.2 Parameter of Program Content Display ....................................... 300
5.15.3 Parameters of Program Numbers ................................................ 301
5 5.15.4 Parameters of Display during Program Backward by Manual 
Handle Retrace ............................................................................ 302
5.16 PARAMETER OF N NUMBER SEARCH IN A MACHINING 
6 PROGRAM ............................................................................... 304
5.16.1 Parameter of Sequence Numbers ............................................... 304
5.17 PARAMETERS OF SEQUENCE NUMBER STOP ................... 305
7 5.18 PARAMETERS OF THE CUSTOM MACRO VARIABLE LIST
SLIDE ........................................................................................ 306
8 5.19 PARAMETERS OF THE MACHINE COLLISION AVOIDANCE
FUNCTION ............................................................................... 308
A APPENDIX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .313
A1 A.1 APPLICATION IDENTIFIER ID ................................................. 314
A.2 CNC OPERATION SCREEN SWITCHING ID 
(SUBJECT VALUE) .................................................................. 315
A2 A.3 MAINTENANCE DISPLAY SWITCHING ID 
(SUBJECT VALUE) .................................................................. 316
Z A.4 MDI KEY CODE MAP FOR iHMI .............................................. 324
A.5 FANUC SCREEN COLOR DEFINITION LIST .......................... 333
A.6 FUNCTION SPECIFICATIONS ................................................ 338
A.6.1 CncAppClient Function Specifications ......................................... 338
A.6.2 CncAppClient Notification Message ............................................. 342
A.7 RESOURCES REQUIRED FOR EACH FUNCTION ................ 344
A.7.1 For PANEL iH .............................................................................. 344
A.7.1.1 Memory usage in the iHMI basic functions ........................... 344
A.7.1.2 Amount of memory that can be used in the MTB application 345
A.7.2 For PANEL iH Pro ........................................................................ 345
A.7.2.1 Memory usage in the iHMI basic functions ........................... 346
A.7.2.2 Memory usage in option functions ........................................ 347
A.7.2.3 Amount of memory that can be used in the MTB application 347
c-8
1
1
OVERVIEW 2
3
4
5
This chapter describes the overview of an environment required to set up the
iHMI and customization.
A
1.1 iHMI SETUP OVERVIEW ........................................................................ 2
1.2 iHMI MAINTENANCE OVERVIEW......................................................... 12
B-64647EN/01
CHAPTER 1 OVERVIEW 
1.1　iHMI SETUP OVERVIEW
1.1
1.1 iHMI SETUP OVERVIEW

The iHMI allows you to customize iHMI applications and add your custom
1 applications to the Home screen. There are two types of hardware, FANUC
PANEL iH and FANUC PANEL iH Pro, both of which allow application
customization.
2
1.1.1 Setup Overview
3
1.1.1
The iHMI provides the following customization methods according to the machine
equipped with the iHMI or the way of using the operator.
4 1.1.1.1 Customizing applications registered with the iHMI

Customize each iHMI application. The following shows customization examples:
1.1.1.1
5
 Status icon/Home screen
6 You can add an icon to the status at the top of an iHMI application or change the
background color of the Home screen.
7
8 Fig. 1.1.1.1 (a) Adding a Status Icon
A1
A2
Z
Fig. 1.1.1.1 (b) Changing the Background of the Home Screen
2
B-64647EN/01
 Tool Manager
The Tool Manager allows you to set the options and parameters required for using
the functions and import catalog data.
Tool Data +iHMI

Tool Manager 1
2
Data storing
3
Tool library
software Database
4
Select and group tools
Data loading
5
Fig. 1.1.1.1 (c) Flow of Importing Tool Data
6
 Cycle Time Estimation
The Cycle Time Estimation allows you to set the auxiliary function time.
7
8
A1
A2
Z
Fig. 1.1.1.1 (d) Auxiliary function time settings
3
B-64647EN/01
 CNC Operation Screen

The CNC operation screen allows you to configure the settings required for using
the functions. You can also register images to a program.
1
2
3
4
5 Fig. 1.1.1.1 (e) CNC Operation Screen
6  Machine Collision Avoidance

The machine collision avoidance allows you to register machine 3D model data
and set the parameters.
7 VERICUT
Define a
8 machine model.
A1
A2
Z Tool definition
Fig. 1.1.1.1 (f) Registering 3D Model Data
4
B-64647EN/01
 Maintenance Manager
The Maintenance Manager allows you to set the maintenance items.
1
2
3
4
Fig. 1.1.1.1 (g) Setting the Maintenance Items
5
 Manual Viewer
The manual viewer allows you to add a manual and specify whether to protect it.
6
7
8
A1
A2
Fig. 1.1.1.1 (h) Manual Viewer Z
For details on how to customize each application, see " Chapter 2 SETTING UP
iHMI APPLICATIONS ".
5
B-64647EN/01
1.1.1.2 Overall iHMI settings

You can configure the overall iHMI settings. The following shows customization
1.1.1.2 -
examples:
1  Adding an Application
You can add an application to the Home screen and start the application.
2
3
4
5 iHMI Home Screen customization example
6
Fig. 1.1.1.2 (a) Adding an Application
In addition, the following applications can be added to the Home screen:

7
8 ● Applications created with FANUC PICTURE
You can create a machine operator's panel screen using FANUC PICTURE.
A1
A2
Z
Fig. 1.1.1.2 (b) Custom Screen
6
B-64647EN/01
● Custom applications created using C++ or C# (user applications)

You can create a screen using the FOCAS2 library, which allows you to obtain
and set NC information, or the iHMI library, which can control iHMI applications.
1
2
3
4
Fig. 1.1.1.2 (c) User application
5
 For the PANEL iH Pro, you can add general applications, as well as the above
applications. In addition, a small-size iHMI application can be displayed above an 6
MEMO application created with the display unit size.
7
 Registering a shortcut key 8
You can use the shortcut to start an application specified with the function key.
Maintenance Manager A1
Display the last used
application
A2
Z
Fig. 1.1.1.2 (d) Registering a shortcut key
For details on how to customize, see "2.2 CONFIGURATION FILES THAT

AFFECT THE ENTIRE iHMI" and "3.3 CUSTOMIZING A SCREEN WITH FANUC
PICTURE".
7
B-64647EN/01
1.1.2 Environment Required for iHMI Customization

1.1.2
This section describes an environment required for iHMI customization.
1 1.1.2.1
1.1.2.1
User application
The machine manufacturers can use the SDK and libraries when creating their
2 own iHMI application.
 For PANEL iH Pro

To create an application that runs on the PANEL iH Pro, the following environment
3 is required.
4 Table 1.1.2.1 (a) Environment Required to Create an Application That Runs on the
PANEL iH Pro
Item Description
5 Operating system (OS) Microsoft Windows 7 or Microsoft Windows 8
Professional
6 Memory 1 GB or more (2 GB or more is recommended)
Available hard disk capacity 4.7 GB or more
Display unit resolution 1024 x 768 or higher (1280 x 1024 or higher is
recommended)
7 Required application • Microsoft Visual Studio 2008 Professional or
Team Editions
• Microsoft Visual Studio 2008 Service Pack 1
8
You can create an application using the develop languages C/C++, C#, and Visual
A1 Basic .NET.
You can use the following libraries included in "CNC Application Development Kit"
(A08B-9010-J555#ZZ12) as necessary. The libraries can be used in Visual Studio
A2 2008 or later.
• FOCAS2 library
Z • iHMI library
 For PANEL iH
To create an application that runs on the PANEL iH, the following environment is
required.
Table 1.1.2.1 (b) Environment Required to Create an Application That Runs on

the PANEL iH
Item Description
Operating system (OS) Microsoft Windows 7 or Microsoft Windows 8
Professional
8
B-64647EN/01
Item Description
Memory 1 GB or more (2 GB or more is recommended)
Available hard disk capacity 4.7 GB or more
Display unit resolution 1024 x 768 or higher (1280 x 1024 or higher is
recommended) 1
Required application • Microsoft Visual Studio 2008 Professional or
Team Editions
• Microsoft Visual Studio 2008 Service Pack 1
• Visual Studio 2008 update for Windows
2
Embedded Compact 7
• Windows Embedded Compact 7 ATL Update for
Visual Studio 2008 SP1
3
• FANUC SDK for Windows Embedded Compact 7
(*1)
*1: You can create an application using the develop languages C/C++, C#, and
4
Visual Basic .NET included in "iHMI Application SDK for PANEL iH" (A08B-
9110-J713#ZZ11). 5
You can use the following libraries included in "iHMI Application SDK for PANEL
iH" (A08B-9110-J713#ZZ11) as necessary. 6
• Standard library (FISLIB)
• FOCAS2 library
7
• iHMI library
8
1.1.2.2 FANUC PICTURE
To create a screen using FANUC PICTURE, the following environment is required.
1.1.2.2
A1
Table 1.1.2.2 Environment Required for FANUC PICTURE
Item Description A2
Operating system (OS) Microsoft Windows 7, Microsoft Windows 8, or
Memory
Microsoft Windows 10
4 GB or more
Z
Available hard disk capacity 64MB or more
Display unit resolution 1280 x 960 or higher
Peripheral device CF card, USB flash drive
Required application Internet Explorer (version 9.0 or later)
For both PANEL iH Pro and PANEL iH, software included in "CNC Application
Development Kit" (A08B-9010-J555#ZZ12) is used to create a screen.
9
B-64647EN/01
1.1.2.3 Machine alarm diagnosis guidance table

The machine alarm diagnosis guidance table allows you to create alarm diagnosis
1.1.2.3
function data in the iHMI Information Center. To use the machine alarm diagnosis
guidance table, the following environment is required.
1 Table 1.1.2.3 Environment Required for Machine Alarm Diagnosis Guidance

2 Table
Item Description
Operating system (OS) Microsoft Windows 7 or Microsoft Windows 8
3 Memory
Available hard disk capacity
1GB or more
128MB or more
Peripheral device CF card, USB flash drive
4 Required application Microsoft Excel 2007 or Microsoft Excel 2010
5 The machine alarm diagnosis guidance table is included in both "CNC Application
Development Kit" (A08B-9010-J555#ZZ12) and "iHMI Application SDK for PANEL
6 iH" (A08B-9110-J713#ZZ11).
7 1.1.3 iHMI Hardware Performance Table

1.1.3
There are two types of hardware, FANUC PANEL iH and FANUC PANEL iH Pro.
The performance of each type is as follows:
8
Table 1.1.3 Performance of PANEL iH and PANEL iH Pro
A1 Item PANEL iH PANEL iH Pro

OS Windows Embedded Compact 7 Windows Embedded Standard 7
CPU ARM Core i
A2 General None Can be used after operation is
Windows verified
application
Z Shutdown Not required Required
Memory Main memory: 1 GB SSD type
File memory: 2 to 16 GB compact C drive (13 GB)
flash card D drive (All areas after C drive)
HDD type
C drive (500GB)
D drive (None)
Display 10.4 inch color TFT LCD (800 x 600),
16.0 inch color TFT LCD (1024 x 768), or
19.0 inch color TFT LCD (1280 x 1024)
32-bit full color
MDI keys (QWERTY layout, ONGP layout)
Soft keys or touch panel
10
B-64647EN/01
Item PANEL iH PANEL iH Pro

Ports PCMCIA x 1 (*1) PCMCIA x 1
Ethernet (10BASE-TX) Ethernet (100BASE-TX)
USB2.0 x 2 USB2.0 x 4
Serial port (RS-232C) x 2 (*2)
OS standard Internet Explorer 7 for Windows
Serial port (RS-232C) x 2
Internet Explorer 8.0
1
software Embedded Windows Media Player 12.0
Software
.NET Compact Framework 3.5
HSSB driver
.NET Framework 2.0/3.0/3.5/4.5
HSSB driver
2
provided by MDI key driver MDI key driver
FANUC FOCAS2 library
iHMI (including the CNC screen
Hardware monitoring driver
FOCAS1/2 library 3
display function) iHMI (including the CNC screen
display function)
*1 Only the PC card provided by FANUC can be used.
4
*2 For the display integrated unit, the ports are shared with the CNC. While they
are used by the CNC, applications cannot be used.
5
6
7
8
A1
A2
Z
11
B-64647EN/01
1.2　iHMI MAINTENANCE OVERVIEW
1.2
1.2 iHMI MAINTENANCE OVERVIEW

The iHMI maintenance functions include the iHMI batch backup function, which
1 saves all data files created with the iHMI function and general data created by the
machine manufacturer or users to an external device. For details, see "4.1 DATA
BACKUP/RESTORE".
2 In addition, you can update the software by updating the iHMI basic function
software. For details, see "4.3 HOW TO UPDATE THE SOFTWARE".
3
4
5
6
7
8
A1
A2
Z
12
2
SETTING UP iHMI 1
APPLICATIONS 2
3
4
5
This section describes how to set up each iHMI application.
2.1 iHMI APPLICATION SETUP OVERVIEW ............................................ 14

A
2.2 CONFIGURATION FILES THAT AFFECT THE ENTIRE iHMI ............. 17
2.3 SETTING UP BASIC FUNCTIONS ........................................................ 27
2.4 SETTING UP THE PLANNING APPLICATION ...................................... 54
2.5 SETTING UP THE MACHINING APPLICATION .................................... 62
2.6 SETTING UP THE IMPROVEMENT APPLICATION............................ 159
2.7 SETTING UP THE UTILITY APPLICATION ......................................... 173
2.8 CREATING PROGRAM STORAGE FILES .......................................... 181
B-64647EN/01
CHAPTER 2 SETTING UP iHMI APPLICATIONS 
2.1　iHMI APPLICATION SETUP OVERVIEW
2.1
2.1 iHMI APPLICATION SETUP OVER-

VIEW
1 You can customize the functions of iHMI applications, add applications to the
Home screen, and change the background.
2
2.1.1 iHMI Folder Configuration
3
2.1.1
 iHMI application folder

iHMI applications are stored in the following locations. (These folders may be
4 described as "%APPPATH%" in this document.)
For PANEL iH
\Storage Card\FANUC\iHMI
5 For PANEL iH Pro
C:\Program Files (x86)\FANUC\iHMI
6
 iHMI data folder
iHMI data are stored in the following locations. (These folders may be described
7 as "%APPDATA%" in this document.)
For PANEL iH
8 \Storage Card2\FANUC\iHMI
For PANEL iH Pro
For PANEL iH Pro (SSD): D:\FANUC\iHMI
A1 For PANEL iH Pro (HDD): C:\ProgramData\FANUC\iHMI
2.1.1.1 Folder configuration inside the CNC

A2 2.1.1.1
The folder configuration inside the CNC is shown below. Data required for each
customization are stored the folders (3) and (4).
Z Program storage memory
inside the CNC
//CNC_MEM SYSTEM (5) System folder

(4) Folder 1 (dedicated to
MTB1
machine manufacturer)
MTB2 (3)Folder 2 (dedicated to
machine manufacturer)
USER
PATH1
(2) Common program
LIBRARY folder
Fig. 2.1.1.1 Folder configuration inside the CNC
14
B-64647EN/01
• With the parameter (No. 3457), you can set whether to enable searching in the
 folders (2) to (5) shown in the figure above. For details about the parameters,
see "FANUC Series 30i/31i/32i-MODEL B PARAMETER MANUAL" (B-
MEMO
64490EN). 1
2.1.2 Customizable Applications

2
2.1.2
The following shows customizable iHMI applications:

3
Table 2.1.2 Application List
Application name Customization overview Icon 4
Tool Manager Allows you to add a function to manage tool
information required at production sites.
5
Cycle Time Estimation Allows you to set an auxiliary function time to
(Option) estimate an accurate cycle time.
6
NC OPERATION Allows you to edit, change setups, and
execute programs in the CNC screen. 7
Machine Collision
Avoidance (Option)
Allows you to set signals to be used while the
machine collision avoidance function is being
8
executed.
Lathe Conversation Allows you to create an NC program only by

A1
(Option) entering blank and part geometries and
determining a machining process.
For details, see "FANUC Interactive A2
Programming Function for Complex Lathe
OPERATOR'S MANUAL" (B-64654EN).
Data Logger Allows you to import/export logs collected with Z
the data logger function.
Maintenance Manager Allows you to switch the display of manage

maintenance information, such as consumable
life management and abnormality detection,
and to output switching settings.
Manual Viewer Allows you to import manual information.
15
B-64647EN/01
Application name Customization overview Icon

WEB BROWSER Allows you to set the start page of the Web
browser.
1 Maintenance Display Displays the conventional NC screen.

For details, see "CNC Screen Display Function
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
A1
A2
Z
16
B-64647EN/01
2.2　CONFIGURATION FILES THAT AFFECT THE ENTIRE iHMI
2.2
2.2 CONFIGURATION FILES THAT

AFFECT THE ENTIRE iHMI
Configuration files that affect the entire iHMI are of three types such as: 1
• Application definition file (XML file)
• iHMI whole configuration file (XML file) 2
• File for individual settings common to the applications (INI format file)
3
2.2.1
2.2.1
Application Definition File 4
The application definition file (apps-general.xml) is stored in the iHMI data folder
(%APPDATA% folder). By changing this file, the following operations can be
performed. 5
- Adding an application to the Home screen
- Changing the initial display screen after power-on
- Changing the Home screen 6
 Adding an application to the Home screen
Add the following description of the <entry> tag to the application definition file.
7
<entry>
<name>CNC</name>
8
<category>Machining</category>
<caption>
<en>CNC</en>
<ja>CNC</ja>
A1
</caption>
<file>%APPPATH%\NcOperation\NcOperation.exe</file>
<image>%APPPATH%\Resources\NcOperation.svg</image> A2
</entry>
The following are details of the descriptions between the <entry> and </entry> Z
tags.
Table 2.2.1 (a) Description in the <entry> Tag

XML tag Description
<name> Identifier ID (Set not to be duplicated)
<category> Category where the application belongs (select Planning, Machining,
Improvement, or Utility)
<caption> Application name displayed in the Home screen
<file> Absolute path of the application execution file (exe)
<image> Absolute path of the application icon file (png, bmp, svg)
17
B-64647EN/01
XML tag Description

<current> Current path of the application
<parameters> Parameters passed when the application is started
<subject> Character string (up to 63 characters, nullable) passed when the
1 application is called.
The following options can be set for the <entry> tag.

2
Table 2.2.1 (b) Description of Each Option
3 Option Description
startup Starts the application when Application Manager is started.
4 nomenu
waitregister
Does not display the application on the Home screen menu.
Starts the application in synchronization with Application
Manager.
5 alwaysvisible Does not hide the application even if it goes to background.
6 The application name can be described in each language by adding the following
<[language]> tag to the <caption> tag.
7 Table 2.2.1 (c) Languages Used in the <[language]> Tag

<[language]> <[language]> <[language]>
Language name Language name Language name
Tag Tag Tag
8 <en> English <da> Danish <bg> Bulgarian
<ja> Japanese <pt> Portuguese <ro> Romanian
A1 <de>
<fr>
German
French
<pl>
<hu>
Polish
Hungarian
<sk>
<fi>
Slovak
Finnish
Traditional
A2 <cht>
Chinese
<sv> Swedish <vi> Vietnamese
<it> Italian <cs> Czech <id> Indonesian

Simplified
Z <ko> Korean <chs>
Chinese
<sl> Slovene
<es> Spanish <ru> Russian

<nl> Dutch <tr> Turkish
An application is added to the Home screen by adding the <entry> tag description
to the XML file.
 Changing the initial display screen after power-on

Set the value of the <name> tag for an application you want to display as the initial
display screen to the "first" option of the <apps> tag.
Example:
18
B-64647EN/01
<apps first=" CNCOPERA ">
 Changing the Home screen

Set the value of the <name> tag for an application you want to display as the
Home screen to the "home" option of the <apps> tag. 1
Example:
<apps home=" MainMenu ">
2
2.2.1.1
2.2.1.1
Starting an application with a screen specified
To start an application with a screen specified, add the <subject> tag. For subject
3
values that can be specified in the CNC operation screen and maintenance
display, see ""A.2 CNC OPERATION SCREEN SWITCHING ID (subject VALUE)""
and ""A.3 MAINTENANCE DISPLAY SWITCHING ID (subject VALUE)"".
4
5
 You can add multiple <subject> tags with different values to one application. In
such a case, the <name> tags must have the same value.
MEMO
6
2.2.1.2 Starting iHMI applications from shortcuts 7
You can start specified applications from the shortcuts on iHMI. The following
2.2.1.2
shortcut startup settings are available.

• Starting applications from the shortcuts 8
• Registering multiple shortcut keys
• Disabling the shortcut function for specific applications A1
 Screen transition A2
When you press a shortcut key, an application registered to the shortcut starts up.
Pressing the shortcut key again displays the last used application.
Z
Example: Shortcut key: <CUSTOM1> key, shortcut application: "Maintenance
Manager"
19
B-64647EN/01
Maintenance Manager
Display the last used

application
1
2
3
Start the shortcut application
4 Fig. 2.2.1.2 Screen transition
5
6 
NOTE
An application with the shortcut function disabled is not switched to another as
shown above.
7  How to define a shortcut key

You can define a shortcut key by adding a shortcut definition to the configuration
file (apps-general.xml).
8 Add the <shortcuts> tag below the <apps> tag in the configuration file. Put
shortcut key information between <shortcuts> and </shortcuts>. Shortcut key
A1 information needs to be provided in the <entry> tag for each shortcut key added.
The following is a list of tags included between <shortcuts> and </shortcuts>.
A2 Table 2.2.1.2 Description in the <shortcuts> tag

XML tag Requir Child Description
Z <entry>
ed
○
element
<key> Put shortcut information.
<name> You can add the invalidname attribute.
<subject> invalidname: Specify the identifier ID of an
application for which you want to disable the
shortcut. If you want to disable the shortcut
function for more than one application, separate
the IDs by ",".
20
B-64647EN/01
XML tag Requir Child Description

ed element
<key> ○ None Specify a shortcut key.
The following are the keys that can be specified
as a shortcut:
PROG: <PROG> key 1
OFFSET: <OFFSET> key
MESSAGE: <MESSAGE> key
SYSTEM: <SYSTEM> key 2
GRAPH: <GRAPH> key
CUSTOM1: <CUSTOM1> key
CUSTOM2: <CUSTOM2> key 3
• The <POS> key cannot be selected
 because it is used for Information

Center display.
4
NOTE • If you select keys other than the
above, the definition will be invalid.
5
<name> ○ None Application identifier ID.
Enter the identifier ID of an application you want
to display when pressing the shortcut key
6
specified in <key>.
<subject> × None Character string (up to 63 characters, nullable)
passed when the application is called.
7
 Description example of the configuration file

8
The following shows a description example of apps-general.xml for executing the
following operations.
A1
• "App02" is displayed when the <PROG> function key is pressed.
• "App03" is displayed when the <CUSTOM1> function key is pressed. While
"App01" is displayed, the shortcut is disabled. A2
Z
21
B-64647EN/01
<?xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-16"?>

<apps home="MainMenu" info="AppMgr">
<entry>
<name>App01</name>
1 </entry>
...
<entry>
<name>App02</name>
2 </entry>
...
<entry>
<name>App03</name>
3 </entry>
...
<shortcuts>
4 <entry>
<key>PROG</key>
<name>App02</name> Add <PROG> to
<subject>open,Main</ subject > shortcut key
5 </entry>
<entry invalidname="App01">
<key>CUSTOM1</key>
6 <name>App03</name>
</entry>
Add <CUSTOM1> to
shortcut key
</shortcuts>
</apps>
7
8 2.2.2 iHMI Whole Configuration File
2.2.2
You can change the settings for startup, and the display position and size of an
iHMI application by modifying the XML file (settings.xml).
A1
 Startup settings for an iHMI application
You can change the startup settings for an iHMI application by modifying the XML
A2 file (settings.xml) stored in the %APPPATH% folder.
The XML file has the following description, and you can change the settings by
Z modifying the description.
<settings>
...
<time>
<sync>yes</sync>
<timeout>0.0</timeout>
</time>
<display taskbar="hide"/>
</settings>
22
B-64647EN/01
The following describes tag descriptions.
Table 2.2.2 (a) Description in the Tags

XML tag Description
<time> Time settings 1
<sync> If "yes" is set, the application is synchronized with the NC.
<timeout>
<display>
Set the timeout time when the application is started.
Display settings. If taskbar="hide" is set, the taskbar is hidden.
2
 Setting the display position and size of an iHMI application

3
You can change the display position and size of an iHMI application by modifying
the XML file (settings-general.xml) stored in the iHMI data folder (%APPDATA% 4
folder).
The XML file has the following description, and you can change the settings of the
display position and size by modifying the description.
5
<settings>
...
6
<display>
<inchx10>150</inchx10>
<x>0</x> 7
<y>0</y>
</display>
</settings>
8
The following describes tag descriptions.
A1
Table 2.2.2 (b) Description in the Tags
XML tag
<display> Display settings.
Description
A2
<inchx10> Set the application display size. The value is ten times the display size
(select 104, 150, or 190). Z
<x> Set the application display position (x-coordinate on the upper left
corner).
<y> Set the application display position (y-coordinate on the upper left
corner).
23
B-64647EN/01
2.2.3 Individual Settings Common to the Applications

2.2.3
You can make settings common to the applications.
1 2.2.3.1
2.2.3.1
Hiding the vertical soft keys
The screen can be configured so that the vertical soft keys are hidden when an
application starts up. If you set the vertical soft keys to be hidden, the display area
2 of the main screen will be expanded to the full horizontal width.
3
4
5
6
Fig. 2.2.3.1 (a) Hiding the vertical soft keys
7 In this case, a slide cannot be displayed. The slide can be displayed by receiving a
notification from outside of an application.
8 On the slide, the display area size is the same as that for when the vertical soft
keys are set to be displayed. Note, however, that the slide is centered in the
screen horizontal direction.
A1
A2
Z
Fig. 2.2.3.1 (b) Hiding the vertical soft keys (slide)
 Configuration file
Values loaded from the configuration file at application startup determine whether
to display or hide the vertical soft keys.
24
B-64647EN/01
The configuration file is prepared for each application and loaded at application
startup.
In the configuration file, you can describe whether to show/hide the vertical soft
keys. If you make settings to show the soft keys, the screen will be configured to
display the vertical soft keys. If you make settings to hide the keys, the screen will
be configured not to display the vertical soft keys. By default, the soft keys are set 1
to be shown.
2
The vertical soft keys are displayed when:
 • Incorrect setting values are described.
3
• The setting item of whether to use the vertical soft keys is not described.
MEMO
• No configuration file is present.
4
The configuration file specifications are as follows.
Table 2.2.3.1 Configuration file specifications

5
Item Description
Path %APPDATA%\MTB\Application name\Setting\setting_data.txt 6
Format Windows INI file format
* The INI file is a file where various settings of Windows
applications are saved. 7
Section name VSoftKey_104
Key name USE_VSOFTKEY 8
Value (displayed) YES
Value (hidden) NO
Description example:
A1
[VSoftKey_104]
USE_VSOFTKEY=YES A2
Z

NOTE
• Displaying or hiding the vertical soft keys will be determined at startup. This
cannot be changed after startup.
2.2.3.2 Setting an animation to be used when a slide is displayed

In the configuration application and configuration file, you can set whether to use
2.2.3.2
an animation when a slide is displayed.

The settings of the configuration file are prioritized over those of the configuration
application.
25
B-64647EN/01
The settings of the configuration application are reflected when:

 • Incorrect setting values are described in the configuration file.
• The setting item is not described in the configuration file.
1 MEMO
• No configuration file is present.
2 The configuration file specifications are as follows.
3 Table 2.2.3.2 Configuration file specifications

Item Description
4 Path
Format
%APPDATA%\MTB\Application name\Setting\setting_data.txt
Windows INI file format
* The INI file is a file where various settings of Windows
5 Section name
applications are saved.
Slide_screen
6 Key name ANIMATION

Value (used) ON
Value (not used) OFF
7 Description example:
[Slide_screen]
ANIMATION=ON
8
• The setting of whether to use an animation set in the configuration file will be
A1  determined at startup. This cannot be changed after startup. If settings are
made in the configuration file, any setting change in the configuration
MEMO
application will be ignored.
A2
Z
26
B-64647EN/01
2.3　SETTING UP BASIC FUNCTIONS
2.3
2.3 SETTING UP BASIC FUNCTIONS

You can: (1) change the background color of the Home screen; (2) add buttons to
application menus; and (3) add status icons to the iHMI status display area. Also,
you can additionally display failure diagnosis messages on the Information Center.
1
2
2.3.1 Customizing the Home Screen
3
2.3.1
You can:
- Change the background of the Home screen.
- Add a shutdown button on the Home screen.
4
2.3.1.1 Changing the background of the home screen
2.3.1.1
To change the background of the Home screen, add an image file (svg, png) 5
called "BG" to the following location.
%APPDATA%\MTB\Home 6
7
8
A1
Fig. 2.3.1.1 Changing the Background of the Home Screen
If there are multiple image files called "BG" in the folder, the priority of a file to be A2
used as the background is in order of svg and png. If there is no image file, the
default background is used.
Z
2.3.1.2 Adding a shutdown button
For PANEL iH Pro, you can add a shutdown button on an application menu by
2.3.1.2
modifying the description of the XML file (settings-general.xml) stored in the

following location.
%APPDATA%\settings-general.xml
Add the following tag in the <settings> tag of settings-general.xml.
27
B-64647EN/01
Table 2.3.1.2 (a) Tag to be included between <settings> and </settings>

XML tag Description
<home> Specify information related to the Home screen.
1 Table 2.3.1.2 (b) Tag to be included between <home> and </home>

XML tag Description
2 <shutdown> Specify whether to display or hide the shutdown button. If "show"
is specified, the shutdown button will be displayed on the
application menu. By default setting, the shutdown button is not
3 displayed.
Setting example:
4 <settings>
...
<home>
5 <shutdown>show</shutdown>
</home>
</settings>
6
7
8
A1 Shutdown
button
A2 Fig. 2.3.1.2 Shutdown button
Z
 • For shutdown button operation, see "FANUC iHMI Home Screen OPERATOR'S
MANUAL" (B-64644EN).
MEMO
28
B-64647EN/01
2.3.2 Customizing the Status Display

2.3.2
You can add status icons to the iHMI status display area.
2.3.2.1
2.3.2.1
Adding status icons and character string display
The iHMI status display area can include machine manufacturer specific icons,
1
such as coolant, interlock, and machine warnings. Also, machine specific
information, such as numeric value display for temperature, can be displayed. The
machine manufacturer-specific icon and character string displays can be switched
2
by the PMC bit signal or byte signal.
These display items are left-aligned on the right side of the standard status
display.
3
Standard status Additional icon display Additional character string
display 4
5
Fig. 2.3.2.1 (a) Status display (top row)
6
Alternatively, they appear left-aligned on the bottom row of the status display area
(for 15" or 19" displays).
7
Additional character string display
8
A1
Fig. 2.3.2.1 (b) Status display (bottom row)
To display icons or character strings, create an XML file (file name: status.xml)
A2
and define the PMC signal and display items in this file.
Store the created XML file in the following location.
Z
%APPDATA%
 Maximum number of displayed items

The following table shows the width of the display area for each display unit size
and maximum number of displayed items per row (for display items of size 24 x 24
dots).
29
B-64647EN/01
Table 2.3.2.1 (a) Maximum number of displayed items

Display unit size Width of display Maximum number
area of displayed items
10.4" 449 dots 16
1 15" 640 dots 23
19" 896 dots 32
2
 Format of status.xml
The format of status.xml is as follows.
3
● </status/signals> tags
Specify PMC data to be displayed in the </status/signals> tags.
4
Table 2.3.2.1 (b) Description between the <signals> and </ signals> tags
5 XML tag, attribute Description
<pmc> tag Specify the PMC address for the input data.
6 Examples: 1:R1000, 3:R1000
name attribute Specify the input data name with a character string.
Examples: toolno, spload, etc.
If this attribute is not specified, the default will be "pmc".
7 type attribute Specify one of the following PMC data types.
bit: Bit string 32 points (4 bytes)
byte: 1-byte signed integer
8 unsigned byte: 1-byte unsigned integer
word: 2-byte signed integer
unsigned word: 2-byte unsigned integer
A1 dword: 4-byte signed integer
unsigned dword: 4-byte unsigned integer
float: Single precision floating point number
A2 If this attribute is not specified, the default will be "bit".
30
B-64647EN/01
• The following character strings are reserved as data names. Do not use these
character strings for the name attribute.
mode, run, emergency, edit, colcheck, path, date, time
• You can specify up to 32 data. Any data specified over 32 will not be reflected. 1
• For the icon display, "unsigned dword" and "float" can not be specified in the
data type.
2
 • Specifying too much data may cause performance drop of iHMI. Keep the
number of specified PMC data to a minimum.
NOTE • Data synchronization will not be ensured if you do not specify a PMC address
number that is in accordance with the data alignment. This means that for 2-
byte integers, the address number must be a multiple of 2, and for 4-byte
3
integers or single precision floating point numbers, the address number must be
a multiple of 4 in order to be in accordance with the data alignment.
• When the value of the floating point number is NaN (Not a Number), the value 4
will be treated as 0.
5
6
7
8
A1
A2
Z
31
B-64647EN/01
 </status/symbols> tag
Table 2.3.2.1 (c) Description between the < symbols> and </ symbols > tags
XML tag, attribute Description
1 <entry> tag Add one <entry> to add one display item.

The description order of <entry> tags is the display order of
items.
2 data attribute Specify the input data name you specified in the </status/
signals> tags.
To specify a bit signal, specify the bit position (0 to 31) after
".".
3 Examples: pmc.0, bitsignal.1
size attribute Specify the width and height of items in the format of "x.x".
The unit is pixel.
4 placement attribute If "lower" is specified, display items will be placed on the
bottom row of the status display area.
If this attribute is not specified, items will be placed on the
5 top row.
format attribute Specify one of the following data display formats.
6 image: Icon
formatted text: Format-specified character string
If this attribute is not specified, the default will be "image".
fontsize attribute Specify the font size in points.
7 If this attribute is not specified, the default will be 10 points.
<image> tag Specify the icon that corresponds to the signal value.
This must be specified when "image" is specified as the
8 format attribute for the <entry> tag.
value attribute Specify the status value.
Bit signal: 0 or 1
A1 Other than bit signal: Signal value (in decimal notation)
If this value is not specified, display will be blank.
<language> tag Specify the icon file.
A2 <en> tag: English icon file
<ja> tag: Japanese icon file
<text> tag Specify the format for the displayed character string for the
Z signal value.
This must be specified when "formatted text" is specified as
the format attribute for the <entry> tag.
forecolor Specify the character color in RGB.
attribute Format: #RRGGBB (RR: red, GG: green, BB: blue)
* RR, GG, and BB are 1-byte hex numbers (00 to FF).
Example: #FFFFFF (white)
If this attribute is not specified, the default will be black.
backcolor Specify the character background color in RGB.
attribute Format: #RRGGBB (RR: red, GG: green, BB: blue)
*RR, GG, and BB are 1-byte hex numbers (00 to FF).
Example: #0000FF (blue)
If this attribute is not specified, the default will be white.
32
B-64647EN/01
XML tag, attribute Description

<language> tag Specify the format for the displayed character string. Specify
with the same format as the printf conversion in C language.
Signal values are displayed with the following format
specifications.
%d, %i, %o, %u, %x, %X, %f 1
<en> tag: English format
<ja> tag: Japanese format
2
• Be sure to create the <en> tag. If there are no other language tags, the <en> tag
is selected.
3
 • BMP, PNG, and SVG formats can be specified for the icon file.
MEMO
• When the display items are placed on the bottom row of a 15" or 19" display
unit, the items will be hidden behind the alarm message display. Make sure to 4
place any high priority items on the top row.
5
 Setting example
To display the items as shown in the figure below, create an XML file as shown in
the description example. 6
7
Fig. 2.3.2.1 (c) Status display example
8
A1
A2
Z
33
B-64647EN/01
XML file (status.xml) description example

<status> When omitted: name="pmc" type="bit"
<signals>
<pmc>1:R1000</pmc>
1 <pmc name="toolno" type="unsigned word">1:R1004</pmc>
<pmc name="spload" type="float">1:R1008</pmc>
<pmc name="counter" type="byte">1:R1012</pmc>
</signals>
2 <symbols>
<entry data="pmc.0" size="24,24">
<image value="0">
<en>%APPDATA%\Icon\lamp00.png</en>
3 </image>
<image value="1">
4 </image>
</entry>
<entry data="pmc.1" size="24,24">
<image value="0">
5 <en>%APPDATA%\Icon\lamp10.png</en>
</image>
<image value="1">
</image>
</entry>
<entry data="toolno" size="24,24">
<image value="1">
</image>
<image value="2">
8 </image>
<image value="3">
A1 </image>
</entry>
<entry data="spload" size="80,22" format="formatted text">
<text>
A2 <en>Load:%3.1f%%</en>
<ja> 負荷 :%3.1f%%</ja>
</text>
</entry>
Z <entry data="counter" size="80,22" format="formatted text">

<text forecolor="#ffffff" backcolor="#00a0ff">
<en>Count:%d</en>
<ja> 個数 :%d</ja>
</text>
</entry>
</symbols>
</status>
 "%APPDATA%" is the same folder as one storing status.xml.

MEMO
34
B-64647EN/01
Table 2.3.2.1 (d) PMC data definitions and values specified using the </status/
signals> tags
Input signal name Input signal Data length Signal value
pmc 1:R1000 32-bit Bit0=1, Bit1=0
toolno 1:R1004 2-byte unsigned 3 1
integer
spload 1:R1008 Single precision 23.5
floating point number 2
counter 1:R1014 1-byte signed integer 27
3
Table 2.3.2.1 (e) Display items specified using the </status/symbols> tags
Input signal
name
Input signal Value File name Icon
4
pmc 1:R1000.0 0 lamp00.png
5
1 lamp01.png
6
1:R1000.1 0 lamp10.png
7
1 lamp11.png
toolno 1:R1004 1 lamp21.png

8
2 lamp22.png A1
3 lamp23.png A2
spload 1:R1008 Load:%3.1f%
%
Z
counter 1:R1014 Count:%d
35
B-64647EN/01
2.3.3 Setting the Machine Alarm Diagnosis

2.3.3
You can add work machine specific alarms (external alarm and macro alarm) and
operator messages as failure diagnosis messages to be displayed on the
Information Center.
1 Using PC tool "Machine Alarm Diagnosis Guidance Table", messages to diagnose
and solve machine alarms are converted to data loadable to the NC. Also, images
of trouble diagnosis messages for alarms and to assist solving troubles can be
2 set.
3
4
5
6
Fig. 2.3.3 Troubleshoot (diagnosis) window
7
2.3.3.1 Alarm and operator message types that can be added
8 The following machine alarms and operator messages can be added as failure
2.3.3.1
diagnosis messages.
A1 1. External alarms
2. Macro alarms
3. External operator messages
A2
2.3.3.2 Diagnosable numbers
Z Of machine alarms and operator messages, the following numbers can be
2.3.3.2
diagnosed on the Information Center.
1. External alarms
Table 2.3.3.2 (a) Diagnosable alarm numbers (external alarms)
Parameter EXA (No.6301#0)
=0 =1
Alarm number 1000 to 1999 0 to 4095
36
B-64647EN/01
2. Macro alarms
Table 2.3.3.2 (b) Diagnosable alarm numbers (macro alarms)

Parameter MCA (No.6008#1)
Alarm number
=0
3000 to 3200
=1
0 to 4095
1
3. External operator messages 2
Table 2.3.3.2 (c) Diagnosable message numbers (external operator messages)
3
Parameter EXM (No.6301#1)
Message number
=0
2000 to 2999
=1
0 to 4095
4
5
• Of external operator message numbers in the above table, as many as specified
in Parameter No.6310 can be diagnosed.
• Those diagnosable numbers are only the range of numbers displayed on the 6
CNC screen and different from ones set in each function.
• For numbers set in each function, see the manuals below.
External alarms/external operator messages 7
 "4.12 INSTRUCTIONS RELATED TO CNC FUNCTIONS" in "FANUC Series
30i/31i/32i/35i-MODEL B PMC PROGRAMMING MANUAL" (B-64513EN)
MEMO
Macro alarm
"II 16 CUSTOM MACRO" in "FANUC Series 30i/31i/32i-MODEL B Common
8
to Lathe System/Machining Center System OPERATOR'S MANUAL" (B-
64484EN)
• For details about each parameter, see "FANUC Series 30i/31i/32i-MODEL B A1
PARAMETER MANUAL" (B-64490EN).
A2
2.3.3.3 Environments required to create failure diagnosis messages Z

To create failure diagnosis messages to be displayed on the Information Center,
2.3.3.3
you need the PC tool "Machine Alarm Diagnosis Guidance Table". For the
required environment, see "1.1.2 Environment Required for iHMI Customization".
Install the tool according to the installation procedure described in the section
"2.3.3.4 Machine alarm diagnosis guidance table".
2.3.3.4 Machine alarm diagnosis guidance table

To create failure diagnosis messages to be displayed on the Information Center,
2.3.3.4
you use PC tool "Machine Alarm Diagnosis Guidance Table".

Use the following procedures to install this tool to the PC and create failure
diagnosis messages.
37
B-64647EN/01
 Installation Procedure
The following describes how to install the tool.
<1> Start "SETUP.EXE" in the installation CD (A08B-9010-J555#ZZ12).

1 The [FANUC Machine Alarm Diagnosis Guidance Table Setup] dialog box
appears.
2 <2> Specify the installation destination folder and click the [Next] button.
3
4
5
6
The installation confirmation dialog box appears.
7
 • You can change the installation destination folder by clicking the [Browse]
8 MEMO
button.
A1 <3> Click the [Next] button.

Installation starts.
A2 When the tool is successfully installed, a message box appears to show the
installation completion, and "FANUC Guidance Table" is added to the Start
Menu.
Z
 Uninstallation Procedure
The following describes how to uninstall the tool.
<1> Open [Uninstall a program] from the Control Panel.
<2> Select [FANUC Guidance Table for Machine Alarm Diagnosis] from programs
currently installed.
<3> Click the [Delete (or Uninstall)] button.

A message box appears to ask you to confirm the uninstallation.
38
B-64647EN/01
<4> Click the [Yes] button.

The tool is uninstalled.
 Creating a Failure Diagnosis Message Input File 1

Create an Excel file where you enter failure diagnosis messages according to the
procedure below.
2
<1> Select [Start Menu] -> [Program] -> [FANUC Guidance Table] -> [Create New].
3
4
5
The [New File] dialog box appears.
6
<2> Enter the Excel file destination folder and the file name.
7
8
A1
<3> Click the [OK] button.
An Excel file is created with the specified name. A2
When you open the created file in Excel, you can enter failure diagnosis
messages. Z
• The file extension is "xls" (Excel workbooks) only. Extensions other than "xls"
are ignored and converted to "xls".
• If a file fails to be created, a message box appears according to the cause of the
 failure.
• Excel files or memory card format files for creating failure diagnosis messages
MEMO
for old models cannot be used. When using data for old models, select [Convert
Old Model Data] in Step 1 to convert the Excel file for old models and create a
memory card format file again.
39
B-64647EN/01
 Failure diagnosis message Excel file

If you use "Machine Alarm Diagnosis Guidance Table", enable the macro function
in the Trust Center Settings in Excel 2010. If the macro function is disabled, you
cannot create failure diagnosis messages. Also, in the Trust Center, set both the
failure diagnosis message input file folder and the machine alarm diagnosis
1 guidance table installation folder to "Trusted Locations".
2  Failure Diagnosis Message Input File Layout

There are two sheets in an Excel file where you enter failure diagnosis messages.
3 [Overall] sheet:
[Guidance] sheet:
Sheet used to set overall operation and a display language.
Sheet used to enter message character strings.
4
5
Fig. 2.3.3.4 (a) Excel file layout
6
● [Overall] sheet layout
In the [Overall] sheet, you can create failure diagnosis messages using the
operation buttons A to C shown in the figure below. You can also change the
7 display language (Japanese/English) in the sheet and configure the settings for
each language.
8 D
A
A1 B E
C F
A2
Fig. 2.3.3.4 (b) [Overall] sheet
Z
Table 2.3.3.4 (a) [Overall] sheet overview
Name Function
A Input Guidance Data Displays the [Guidance] sheet, where you input failure
diagnosis message data.
B Check Input Data Checks all data input in the [Guidance] sheet, such as the
numeric value range and unavailable characters.
C Make Memory Card Creates a memory card format file that can be loaded to the
File CNC, from data input in the [Guidance] sheet.
D Display Language Changes the display language in the sheet by selecting the
language from the list box and clicking the [Apply] button.
Japanese or English can be selected.
40
B-64647EN/01
Name Function
E Result of Check Displays the input data check result.
F Multi-Languages Configure the settings for inputting messages in multiple
languages.
1
● [Guidance] sheet layout
In the [Guidance] sheet, you can enter the number and message of each alarm or
operator message. 2
D E F
3
4
A B C
5
Fig. 2.3.3.4 (c) [Guidance] sheet
6
Table 2.3.3.4 (b) [Guidance] sheet overview
Name Function
7
A Guidance Table 1 Table where you input the numbers and titles of the alarms or
operator messages.
B Guidance Table 2 Table where you input questions or instructions to the alarms or 8
operator messages for the operator.
C Guidance Table 3 Table where you enter detailed descriptions of the alarms or
operator messages for the operator, and the file names of A1
images to be displayed.
D Page move Switches the display between Guidance Table 1 and 2.
E Check Input Data Checks input data in each Guidance Table. A2
F Row number Adds or removes as many rows as specified in the combo box
settings to/from the end of the table in Guidance Table 1 or 2.
The total row number of each Guidance Table is 30 at a Z
minimum and 2000 at a maximum.
41
B-64647EN/01
2.3.3.5 Creating failure diagnosis messages

Create failure diagnosis messages using the operation buttons A to C in that order
2.3.3.5
in the [Overall] sheet in the figure below.
1
A
2
B
3 C
4
Fig. 2.3.3.5 (a) Operation buttons in the [Overall] sheet
5
A Input Guidance Data
6 Displays the [Guidance] sheet, where you input failure diagnosis message
data.
B Check Input Data

7 Checks all data input in the [Guidance] sheet, such as the numeric value range
and unavailable characters.
8 C Make Memory Card File

Creates a memory card format file that can be loaded to the CNC, from data
input in the [Guidance] sheet.
A1
The following describes each operation.
A2  Entering Guidance Data

Click the [Input Guidance Data] button in the [Overall] sheet to display the
Z [Guidance] sheet.
Enter data in Guidance Table 1 to 3.
Only characters that can be displayed on the CNC screen are selectable for each
display item.
 For details, see the following description.
"APPENDIX G. CHARACTER-TO-CODES CORRESPONDENCE TABLE" in
MEMO
"FANUC Series 30i/31i/32i-MODEL B Common to Lathe System/Machining
Center System OPERATOR'S MANUAL" (B-64484EN)
42
B-64647EN/01
● Input contents in Guidance Table 1
A B C D E F G
1
Fig. 2.3.3.5 (b) Guidance Table 1
2
Table 2.3.3.5 (a) Input contents in Guidance Table 1
Name Input contents Number of 3
characters
A Kind Input the type of the alarm or operator message.
The following characters can be used.
Two single-byte
English 4
EX: External alarm characters
MC: Macro alarm
OP: External operator message 5
B Number Input the number of the external alarm, macro Four single-byte
alarm, or operator message. numeric
characters or less 6
C Classified Input two types of codes in "Code 1" and "Code 2". Code 1:
Code "Code 1 - Code 2" is displayed in the first line of the Two single-byte
Information Center. characters or less 7
Code 1: Input the category of the alarm or operator (or one double-
message. byte character)
Code 2: Input the number of the alarm or operator
message.
Code 2:
16 single-byte
8
characters or less
(or eight double-
byte characters
A1
or less)
D Title Input the character string of the alarm or operator
message.
32 single-byte
characters or less
A2
(or 16 double-
byte characters
or less) Z
E Probable Input the possible cause of the alarm or operator 32 single-byte
Cause message. characters or less
This is not used in the iHMI. (or 16 double-
byte characters
or less) x three
lines or less
F Message Input the message ID of the guidance message Eight single-byte
ID displayed first in the guidance area after the alarm alphanumeric
or operator message occurs. characters or less
Example: and uppercase
First message ID of external alarm 1000: EX1000A only for English
characters
43
B-64647EN/01
Name Input contents Number of

characters
G Additional Do not use this item.
Information
1 (Reserved)
2 • If you enter a type other than the above, an error occurs when input data is
checked.
 • Each category code does not need to match Type or Number.
3 MEMO
• Do not use "NC" because it is used for the category code 1 of the alarm
displayed on the CNC system.
• For the message ID, see the description of "Input contents in Guidance Table 2".
4
5 ● Input contents in Guidance Table 2
6 A B C D
Fig. 2.3.3.5 (c) Guidance Table 2
7
Table 2.3.3.5 (b) Input contents in Guidance Table 2
8 Name Input contents Number of

characters
A Message Enter a character string to identify Guidance Eight single-byte
A1 ID message (B).
Example 1:
alphanumeric
characters or less
First message ID of external alarm 1000: EX1000A and uppercase
A2 Example 2:
Second message ID of external alarm 1000:
only for English
characters
EX1000B
Z B Guidance
Message
Enter a message displayed in the details or
diagnosis window on the Information Center.
128 single-byte
characters or less
Describe a question or solution for the operator. (or 64 double-
byte characters
or less)
C Next Enter the message ID of the jump target when the Eight single-byte
Message [YES] or [NO] soft key is pressed responding to the alphanumeric
ID question of each guidance message. characters or less
If you do not want anything to occur (no jump target), and uppercase
enter "-1". only for English
characters
D Notes Enter a comment, etc.
44
B-64647EN/01
• Do not use a character string starting with "M" + numeric value because it is
used for the message ID, which represents the jump target from the NC alarm
guidance table to Guidance Table 2 on the machine.
 • The guidance message automatically starts a new line at every 32 single-byte 1

characters (16 double-byte characters) when displayed on the Information
NOTE
Center. If you want to break a line at a specific position, insert "\n". "\n" is not
counted as a character. The number of message lines must be four or less
including automatically broken lines.
2
3
● Input contents in Guidance Table 3
4
A B C
5
Fig. 2.3.3.5 (d) Guidance Table 3
6
Table 2.3.3.5 (c) Input contents in Guidance Table 3
Name Input contents Number of
characters
7
A Message Enter message IDs that have been entered in Eight single-byte
ID Guidance message 2. Enter message IDs
corresponding to the guidance messages where you
alphanumeric
characters or less
8
want to add detailed descriptions and/or images. and uppercase
only for English
characters
A1
B File name Set file names of the images for detailed description 50 single-byte
of guidance messages that have been entered in
Guidance message 2.
characters or less
(or 25 double-
A2
BMP, JPEG, and PNG formats are available. byte characters
or less)
C Detailed Enter character strings for detailed description of the 512 single-byte
Z
Explanatio guidance messages that have been entered in characters or less
n Guidance message 2. (or 256 double-
byte characters
or less)
45
B-64647EN/01
• For contents that can be entered as message IDs, use the description method
shown in Guidance message 2.
• Store the image file for detailed description in the same folder as the Excel file.
1  • If you want to break a line at a specific position in detailed description, insert

"\n". "\n" is not counted as a character.
NOTE • You do not need to enter contents in Guidance Table 3. If you do not need to
display detailed description and/or images in the troubleshoot (diagnosis)
2 window and use this function as the conventional machine alarm diagnosis, do
not enter data.
3
 Checking Input Data
When you click the [Check Input Data] button in the [Overall] sheet, the numeric
4 value range, number of characters, unavailable characters, and number of
message lines are checked for all input data in the [Guidance] sheet.
5 ● Display upon check completion

When the data are checked, the character string in [Result of Check] in the
6 [Overall] sheet changes from "Unchecked" to "OK".
7 Fig. 2.3.3.5 (e) Display upon check completion
8
 • If you edit the [Guidance] sheet after the result becomes "Checked", it returns to
"OK".
A1 NOTE
A2 ● Display at error occurrence

If an error occurs, the text in the check result changes to "NG", and the sheet and
guidance table names where the error occurred are displayed in the cell under the
Z check result as shown below.
Fig. 2.3.3.5 (f) Display at error occurrence

Click the guidance table name to display the guidance table where the error
occurred.
46
B-64647EN/01
1
2
Fig. 2.3.3.5 (g) Guidance table display
3
In the guidance table, the cell where the error occurred turns green, and the error
message is added as a comment for the cell as shown above. Error messages to
be added are as follows: 4
• Input a numeric value.
• The value is out of range. (n to m)
• Input in n single-byte characters or less (or m double-byte characters or less).
5
• The number of lines exceeds n.
• No message ID is referred to. 6
• The type (s) cannot be used.
* "m" and "n" represent numbers. "s" represents a character string
7
• By clicking the [CHECK] button displayed at the upper part of each guidance
table, you can check input data for the table. In this case, the check result is
displayed in the cell under the [CHECK] button as shown in the figure
8
below.
A1

NOTE A2
Fig. 2.3.3.5 (h) Check result display
• If an error occurs on multiple guidance tables, the name of a guidance table Z
where the first error occurred is displayed in [Result of Check] in the [Overall]
sheet. Check the check result of each guidance table shown under the [CHECK]
button.
 • Ifalarm
the message ID has a character string showing the jump target from the NC
guidance table to Guidance Table 2 on the machine, the cell turns light
MEMO blue.
47
B-64647EN/01
 Creating a Memory Card File

You can create a memory card format file that can be loaded to the CNC, from
data entered in the [Guidance] sheet, by clicking the [Make Memory Card File]
button in the [Overall] sheet.
Use the following procedure to create a memory card format file that can be
1 loaded to the CNC.
2 <1> Click the [Make Memory Card File] button.

The [Make Memory Card File] dialog box appears.
3 <2> Specify the file destination folder name in [Destination folder].
4 <3> Specify the file name to create in [File name].
5  •• The default name is "GUI_USR.MEM".

If no extension is used in the file name, the extension "MEM" is automatically
MEMO added to the file name.
6
7
8
A1
A2 When a memory card format file is created, the message box "Memory card
format file created." appears.
In the destination folder, "MachineAlarmDetails.DAT" is created as well as a file
Z with the extension "MEM".
• You can use only a single-byte alphanumeric short file name (MS-DOS 8.3
format) for the file name. Other format file names cannot be loaded to the CNC.
• If a file with the same name as one specified exists in the destination folder, the
file is always overwritten.

NOTE
• If a memory card format file fails to be created, a message box appears
according to the cause of the failure.
• If no data are entered in Guidance Table 3, "MachineAlarmDetails.DAT" will not
be created.
• If "MachineAlarmDetails.DAT" exists in the destination folder, the file is always
overwritten.
48
B-64647EN/01
● Loading using the BOOT function

By loading the created file to the CNC using the CNC BOOT function, you can
display failure diagnosis messages on the Information Center when an external
alarm, macro alarm, or operator message occurs.
Also, by storing "MachineAlarmDetails.DAT" in the following folders, you can
display the detailed description and/or images entered in Guidance Table 3, in the 1
troubleshoot (diagnosis) window.
%APPDATA%\MTB\TroubleShooting 2
 • For the CNC BOOT function, see the following description.
"APPENDIX C. BOOT SYSTEM" in "FANUC Series 30i/31i/32i-MODEL B 3
MEMO MAINTENANCE MANUAL" (B-64485EN)
4
 Moving from the CNC Alarm Guidance Table to the Machine Guidance
Table
If diagnosis using the NC alarm guidance table on the CNC concludes that
5
"diagnosis is required on the machine", call the message ID, a character string
starting with "M" + numeric value, to move to diagnosis using the guidance table
on the machine.
6
By creating guidance messages corresponding to the message IDs shown in the
table below, you can move to diagnosis using the created failure diagnosis
messages after diagnosis on the NC.
7
Table 2.3.3.5 (d) Reserved message IDs 8
No. Message Title Probable Cause
ID
1 M205 Rigid mode DI When G84 (G74, G88) was executed, the rigid mode
A1
OFF DI signal (G061.0) was not 1.
2 M409 Abnormal load Load torque has increased more than during normal
operation due to mechanical collision or twisting.
A2
3 M410 Excessive error The axis cannot reach the target position due to
4 M411
when stopping mechanical collision or twisting.
Excessive error The axis cannot move due to mechanical collision or
Z
when moving twisting.
5 M420 Excessive The torque error is getting larger due to a mechanical
torque error synchronous gap between two axes moving in
synchronization.
6 M421 Excessive There is a movement gap between the motor and the
semi-full error separate type detector in the full-close machine
because the machine is twisted.
7 M436 Soft thermal The load is getting larger, and an excessive electric
(OVC) current is flowing due to mechanical collision or
twisting.
49
B-64647EN/01

NOTE
• Message IDs starting with "M" + numeric value other than the above cannot be
used.
1
2
2.3.3.6 Creating different language messages
To change the language of messages displayed on the Information Center
3
2.3.3.6
according to the language displayed on the CNC, you need to enter messages for
each display language and create a memory card format file.
Enter messages for each display language in the corresponding language
4 message sheet.
5 The language of messages entered in the [Guidance] sheet is regarded as
6  "English".
When you need to use a language other than English, create a different language
MEMO
message sheet.
7  Creating a Different Language Message Sheet

Create a different language message sheet as follows.
8
<1> Click the [Multi-Languages] button in the [Overall] sheet.
The [Multi-Languages] dialog box appears.
A1
<2> In the [Create Sheet] list, select the check box for a language for which you
A2 want to create a sheet.
Now you can change the check box for the corresponding language in the
[Output to Memory Card File] list.
Z
 • You can select multiple check boxes.
MEMO
50
B-64647EN/01
<3> In the [Output to Memory Card File] list, select the check box for a language for
which you want to output at the same time to a memory card format file
loadable to the CNC.
1

NOTE
• Up to five check boxes excluding English can be selected. You cannot select
six or more check boxes.
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
A1
Language sheets selected in Step 2 are created. A2

Z
Different Language Message Sheets
51
B-64647EN/01
• Only 24 languages displayed in the [Multi-Languages] dialog box are

supported.
• Up to six languages (English + other five languages) can be output to a
1 memory card format file at the same time.
• When a different language message sheet is created, the language for the
[Guidance] sheet automatically changes to "English". The check box for
2 
NOTE
English in the [Create Sheet] and [Output to Memory Card File] lists in the
[Multi-Languages] dialog box is selected by default and cannot be changed.
• If you enter messages in the [Guidance] sheet using a language other than
3 English before creating the corresponding language message sheet, move
the contents in the [Guidance] sheet to the appropriate language sheet by
using cut-and-paste in Excel.
4 • To delete a created sheet, deselect the check box for the corresponding
language in the [Create Sheet] list in the [Multi-Languages] dialog box.
5  Filling in the Different Language Message Sheet
6 In a different language message sheet, you can enter three items of [Title],
[Probable Cause], and [Guidance Message]. Other items are automatically copied
from the data entered in the [Guidance] sheet and displayed.
7
Fig. 2.3.3.6 (a) Different language message sheet: Guidance Table 1
8
A1
A2 Fig. 2.3.3.6 (b) Different language message sheet: Guidance Table 2
Fig. 2.3.3.6 (c) Different language message sheet: Guidance Table 3
See "■ Entering Guidance Data" in the section "2.3.3.5 Creating failure diagnosis
messages" to enter data. After entering data, check input data and create a
memory card file.
52
B-64647EN/01
• The language messages output to the memory card file allow the automatic
 switch of languages for messages displayed on the Information Center

according to the display language on the CNC. However, if the memory card file
MEMO does not contain messages with the same display languages as ones specified
in the CNC, messages entered in the [Guidance] sheet are displayed. 1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
A1
A2
Z
53
B-64647EN/01
2.4　SETTING UP THE PLANNING APPLICATION
2.4
2.4 SETTING UP THE PLANNING APPLI-

CATION
1 You can set up the planning application functions such as tool management
function, Cycle Time Estimation, etc.
2
3 2.4.1 Setting Up Tool Management Function
2.4.1
Tool Manager includes the tool management function and tool life management
4 function and displays tool information related to each function according to the
option or parameter.
5 • The tool management function and tool life management function cannot be
6  specified at the same time.

• For details about various settings and parameters of the tool management
MEMO function and the tool life management function, see "FANUC Series 30i/31i/
32i-MODEL B CONNECTION MANUAL (FUNCTION)" (B-64483EN-1).
7
8 2.4.1.1 NC tool database management
The NC tool database treats data in Tool Manager, which are related to tools
2.4.1.1
mounted in the machine. In this database, displayable or settable items are

A1 changed according to the NC option and/or parameter settings as shown in the
table below.
A2 Table 2.4.1.1 Displayable and Settable Items List

Display condition
Z Option
No. Item Tool life Tool
Standard
management management
function function
1 Group Number ○
2 No. (Tool Management Number/ ○
Inner Group Number)
3 Tool Name ○
4 Tool Number (T Code) ○
5 Optional Group Number ○ (*1)
6 Magazine Number ○
7 Pot Number ○
54
B-64647EN/01
Display condition
Option
Standard
8 Stored Magazine
function function
○ (*2)
1
9 Stored Pot ○ (*2)
10 Tool management ○ 2
11 Tool Size ○ (*2)
12
13
Data Access
Data Search
○
○
3
14 Spindle Speed (S) ○
15 Feedrate (F) ○ 4
16 Large Tool Geometry No. ○ (*2)
17
18
Tool Image
Tool Model Number
5
19 Comment
20 Operation Memo 6
21 Flutes
22
23
Catalog No.
Conditions ○
7
24 Tool Life Count Type ○ ○
25 Tool Life Count Cycle ○ (*3) 8
26 Tool Life Counter ○ ○
27
28
Maximum Tool Life Value
Tool Life Value
○
○ (*1)
○
○
A1
29 Tool Life State ○ ○
30 Tool Life (Elapsed Tool Life) ○ ○ A2
31 Path ○ (*9) (*9)
32
33
Tool Compensation Number (H) (*4)
Tool Compensation Number (D) (*4)
○
○
○
○
Z
34 Tool Compensation Number (TG) ○
(*4)
35 Tool Compensation Number (TW) ○
(*4)
36 Tool Compensation Number (OFS) ○ (*9) (*9)
(*4)
37 Offset Data 1 to 13 (*5) ○
38 Imaginary Tool Nose ○
39 Tool Type (*6) (*7) ○
40 Tool Mount Position (*6) ○
55
B-64647EN/01
Display condition
Option
Standard
1 41 Dimensions 1 to 8 (*6) (*8) ○
function function
42 Customized Data 0 to 40 ○ (*10)

2 43 Holder Model Number ○
44 Holder Image ○
3 45 Holder Geometry (*6) ○

*1: You need to set the tool life management B function (parameter LFB
(No.6805#4) = 1).
4 *2: The tool management expansion B function option is required.
*3: The tool management expansion function or tool management expansion B
function option is required.
5 *4: The display items vary depending on the option or parameter.
For detail, see "A.3.3 Setting offset numbers for each tool" in "FANUC iHMI
6 Home Screen OPERATOR'S MANUAL (B-64644EN)".
*5: The display items vary depending on the option or parameter.
For details, see "3.2.1.4 Managing offset data for each tool" in "FANUC iHMI
Home Screen OPERATOR'S MANUAL (B-64644EN)".
7 *6: To set data for 32 pairs or more, the tool geometry dimension data option is
required.
*7: The tool geometry dimension data tool type addition option is required for
8 some tool types.
*8: The display items vary depending on the tool type.
For details, see "3.2.1.5 Tool Geometry Dimension Data That Can Be Set" in
A1 "FANUC iHMI Home Screen OPERATOR'S MANUAL (B-64644EN)".
*9: This item is hidden because the settings are not necessary. Or, it is hidden
depending on the system configuration.
A2 *10: The tool management function customized data expansion (5 to 20 or 5 to 40)

is required for Customized Data 5 to 40.
Z 2.4.1.2 Tool management function customization

The following data customizations, which are performed in the tool management
2.4.1.2
function, can also be performed in tool management function. A customization

command can be specified by entering G10 data.
• Name data of customized data
• Decimal point data of customized data
56
B-64647EN/01
• To use this function, the tool management expansion function or tool

management expansion B function option is required.
• In Tool Manager, the following customizations cannot be performed.
1
 Name data of the tool life state
Name data of the spindle and waiting positions
NOTE Tool management data display (changing the display position, selecting
Display/Hide)
Display name (tool number (T code) and soft key name of tool type number
2
search)
3
4
2.4.2 Setting Up Cycle Time Estimation Function
2.4.2
With the cycle time estimation function, you can estimate more accurate cycle 5
time by setting an auxiliary function time.
An auxiliary function time that you set will be added when estimating a cycle time.
Each auxiliary function time that you set will be also held when: 6
• The cycle time estimation function is terminated and then restarted.
• Estimation data is successfully updated. 7
• The M codes assigned to call macros by macro executer, which are set for the
compile parameters (No. 9023 to 9032) of execution macros, are not added
8
when estimating a cycle time.
 • For the second auxiliary function (B code), you can change the address to
command the second auxiliary function to a different one (A, C, U, V, W) other
NOTE than B, by the settings of the parameter No.3460. Note that, in the auxiliary
A1
function time setting window, [B code] is fixedly displayed regardless of which
address is set. To set the second auxiliary function to be used when executing A2
estimation, the address set for the parameter No.3460 is used.
Z
2.4.2.1 Application definition file
The identifier ID of "CycleTimeEstimation", which is the default value of the cycle
2.4.2.1
time estimation function, is set in the application definition file (apps-general.xml).

The cycle time estimation function cannot be set to start at the same time with
Application Manager. Do not specify "startup" in the option of the <entry> tag in
"CycleTimeEstimation".
2.4.2.2 Auxiliary function time setting window

In the auxiliary function time setting window, you can set a time for each auxiliary
2.4.2.2
function.
Follow the procedure below to select an auxiliary function for which you want to
set a time.
57
B-64647EN/01
<1> Press the [Settings] soft key.

The setting slide appears.
1
2
3
4
5
6 <2> Select an auxiliary function for which you want to set a time.
The auxiliary function time setting window appears.
The figure below shows a display example of when [M Code] is selected.
7
8
A1
A2
Z
2.4.2.3 Adding an auxiliary function time

You can add a new auxiliary function time.
2.4.2.3
<1> In the auxiliary function time setting window, press the [Add] soft key.
A line to set an auxiliary function time is added.
58
B-64647EN/01
<2> Move the cursor over the setting item and use the MDI keys to enter a value.
1
2
3
4
5
Table 2.4.2.3 Auxiliary function time settings
6
Setting item Setting range
First Code No. Must be single-byte numeric characters. Each setting range is
as follows: 7
Last Code No. M Code/T Code: 0 to 1000000000
S Code: 0 to 100000
B Code: -100000000 to 100000000 8
Time(ms) Must be single-byte numeric characters.
Setting range: 0 to 60000
Comment Enter characters that can be entered on iHMI. Up to 256 A1
characters can be set.
A2
<3> Press the [OK] soft key.
The auxiliary function time is set.
Z
• The following shows the initial value for each item of the added auxiliary
function time:
•First Code No.: 0
 •Last Code No.: 0

•Time(ms): 0
MEMO •Comment: Blank
• Up to 1000 sets of items can be added for auxiliary function time. When 1000
sets of items are displayed in each window, no more item can be added.
• Pressing the [Cancel] soft key will not add the auxiliary function time.
59
B-64647EN/01
2.4.2.4 Changing an auxiliary function time

You can change an auxiliary function time.
2.4.2.4
Move the cursor over the setting item where you want to make changes and use
the MDI keys to enter a value.
See Steps 2 and 3 described in "2.4.2.3 Adding an auxiliary function time".
1
2.4.2.5 Deleting an auxiliary function time
2 2.4.2.5
You can delete an auxiliary function time.
3 <1> Press the [Delete] soft key.

A check box(es) is/are displayed in the auxiliary function time setting window.
4
5
6
7
8
A1 <2> Move the cursor over the data you want to delete.
<3> Press the [Select] soft key.

A2 The check box where the cursor is placed is selected.
60
B-64647EN/01
1
2
3
4
5
 •• Press the [Select] soft key again, and the check box is deselected.
Press the [Select All] soft key again, and all check boxes are selected.
MEMO • Press the [Cancel All] soft key again, and all check boxes are deselected.
6
<4> Press the [Execute] soft key.
The confirmation message appears.
7
8
A1
 • When multiple check boxes are selected, the message [Are you sure you
want to permanently delete these X items?] appears. ("X" represents the
MEMO number of selections.)
A2
<5> Press the [OK] soft key. Z
The selected data are deleted.
 • Pressing the [Cancel] soft key will not delete the data and will hide the check
box(es) in the auxiliary function time setting window.
MEMO
61
B-64647EN/01
2.5　SETTING UP THE MACHINING APPLICATION
2.5
2.5 SETTING UP THE MACHINING APPLI-

CATION
1 You can set up the machining application functions, such as the CNC operation
screen and machine collision avoidance function.
2
3 2.5.1 Setting Up the CNC Operation Screen
2.5.1
Work required for machining including machining program editing and executing
can be performed in the iHMI CNC operation screen.
4 You can customize various operations and displays in the CNC operation screen.
5 2.5.1.1 Configuration file to use the multi-path edit function

Set the following item related to the multi-path edit function in the MTB
2.5.1.1
6 configuration file.
• Multi-path edit function enable/disable
7  File name and storage folder of the MTB configuration file

• File name
8 Setting_data.txt
A1 • Storage folder
%APPDATA%\MTB\CNCOPERA\SETTING\
A2
Z
62
B-64647EN/01
 Detailed setting items

• Setting group name
[Multi_Path]
• Specifiable key name 1

MULTI_EDIT_ENABLE: Set whether to enable/disable the multi-path edit
function.
2
 Describe each setting data under the group name of [Multi_Path].
MEMO 3
• Multi-path edit function enable/disable setting

4
For MULTI_EDIT_ENABLE, set one of the following values.
5
Table 2.5.1.1 Setting values for MULTI_EDIT_ENABLE
Setting Function enable/
disable
Description
6
1 Function enable Enables the multi-path edit function.
0 Function disable Disables the multi-path edit function. 7
Except 1
Not set
8
A1
A2
Z
63
B-64647EN/01
2.5.1.2 Setting the coordinate axes display and soft key display
The coordinate axes and soft keys are displayed according to the settings of the
2.5.1.2
MTB configuration file.

The following shows the soft key and coordinate axes displays for each parameter
setting.
1
Table 2.5.1.2 Coordinate axes and soft key displays
2 Coordinates Right-handed Right-handed Right-handed Right-handed
coordinate coordinate coordinate coordinate
system system system system
3 Rightward: +Z Rightward: -Z Rightward: -Z Rightward: +Z
Upward: +X Upward: +X Upward: -X Upward: -X
Parameter setting 16 17 18 19
4 (No.14706)
Soft key XY
display
5
6 ZY
7 YZ
8 XZ
A1
ZX
A2
Z Isometric
XY
Isometric
XY
Isometric
YZ
64
B-64647EN/01
 • For details about the parameters, see "FANUC Series 30i/31i/32i-MODEL B

MEMO
1
2.5.1.3 Setting the number of divided areas of the multi-path display
When the multi-path display function is enabled, you can change the MTB
2
2.5.1.3
configuration file and set the number of divided areas of the multi-path display.
• Number of divided areas of the multi-path display function (MEM mode base
only) 3
 File name and storage folder of the MTB configuration file
4
• File name
Setting_data.txt
5
• Storage folder
%APPDATA%\MTB\CNCOPERA\SETTING\ 6
7
[Multi_Path]
• Specifiable key name 8
MULTI_DISPLAY_DIVIDE_NUMBER: Set the number of divided areas of the
multi-path display. (MEM mode base only)
A1
Describe each setting data under the group name of [Multi_Path].
 • Number of divided areas of the multi-path display setting (MEM mode base A2
only)
MEMO
For MULTI_DISPLAY_DIVIDE_NUMBER, set one of the following values.
65
B-64647EN/01
Table 2.5.1.3 Setting values for MULTI_DISPLAY_DIVIDE_NUMBER

Setting Number of Description
divided areas
of the multi-
1 0, 1
path display
Maximum For the two path system, the display is divided into two
Not set number of areas.
2 divided areas
that can be
For the three path system, the display is divided into
three areas.
displayed at the For the four path system, the display is divided into
same time four areas.
3 Note that the display is divided into three areas for the
10.4" display unit.
2 to 4 Number of The display is divided into the number of areas
4 divided areas specified by a setting value.
specified by a Note that, if the display cannot be divided into the
setting value specified number of areas, the display will be divided
5 into the maximum number of areas that can be
displayed at the same time.
6 5 or more Maximum
number of
For the two path system, the display is divided into two
areas.
divided areas For the three path system, the display is divided into
that can be three areas.
7 displayed at the
same time
For the four path system, the display is divided into
four areas.
Note that the display is divided into three areas for the
10.4" display unit.
8
 Setting example for the MTB configuration file
A1 The following shows an example to set Setting_data.txt to the following settings:
• Multi-path edit function: Enable
A2 • Multi-path display function: Enable
• Number of divided areas of the multi-path display: 2 (MEM mode base only)
Z
66
B-64647EN/01
/*MEM mode base screen setting*/

[Machine_Type]
HORIZONTAL=0
[Actual_Feedrate] 1
MAX_SCALE-MARKINGS_VAL=20000
[Spindle_1] 2
ROTATION_REVERSE =1
3
[Spindle_2]
ROTATION_REVERSE =0 4
[Spindle_3]
MAX_SCALE-MARKINGS_VAL=3000 5
ROTATION_REVERSE =0
[Milling_Tool] 6
/*Multi path setting*/ 7

[Multi_Path]
MULTI_EDIT_ENABLE=1
MULTI_DISPLAY_ENABLE=1 8
MULTI_DISPLAY_DIVIDE_NUMBER=2
/*Workpiece coordinate slide setting*/ A1

[Offset_data]
SPEC_TYPE=0
[Graphic_range]
A2
X_MIN_VAL=-1000
X_MAX_VAL=1000
Y_MIN_VAL=-1000
Z
Y_MAX_VAL=1000
Z_MIN_VAL=-1000
Z_MAX_VAL=1000
 For how to set the enable/disable of the multi-path display function, see "2.5.1.1
MEMO Configuration file to use the multi-path edit function".
67
B-64647EN/01
2.5.1.4 Hiding the modal G codes

Setting the standard screen parameters (Nos. 3124 to 3127, Nos. 11365 to 11367)
2.5.1.4
hides the corresponding modal G codes.

The hidden modal G codes are closely displayed.
1
2 MEMO
3
2.5.1.5 Settings related to each mode base screen
4 You need to set the following data, which are displayed in each mode base
2.5.1.5
screen, in the MTB configuration file.

• Machine type (vertical or horizontal)
5 • Maximum value of the actual feedrate meter
6 • Maximum value of the spindle speed meter

• Spindle rotation direction
7
8 A
D
A1 C
A2 B
Z
Fig. 2.5.1.5 MEM Mode Base Screen
68
B-64647EN/01

• File name
Setting_data.txt
• Storage folder 1
2
Table 2.5.1.5 Settings of each mode base screen
A
Item
Machine type
Description
Regarding the icons of spindle rotation direction and uniform
3
peripheral speed, specify a machine type (vertical or
horizontal).
4
How to specify a machine type (vertical or horizontal):
[MT1]
Horizontal (0: Vertical, 1: Horizontal) 5
Example: For horizontal lathe
[MT1]
Horizontal=1
6
B Maximum value Specify the maximum value of the feedrate meter
of the actual
feedrate meter How to specify the maximum value:
7
Change the numeric value below:
[Feed]
MAX_SCALE-MARKINGS_VAL
8
Example: When the maximum value is 20000 mm/min or inch/
min A1
[Feed]
C Maximum value Specify the maximum value of the spindle speed meter A2
of the spindle
speed meter How to specify the maximum value:
Change the numeric value below for each spindle. Z
[Spindle_n] ("n" represents a spindle number.)
Example: When the maximum value of Spindle 1 is 3000/rev

[Spindle_1]
69
B-64647EN/01
Item Description
D Spindle rotation Specify an icon that corresponds to the spindle rotation
direction direction.
1 How to specify a spindle rotation direction:

[Spindle_n] ("n" represents a spindle number.)
ROTATION_REVERSE
= 0: forward rotation by the rotation direction signal SFR =
2 0/SRV = 1, reverse rotation by the rotation direction signal
SFR = 1/SRV = 0
= 1: forward rotation by the rotation direction signal SFR =
3 1/SRV = 0, reverse rotation by the rotation direction signal
SFR = 0/SRV = 1
(The rotation direction signal is a signal for each spindle.)
4 Example: When Spindle 3 is rotated in the forward direction by

the rotation direction signal SFR = 0/SRV = 1 and in the
reverse direction by the rotation signal SFR = 1/SRV = 0.
5 [Spindle_3]
ROTATION_REVERSE =0
6
2.5.1.6 Setting the spindle rotation direction icon display
The spindle information display tile in the machining program execution screen
2.5.1.6
7 displays a spindle rotation direction (forward/reverse) with an icon.

You can change the spindle rotation direction icon by combining the settings of the
signals and MTB configuration file.
8
A1
A2
Z
Fig. 2.5.1.6 Machining program execution screen
70
B-64647EN/01
 Signal
Signals to switch between ON/OFF of motor excitation at Cs outline control for
each spindle
Table 2.5.1.6 (a) Signal

1
Signal Description
SFRA<Gn070.5> 1st spindle forward/reverse rotation command
SRVA<Gn070.4> 2
SFRB<Gn074.5> 2nd spindle forward/reverse rotation command
SRVB<Gn074.4>
SFRC<Gn204.5> 3rd spindle forward/reverse rotation command
3
SRVC<Gn204.4>
SFRD<Gn266.5>
SRVD<Gn266.4>
4th spindle forward/reverse rotation command
4

5
• File name
Setting_data.txt 6
• Storage folder
7
 Setting contents of the MTB configuration file 8
Table 2.5.1.6 (b) MTB configuration file settings A1
Setting contents Description
Machine type (vertical/
horizontal)
Select a machine tool type (vertical or horizontal).
A2
Spindle rotation direction Select whether to invert the judgment of the signal to switch
signal inversion Yes/No between ON/OFF of motor excitation at Cs outline control.
Z
 • For the setting method, see "2.5.1.18 Configuration file to use the machining
cycle creation function".
MEMO
71
B-64647EN/01
 Examples of combinations of parameters and signals (Spindle 1 for Path

1)
Table 2.5.1.6 (c) Examples of combinations of parameters and signals

1 Setting contents of the MTB
Signal state
configuration file
Machine type Spindle rotation Displayed Icon
2 (vertical/ direction signal Gn70.5 Gn70.4
horizontal) inversion
Vertical No 0 0 Hide
3 0 1
4 1 0
5 1 1 Hide
Yes 0 0 Hide
6 0 1
1 0
7
1 1 Hide
8 Horizontal No 0 0 Hide
0 1
A1
1 0
A2 1 1 Hide
Yes 0 0 Hide
Z 0 1
1 0
1 1 Hide
72
B-64647EN/01
2.5.1.7 Setting the uniform peripheral speed control mode icon display
The spindle information display tile in the machining program execution screen
2.5.1.7
displays an icon that indicates uniform peripheral speed control mode.

You can select a uniform peripheral speed control mode icon to be displayed by
combining the settings of the signals and MTB configuration file.
1
2
3
4
5
Fig. 2.5.1.7 Machining program execution screen

6
 • To use this function, uniform peripheral speed control (option) is required. 7

MEMO
8
 Signal
A1
Signal to notify that the uniform peripheral speed control is being performed
A2
Table 2.5.1.7 (a) Signal
Signal
CSS<Fn002.2>
Description
Uniform peripheral speed control signal
Z

• File name
Setting_data.txt
• Storage folder
73
B-64647EN/01
 Setting contents of the MTB configuration file
Table 2.5.1.7 (b) MTB configuration file settings

Setting contents Description
1 Machine tool type Select a machine tool type (vertical or horizontal).
(vertical/horizontal)
2
 Combinations of parameters and signals
3
Table 2.5.1.7 (c) Combinations of parameters and signals
4 Setting contents of
the MTB Signal
configuration file Displayed Icon
5 Machine tool type

(vertical/horizontal)
Fn002.2
6 0
(Out of uniform peripheral speed control Hide
mode)
Vertical
1
(In uniform peripheral speed control
7 mode)
0
(Out of uniform peripheral speed control Hide
8 Horizontal
mode)
1
(In uniform peripheral speed control
A1 mode)
A2 2.5.1.8 Setting the traveling direction guide in the JOG, HND, INC, and REF
mode base screens
Z 2.5.1.8
You can change the traveling direction guide displayed in the JOG, HND, INC, and
REF mode base screens.
By default, the sample image shown below is displayed.
74
B-64647EN/01
1
2
3
4
Fig. 2.5.1.8 JOG Mode Base Screen
5
 How to set the traveling direction guide
Store an image that you want to display in the folder below and set a file name.
6
%APPDATA%\MTB\CNCOPERA\JOG_HND_REF\GUIDANCE
• The file name should only include single-byte alphanumeric characters and
7
symbols.
• Different images can be set for each path.
• Always put a path number and underscore (_) at the beginning of the file name 8
of an image that you want to display. (After this underscore, you can use any
characters for the file name.) Failure to do so will not display the image.
 Example: Image file name for Path 1: 1_sample.png A1

• The folder above stores the sample image. You can edit this sample image to
MEMO use it. You can also use a different image or photograph. In this case, note that
the file format must be png.
• The image is automatically enlarged/reduced (aspect ratio fixed) to fit the
A2
screen, but the sizes below are recommended.
10.4 inch: 370 (width) x 235 (height)
15 inch: 440 (width) x 305 (height)
Z
19 inch: 570 (width) x 455(height)
75
B-64647EN/01
2.5.1.9 Setting the workpiece coordinates slide

You can change the settings of display values and operation specifications of the
2.5.1.9
workpiece coordinates slide.
1
2
3
4
5
Fig. 2.5.1.9 Workpiece coordinates slide
6
7 • File name
Setting_data.txt
8 • Storage folder
%APPDATA%\MTB\CNCOpera\Setting
A1 Table 2.5.1.9 Workpiece coordinates slide settings

Item Description
A2 A Minimum/maximum In the property of [Graphic_range], you can set the minimum
values of the graphic and maximum values of the X-, Y-, and Z-axis.
coordinates system
Z B Input operation In the property of [Offset_data], set the value for SPEC_TYPE
prohibition settings to 0 or 1.
0: Prohibits input operation during operation/pause (same
specifications as those of the standard screen).
1: Prohibits input operation during operation/pause/stoppage
(same specifications as those of MANUAL GUIDE i).
76
B-64647EN/01
2.5.1.10 Setting the program manager slide

When an image file is linked to a program, the image preview will be displayed as
2.5.1.10
the icon for the program in the program manager slide.

For example, you can link an image of a machined workpiece. The image will be
displayed in the Program Manager Slide, so you can quickly find the relevant
program. 1
2
3
4
5
6
Fig. 2.5.1.10 Program manager slide
7
 Images that can be linked
Images that can be linked to a program are sample images prepared beforehand
or images read out to the following folders from an external memory using the file 8
manager application from the home screen.
%APPDATA%\USER\CNCOPERA\ProgramImage A1
• The main program can be linked with an image in EDIT mode only.
• The file format that can be linked to a program image is as follows:
A2
The file name should only include single-byte alphanumeric characters and

symbols (# $ & ' + , - . = @ [ ] _! ; ~).
BMP or PNG format (JPEG format is not supported). Z
The preview image may not be displayed when the size is 3000 x 3000 px or
MEMO
larger. Decrease the size of the image file and relink the file.
• For details about image linking operation, see the section "3.3.10 Linking an
Image to a Program" in "FANUC iHMI CNC Operation Screen OPERATOR'S
MANUAL" (B-64644EN-1).
77
B-64647EN/01
2.5.1.11 Opening/closing the custom macro variable slide

You can display custom macro variables as a list in the custom macro variable list
2.5.1.11
slide.
1  Opening the custom macro variable list slide

<1> On the operation screen, press the [Custom Macro Variable List] soft key.
2 The custom macro variable list slide appears.
3
4
5
6
7
 Closing the custom macro variable list slide
8 <1> Press the [Custom Macro Variable List] soft key.
The custom macro variable list slide closes and returns to the operation screen.
A1 • The [Custom Macro Variable List] soft key is displayed when the custom
 macro is enabled in the option parameter. For details about the parameters,
A2 MEMO
see "FANUC Series 30i/31i/32i-MODEL B PARAMETER MANUAL" (B-
64490EN).
78
B-64647EN/01
2.5.1.12 Displaying custom macro variable numbers and values

2.5.1.12
1
B 2
3
C
4
Fig. 2.5.1.12 Custom Macro Variable List Slide
5
Table 2.5.1.12 (a) Item List
6
Name Description
A Custom Macro Displays the first number of each range of displayable custom
Variable tab macro variable numbers. 7
B Custom macro Displays custom macro variable numbers and values.
variable display tile
C Guidance Displays messages such as warnings. 8
 Custom Macro Variable tab A1

The ranges of displayable custom macro variable numbers vary depending on the
option parameter and parameter.
Details are shown in the table below.
A2
● Local variables and common variables
Z
Table 2.5.1.12 (b) Local variables and common variables
Display
Range of variable numbers
condition*1
Local
Common variable
variable
(1) (2) (3)
#100 to #150 to #200 to #500 to #550 to #98000 to
#1 to 33
149 199 499 549 999 98499
N N N ○ ○ × × ○ × ×
N N Y ○ ○ × ○ *2 ○ × ×
Y N N ○ ○ ○ × ○ ○ ×
79
B-64647EN/01
Display
Range of variable numbers
condition*1
Local
Common variable
variable
(1) (2) (3)
1 #1 to 33
#100 to #150 to #200 to #500 to #550 to #98000 to
149 199 499 549 999 98499
Y N Y ○ ○ ○ ○ *2 ○ ○ ×
2 - Y N ○ ○ ○ × ○ ○ ○
- Y Y ○ ○ ○ ○ *2 ○ ○ ○
3 Tab (1) Tab (2) Tab (3) Tab (4) Tab (7)
○: Displayed
×: Hidden
4
*1: The custom macro variable numbers are displayed or hidden depending on the
combination of the following optional functions.
5 (1) Add custom macro common variable
(2) Add custom macro common variable (1000 variables)
6 (3) Built-in macro
*2: You can hide #200 to 499 (built-in macro variables) by the settings of the
machine configuration file.
7 • File name
Setting_data.txt
• Storage folder
8 %APPDATA%\MTB\CNCOPERA\SETTING\
• Setting
A1 [CUSTOM_MACRO]
EMBEDED_MACRO_NOTDISPLAY (1: Hidden, Except 1: Displayed)
A2 ● System variables
Z Table 2.5.1.12 (c) System variables

Parameter setting Range of variable numbers
#10000 to #100000 to
No.11369#4(CSD) #1000 to 8499
89999 199999
0 × × ×
1 ○ ○ *2 ○
Tab (5) Tab (6) Tab (8)
○: Displayed
×: Hidden
*2: Hidden when the settings are set as shown below:
Custom macro system variable #8570 = 1 (#10000 to 89999 are used for P-
CODE variables.)
80
B-64647EN/01
● Tab operation
Table 2.5.1.12 (d) Tab operation
No. Function
Operation 1
Soft key MDI keys Touch panel Others
1 Tab movement -
<→>
<←> Scroll bar - 2
<TAB>
3
 Custom macro variable display tile
The custom macro variable numbers and values in the range of the tab are
displayed. 4
The numeric values of the variables are updated in real time.
● Number of significant digits of numeric values 5

The number of significant digits of numeric values vary depending on the
parameter settings as shown below:
Parameter (No.6008#0 (F16) = 0): 12 digits 6
Parameter (No.6008#0 (F16) = 1): 8 digits
● Display when a numeric value exceeds the number of significant digits 7

When a numeric value exceeds the number of significant digits, the numeric value
itself is not displayed, and instead is displayed as shown below (common to all
languages). 8
Table 2.5.1.12 (e) For the parameter (No.6008#0 = 0)
A1
Range of the numeric value Display in the numeric value area
0 < Variable value < +0.00000000001 + *.***
0 > Variable value > -0.00000000001 - *.*** A2
Variable value > 999999999999. + ***.*
Variable value < -999999999999. - ***.* Z
Table 2.5.1.12 (f) For the parameter (No.6008#0 = 1)
Range of the numeric value Display in the numeric value area
0 < Variable value < +0.0000001 + *.***
0 > Variable value > -0.0000001 - *.***
Variable value > 99999999. + ***.*
Variable value < -99999999. - ***.*
81
B-64647EN/01

MEMO
1
2 2.5.1.13 Editing custom macro variables
You can edit the numeric value of a custom macro variable number by:
2.5.1.13
3 (1) Moving the cursor over the numeric value of the custom macro variable
number to be edited,
(2) Entering a numeric value, and then
4 (3) Pressing the <INPUT> MDI key.

Variables can be edited regardless of the CNC operation mode.
The table has two modes, cell select mode and cell edit mode.
5 • Cell select mode: A custom macro variable to be edited is not selected and
needs to be selected.
6 • Cell edit mode: A custom macro variable to be edited is already selected and
editable.
Operation when the MDI key is pressed varies depending on the state. The
following shows how the MDI keys you press correspond to the operations.
7
Table 2.5.1.13 (a) Table input operation list
8 No. Operation Cell select mode Cell edit mode
1 Number Clears the character string that is Enters the number at the cursor
already entered, enters the position.
A1 number, and then switches to cell
edit mode.
2 Alphabet Clears the character string that is Enters alphabetical characters at
A2 already entered, enters the cursor position.
alphabetical characters, and then
switches to cell edit mode.
Z 3 Operator Clears the character string that is Enters the operator at the cursor
operator, and then switches to
cell edit mode.
4 Symbol Clears the character string that is Enters the symbol at the cursor
symbol, and then switches to cell
edit mode.
5 <SPACE> Clears the character string that is Enters the space at the cursor
space, and then switches to cell
edit mode.
82
B-64647EN/01
No. Operation Cell select mode Cell edit mode

6 <INPUT> - Confirmation operation
Normal: Confirms the input value
and then switches to cell select
mode. Confirms as blank if no
input value is present. 1
Abnormal: Displays a warning
and remains in cell edit mode.
The input values or equations are 2
selected entirely.
7 <INSERT> - -
8 <ALTER> - - 3
9 <CAN> Empties the numeric value input, Deletes one character at the left
and switches to cell edit mode. of the cursor.
When the cursor is at the 4
beginning, no operation is
performed.
10 <DELETE> - Deletes one character at the right 5
of the cursor.
11 <ESC> - Discards the unconfirmed input
value. The screen enters the cell 6
select mode.
12 <CALC> - Calculation operation
Normal: Converts to the
7
calculation results of the
arithmetic expression. The cursor
moves to the end. Remains in 8
cell edit mode.
Abnormal: Displays warnings.
Makes the equations all selected. A1
Remains in cell edit mode.
13 <TAB> Moves to the tab at the right. Discards the input value that has
not been confirmed and then A2
moves to the tab at the right.
14 <HOME> - Moves to the left end of the
cursor. Z
15 <END> - Moves to the right end of the
cursor.
16 [↑] Moves the selected cell to the Discards the input value. The
one above. screen enters the cell select
mode.
17 [↓] Moves the selected cell to the Discards the input value. The
one below. screen enters the cell select
mode.
18 [←] - Moves the cursor to the left.
19 [→] - Moves the cursor to the right.
83
B-64647EN/01
No. Operation Cell select mode Cell edit mode

20 Page [↑] Moves the selected cell up for Discards the unconfirmed input
one screen. value. The screen enters the cell
select mode. Moves the selected
1 21 Page [↓]
cell up for one screen.
Moves the selected cell down for Discards the unconfirmed input
one screen. value. The screen enters the cell
2 select mode. Moves the selected

cell down for one screen.
22 Pressing a Operates according to the soft The soft key is grayed out.
3 23
soft key
Switching a
key specifications.
Switches to cell select mode of Discards the input value that has
path the path (after switching). not been confirmed for the
4 current path (before switching)

and then switches to cell select
mode of the path (after
switching).
5 24 Tapping any Selects the cell that you tapped. When the tapped cell is another
cell other cell that can be edited:
6 than the one Discards any input value that has
selected not been confirmed and then
switches to cell select mode.
When the tapped cell is the
7 original cell:
Moves the cursor to the tapped
position.
8 When the tapped cell is any cell

other than the above: Discards
any input value that has not been
confirmed and then switches to
A1 cell select mode.
25 Close the Closes the slide. Discards the input value that has
slide (open not been confirmed and then
A2 another closes the slide.
slide)
84
B-64647EN/01
• There is no limit to the number of characters to be input in the cell editing mode.
However, note that if the input value exceeds the allowable range, the value
cannot be entered, and a warning is displayed.
• If another cell is selected in the cell editing mode, the value currently being input
is discarded, and the display enters the cell select mode. There are the 1
following two methods to select other cell.
(1) Touching other cell
 (2) Hiding the selected cell by swiping (the closest displayed cell is made
selected)
2
MEMO
• During the cell editing mode, the soft keys are grayed out.
• The table can be scrolled by swiping even during the cell editing mode. The cell
editing mode is kept even during scroll as long as the selected cell is displayed.
3
• How data entered with no decimal point are treated is determined by the
settings of the parameter DPI (No.3401#0). For details about the parameters,
see "FANUC Series 30i/31i/32i-MODEL B PARAMETER MANUAL" (B- 4
64490EN).
5
 Write protection
Writing is protected in the following cases:
(1)Parameter (No.3290#2 = 1)
6
Writing is always protected.
(2)Parameter (No.3290#6 = 1)
Writing is protected except in MDI mode. Writing is possible in MDI mode.
7
(3)Parameter (No.3290#7 = 0)
When the memory protection signal KEY2 <Gn046.3> = 0, writing is protected.
(4)Write-protected data
8
• If you attempt to enter data in cell select mode when writing is protected, the A1
 warning message [Write Protected] will be displayed without entering cell edit
mode.
MEMO • For details about the parameters, see "FANUC Series 30i/31i/32i-MODEL B
A2
 Warning messages
Z
Warning messages will be displayed in the following cases.
Table 2.5.1.13 (b) Warning messages

Operation Warning message to be displayed
Changing to a numeric value that exceeds Data is out of range.
the number of significant digits
Wiring to write-protected variables Write Protected
Writing data that is not a numeric value Format Error
85
B-64647EN/01
2.5.1.14 Displaying custom macro variable names

Variable names are displayed as shown in the screen below whenever possible.
2.5.1.14
1
2
3
4
5 Fig. 2.5.1.14 Custom Macro Variable List Slide
6 When any of the conditions below is met, you can change variable names.
(a)Parameter (No.3207#5 = 1) (The names of the common variables #500 to 549
are displayed in the custom macro variable list slide.)
7 (b)The custom macro variable name expansion function (option) and custom
macro variable name are enabled.
8 Table 2.5.1.14 Variable name display
Display condition*1 Range of variable numbers

A1 Local
Common variable System variables
variable
(1) (2) (3) #98000 #1000 #10000 #100000
A2 #1 to
33
#100 #500 #550
to 499 to 549 to 999
to to to to
98499 8499 89999 199999
0 N N × × × × × × × ×
Z 0 N Y ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
0 Y N ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
0 Y Y ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
1 N N × × ○ × × × × ×
1 N Y ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
1 Y N ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
1 Y Y ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
○: Displayed
×: Hidden
86
B-64647EN/01
*1: The custom macro variable names are displayed or hidden depending on the
combination of the following conditions.
(1)Setting of parameter No. 3207#5 (Variable names of common variables
#500 to #549)
0: Not display.
1: Display. 1
(2)The custom macro variable name is "1000" on the optional custom macro
variable expansion function.
(3)The custom macro variable name is "4000" on the optional custom macro 2
variable expansion function.
3
 • You cannot edit variable names.
MEMO
4
5
2.5.1.15 Conditions to use the machining simulation function
2.5.1.15
You can enable the machining simulation screen display with the MTB 6
configuration file when all conditions below are met.
• Optional function
• Machine control type
7
• System Configuration
8
 Required optional function
The iHMI machining cycle function is required. A1
 Supported series
The machining simulation screen supports the series below. A2
G301, G311, G401, G402, G411, G421, G422, G431, G501, G511, G521
 Supported system configurations

Z
The machining simulation screen supports the system configurations below:
• Machine control type: Lathe, machining center
• Number of paths: 1, 2

• File name
Setting_data.txt
87
B-64647EN/01
• Storage folder

1 • Setting group name
[Machining_Simulation_Enable]
2 • Specifiable key name

SIMULATION_ENABLE: Set whether to enable/disable the machining
3 simulation screen.
4  Describe each setting data under the group name of

[Machining_Simulation_Enable].
MEMO
5
• Machining simulation screen enable/disable setting
6 For SIMULATION_ENABLE, set one of the following values.
Table 2.5.1.15 (a) Setting values for SIMULATION_ENABLE

7 Setting Enable/Disable Description
0 Disable Disables the machining simulation screen.
Except 1
8 Not set
1 Enabled Enables the machining simulation screen.
A1
2.5.1.16 Configuration file to use the machining simulation function
A2 2.5.1.16
Set the following items related to the machining cycle screen in the MTB
configuration file.
Z • Chamfering tool nose angle

• Single-path two-spindle machining enable/disable
 Required parameter
• Single path, two spindles
For the workpiece coordinate systems of the main and sub spindles, specify
the values shown in Table 2.5.1.16 (a) respectively in the following parameters.
• Main spindle: Parameter No. 14706
• Sub-spindle: Parameter No. 14707
88
B-64647EN/01
Table 2.5.1.16 (a) Setting Values in Parameter Nos. 14706 and 14707
Setting Coordinate system Rightward Upward
16 Right-handed +Z +X
coordinate system
17 Right-handed
coordinate system
-Z +X 1
18 Right-handed -Z -X
coordinate system 2
19 Right-handed +Z -X
coordinate system
20 Right-handed +X +Z 3
coordinate system
4
• File name
Setting_data.txt
5
• Storage folder 6
%APPDATA%\MTB\CNCOPERA\Setting\
 Chamfering tool nose angle

7
[Machining_Simulation_Tool] 8
• Specifiable key name A1
CHANFER_CUTTER_ANGLE: Set a nose angle of the chamfering tool to be
drawn with the simulation function.
A2
• Setting values for CHANFER_CUTTER_ANGLE
For CHANFER_CUTTER_ANGLE, set one of the following values.
Z
Table 2.5.1.16 (b) Setting values for CHANFER_CUTTER_ANGLE
Setting Function enable/ Description
disable
1 or above 0.001° Specify a value of the nose angle in units of 0.001 °.
Example: CHANFER_CUTTER_ANGLE = 30000
(30 °)
Not set When this is not set, it is taken as the initial value of
45000 (45.0 °) to draw a chamfering tool.
89
B-64647EN/01
 Single-path two-spindle machining enable/disable

[Machining_Simulation]

PATH1_SPINDLE2_ENABLE: Set whether to enable/disable the Spindle 2
machining for Path 1.
2 SUB_SPINDLE_EXISTED: Specify the presence or absence of the sub-spindle
(Spindle 2).
3 • Setting values for PATH1_SPINDLE2_ENABLE

For PATH1_SPINDLE2_ENABLE, set one of the following values.
4
Table 2.5.1.16 (c) Setting values for PATH1_SPINDLE2_ENABLE
5 Setting Enable/Disable Description

0 Disable Disables the Spindle 2 machining for Path 1.
6 Except 1
Not set
1 Enabled Enables the Spindle 2 machining for Path 1.
7 • Setting values for SUB_SPINDLE_EXISTED

For SUB_SPINDLE_EXISTED, set one of the following values.
8
Table 2.5.1.16 (d) Setting values for SUB_SPINDLE_EXISTED
A1 Setting Enable/Disable Description

0 None Specifies the absence of a sub-spindle.
Except 1
A2 Not set
1 Enabled Specifies the presence of a sub-spindle.
Z
2.5.1.17 Machining simulation screen
Machining simulation screen allows you to check how machining will be performed
2.5.1.17
by the program through graphic drawings before you proceed to production

machining.
For details, see the section "5.7 MACHINING SIMULATION" in "FANUC iHMI
CNC Operation Screen OPERATOR'S MANUAL" (B-64644EN-1).
 Displaying the Machining Simulation Screen

The machining simulation screen can be displayed from the EDIT mode base
screen or background edit screen (MEM mode base screen).
90
B-64647EN/01
<1> In the EDIT mode base screen or background edit screen, press the [Change
Screen] soft key.
The machining simulation screen appears.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
 Display at mode switching 8

The machining simulation screen includes the following two screens:
(1) Machining simulation screen, which is displayed from EDIT mode
(2) Machining simulation screen, which is displayed from MEM mode A1
The machining simulation screen has independent screen information for each
mode. Therefore, the program displayed in the machining simulation screens for
EDIT and MEM modes may differ from each other. The machining blank A2
graphically drawn in the machining simulation screen will be initialized by mode
switching.
Z
 Supported blanks
To perform machining simulation, you need to set a blank and tool geometry.
These graphic data are set in the drawing definition block that is entered in a
machining program.
The following describes the settable blanks and data:
● Rectangle (G code: G1902)

The settable items are as follows:
91
B-64647EN/01
Table 2.5.1.17 (a) Setting items (rectangle)

Data item Description Setting
example
B Blank width Rectangle blank width X-axis direction length 100
1 D Blank depth
(positive value)
Rectangle blank depth Y-axis direction length 100
(positive value)
2 H Blank height Rectangle blank height Z-axis direction height
(positive value)
70
I Workpiece origin Distance in the X-axis direction from the lower 50

3 position X left corner of the rectangle to the workpiece
origin (positive/negative value)
J Workpiece origin Distance in the Y-axis direction from the lower 50
4 position Y left corner of the rectangle to the workpiece
K Workpiece origin Distance in the Z-axis direction from the lower 0
5 position Z left corner of the rectangle to the workpiece
6
Setting example:
The following shows a display example of a blank geometry when the setting
values above are entered:
7
8
A1
A2
Z
92
B-64647EN/01
Table 2.5.1.17 (b) Setting example (rectangle)

Setting point Blank geometry display
B=100 D=100
1
H=70
2
3
4
5
6
7
● Round bar (G code: G1900) 8

Table 2.5.1.17 (c) Setting items (round bar)

A1
Data item Description Setting
example A2
D Blank diameter Round bar blank diameter (positive value) 50
L Blank length Round bar blank length (positive value)
K Workpiece origin Blank end face allowance (Z-axis distance between 0
100
Z
position Z the end face and workpiece origin)
W Workpiece origin Blank back end face allowance (Z-axis distance 0
position Z between the back end face and workpiece origin)
(Spindle 2)
93
B-64647EN/01
Table 2.5.1.17 (d) Setting items (round bar)

L=100
1
2
D=50
3
4
● Perforated round bar (G code: G1901)
5
Table 2.5.1.17 (e) Setting items (perforated round bar)
6 Data item Description Setting
example
D Blank diameter Round bar blank diameter (positive value) 100
7 E Blank inner Round bar blank inner diameter (positive value) 80
diameter
L Blank length Round bar blank length (positive value) 200
8 K Workpiece origin Blank end face allowance (Z-axis distance between 0
position Z the end face and workpiece origin)
A1 W Workpiece origin
position Z (Spindle
Blank back end face allowance (Z-axis distance
between the back end face and workpiece origin)
0
2)
A2
Setting example:
The following shows a display example of a blank geometry when the setting
Z values above are entered:
94
B-64647EN/01
Table 2.5.1.17 (f) Setting example (perforated round bar)

L=200
1
2
D=100 3
4
 Supported tools
To perform machining simulation, you need to set a tool geometry. 5
Cycle execution and graphic drawing are performed by referring to the tool
geometry dimension data input and tool geometry dimension data.
The following shows the settable tools and data: 6
Item
Table 2.5.1.17 (g) Supported tools
Mount position Information
7
General Tool A: Cutting
angle
B: Nose angle
8
A1
Flat End Mill A2

Z
Threading Tool B: Nose angle
95
B-64647EN/01
Item Mount position Information

Grooving Tool W: Tip width
L: Tip length
1
2
Button Turning Tool L: Tip length
3
4
5 Point Corner Straight
Tool
A: Cutting
angle
6 B: Nose angle
7
Drilling Tool B: Nose angle
8
A1
A2 Chamfering Tool D: Cutter
diameter
Ball End Mill Tool
96
B-64647EN/01
Item Mount position Information

Tap Tool
1
2
Reamer Tool
3
4
Boring Tool 5
6
7
Face Mill Tool
8
A1
Versatile Tool W: Tip width

A2
L: Tip length
97
B-64647EN/01
2.5.1.18 Configuration file to use the machining cycle creation function

Set the following item related to the machining cycle creation function in the MTB
2.5.1.18
configuration file.
1 • Enable/disable the turning function

• Enable/disable the milling function
2  File name and storage folder of the MTB configuration file

• File name
3 Setting_data.txt
4 • Storage folder
5  Detailed setting items

[Machine_Type]
• Specifiable key name

7 TURNING_FUNCTION_ENABLE: Set whether to enable/disable the turning
function.
8 MILLING_FUNCTION_ENABLE: Set whether to enable/disable the milling

function.
A1 • Cycle to be used
For TURNING_FUNCTION_ENABLE and MILLING_FUNCTION_ENABLE, set
one of the following values.
A2
Table 2.5.1.18 Cycle setting values
Z Setting Function
enable/disable
Description
0 Function disable Disables the cycle.

1 Function enable Enables the cycle.
• When the function of both TURNING_FUNCTION_ENABLE and

MILLING_FUNCTION_ENABLE is disabled, the soft keys to display the cycle
 menu will be hidden.

• The setting value is taken as 0 (function disable) when:
MEMO There is no MTB configuration file.
Nothing is described in the MTB configuration file.
An incorrect value except 0 and 1 is set as the setting value.
98
B-64647EN/01
2.5.1.19 Display settings of the MEM mode base screen

Of the data required for displaying the MEM mode base screen, set each data
2.5.1.19
below in the MTB configuration file.

• Machine type (vertical or horizontal)
1
• Maximum memory value of the actual spindle speed meter
• Maximum memory value of the milling spindle speed meter 2
• Spindle rotation direction signal inversion Yes/No
• Maximum memory value of the actual feedrate meter 3
 File name and storage folder of the MTB configuration file 4
• File name
Setting_data.txt
5
• Storage folder
%APPDATA%\MTB\CNCOPERA\SETTING\ 6
 Machine type (vertical or horizontal)
[MT1]
7
Horizontal (0: Vertical, 1: Horizontal)
8
 Maximum memory value of the actual spindle speed meter
Change the following numeric values for each spindle.
Set a corresponding spindle number for "M", and a target path number for "N". A1
[Spindle_"M"]: Enables the set value with respect to the Mth spindle for all paths.
[PATH"N"_ Spindle_"M"]: Enables the set value with respect to the Mth spindle for A2
a corresponding path.
Z
Example: When the maximum value for Spindle 1 is 3000/rev
[Spindle_1]
99
B-64647EN/01
If this is not set, a value is calculated from the parameters for the setting value as
follows.
1. Obtain the gear selection method.
1 Type M gear: Meets all of the following three conditions.

M series, uniform peripheral speed control (No. 9922#2) = 0, GTT (No.
 3706#4) = 0
2 Type T gear: Other than the above

MEMO 2. Calculate the maximum value according to the gear.
Type M gear: MAX(No. 3741, No. 3742, No. 3744) * No. 3736 / 4095
3 Type T gear: MIN(MAX(No. 3741, No. 3742, No. 3743, No. 3744), No. 3772)
(However, when No. 3772 is 0, MAX(No. 3741, No. 3742, No. 3743, No.
3744).)
4 3. Round the number with the upper two digits remaining.
5  Spindle rotation direction signal inversion Yes/No

Change the following numeric values for each spindle.
6 [Sn] ("n" represents a spindle number.)

ROTATION_REVERSE
= 1: forward rotation by the rotation direction signal SFR = 0/SRV = 1, reverse
7 rotation by the rotation direction signal SFR = 1/SRV = 0

= 0: forward rotation by the rotation direction signal SFR = 1/SRV = 0, reverse
rotation by the rotation direction signal SFR = 0/SRV = 1
8 (The rotation direction signal is a signal for each spindle.)
Example: When Spindle 3 is rotated in the forward direction by the rotation

direction signal SFR = 0/SRV = 1 and in the reverse direction by the rotation signal
A1 SFR = 1/SRV = 0.
[S3]
ROTATION_REVERSE =1
A2
 Maximum memory value of the actual feedrate meter
Z Change the numeric value below:
Set a target path number for "n".
[Actual_Feedrate]: Enables the set value with respect to all paths.

[PATHn_Actual_Feedrate]: Enables the set value with respect to Path n.
Example: When the maximum value is 20000 mm/min or inch/min

[Actual_Feed]
100
B-64647EN/01
If this is not set, a value is calculated from the parameters for the setting value as
 follows.
1. Synthesize the rapid traverse rate of each axis (No. 3115#3 = 0) used to
MEMO calculate the actual feedrate.
2. Round the number with the upper two digits remaining.
1
2.5.1.20 Setting program guidance messages

2
In the EDIT mode base screen or background edit screen, the meaning of a word
2.5.1.20
at the cursor position in a program being edited is displayed as a program 3

guidance message.
You can make settings to associate words with program guidance messages in
the following user customization files. 4
• Program guidance definition file
• Program guidance message file
5
 Program guidance definition file 6

The program guidance definition file is used to describe relationships between
command codes/addresses and messages.
Create an appropriate program guidance definition file shown below according to 7
the system type and G code system of a machine for which you want to customize
the program guidance messages.
8
Table 2.5.1.20 (a) Program Guidance Definition Files to Create
File name Description A1
guideMu.txt Program guidance definition file for M series system
guideTAu.txt Program guidance definition file for G code system A in T series
system
A2
guideTBu.txt Program guidance definition file for G code system B in T series
system
Z
guideTCu.txt Program guidance definition file for G code system C in T series
system
guideCMu.txt Program guidance definition file common to all system types
• Storage folder
%APPDATA%\MTB\CNCOpera\ProgramGuidance\
Describe relationships between command codes and words, command codes and
parameters, and command codes/words and messages. The program guidance
definition file consists of two definitions, a parameter tag and structure information,
described later.
101
B-64647EN/01
Parameter tag
Describe conditions when structure information is enabled in the following format.
<Parameter No.,Parameter BIT,Parameter value,Complex machine flag>\r\n
1 Table 2.5.1.20 (b) Items Described in a Parameter Tag

Item Description
Parameter No. Parameter number
2 Parameter BIT Parameter BIT (0 to 7)
Parameter value Parameter value (0 or 1)
3 Complex machine flag Value Model

T M Complex machine
0 ○ ○ ×
4 1 ○ ○ ○
2 × × ○
5 ○: Parameter tag enabled, ×: Parameter tag disabled
6 • A parameter tag remains enabled until the next parameter tag appears.
• It is enabled when the parameter tag setting value is the same as "Parameter
value" at start-up.
7  For complex machines, it is also enabled when "Complex machine flag" is 1 or

2.
MEMO • To specify structure information that is independent from parameter conditions,
set it to <0,0,0,1>.
8 • The first path is always referenced for parameters.
• A line break (\r\n) must be entered at the end of each line.
A1
Structure information
Describe relationships between command codes/words and messages in the
A2 following format.
Command code character string Message ID,Address letter Message ID...\r\n
Z Table 2.5.1.20 (c) Items Described in Structure Information

Item Description
Command code Describe a command code using a character string.
character string
Message ID Describe an ID defined in the program guidance message file.
Address letter Describe an address using a letter (one single-byte character).
102
B-64647EN/01
• Describe a command code group in each line.

• There are two command code character string types, "address + number" and
"address".
• Repeat entering a set of "Address letter Message ID" as necessary (not
 required). 1
• Only "address" is allowed to be used for address letters.
MEMO
• A line break (\r\n) must be entered at the end of each line.
• There are the following restrictions. 2
Each line can contain up to 256 bytes including a line break.
Each command code character string or word can contain up to 16 bytes.
3
An description example of the program guidance definition file is as follows.
4
Table 2.5.1.20 (d) Description Example of Program Guidance Definition File
Line File contents Description 5
1 <0,0,0,1> Enabled regardless of the parameters (even for complex
machines)
2 G100 180,T 60 180 for message ID of G100 program guidance message and 6
60 for message ID of address T program guidance message
following G100
3 <980,7,1,1> Enabled when bit 7 of parameter No. 980 is 1 (even for 7
complex machines)
4 G100 100,X 120 100 for message ID of G100 program guidance message and
120 for message ID of address X program guidance 8
message following G100
5
6
G120 111
<980,7,1,0>
111 for message ID of G120 guidance message
Disabled when bit 7 of parameter No. 980 is 1 (even for
A1
complex machines. Same as <0,0,0,1>.)
7 G140 112 112 for message ID of G140 guidance message
A2
The following contents are enabled according to the condition of parameter No.
980. Z
Table 2.5.1.20 (e) Contents to Be Enabled According to the Condition of
Parameter No. 980
Value of Bit 7 of Contents to be enabled
Parameter No. Complex machine T or M series
980
0 (other than 1) "G100 180,T 60" in second line "G100 180,T 60" in second line
"G140 112" in seventh line
1 "G100 100,X 120" in fourth line "G100 100,X 120" in fourth line
"G120 111" in fifth line "G120 111" in fifth line
"G140 112" in seventh line "G140 112" in seventh line
103
B-64647EN/01
 Program guidance message file

The program guidance message file is used to describe message IDs specified in
the program guidance definition file and character strings to be actually displayed.
1 Prepare this file for each language. Describe character strings to be displayed in
each language.
Use the same IDs between 0 and 3499 for message IDs for all languages.
2 FANUC standard data program guidance messages use IDs between 0 and 2499.
Table 2.5.1.20 (f) File Names and Corresponding Languages

3 File name Supported language Character code
gudmsg0u.txt English Shift-JIS
4 gudmsg1u.txt Japanese Shift-JIS

gudmsg2u.txt German Shift-JIS
gudmsg3u.txt French Shift-JIS
5 gudmsg4u.txt Italian Shift-JIS
6 gudmsg5u.txt
gudmsg6u.txt
Spanish
Swedish
Shift-JIS
Shift-JIS
gudmsg7u.txt Czech Shift-JIS
gudmsg8u.txt Portuguese Shift-JIS
7 gudmsg9u.txt Polish Shift-JIS
gudmsgau.txt Russian UTF-16 (with BOM)
8 gudmsgbu.txt
gudmsgcu.txt
Chinese (traditional)
Chinese (simplified)
Shift-JIS
UTF-16 (with BOM)
gudmsgdu.txt Korean UTF-16 (with BOM)
A1 gudmsgeu.txt Turkish Shift-JIS
gudmsgfu.txt Dutch Shift-JIS
A2 gudmsggu.txt
gudmsghu.txt
Hungarian
Bulgarian
Shift-JIS
UTF-16 (with BOM)
gudmsgiu.txt Romanian Shift-JIS
Z gudmsgju.txt Finnish Shift-JIS
gudmsgku.txt Danish UTF-16 (with BOM)
gudmsglu.txt Vietnamese UTF-16 (with BOM)
gudmsgmu.txt Indonesian UTF-16 (with BOM)
gudmsgnu.txt Slovakian UTF-16 (with BOM)
gudmsgou.txt Slovene UTF-16 (with BOM)
gudmsgpu.txt Tamil UTF-16 (with BOM)
gudmsgqu.txt Hindi UTF-16 (with BOM)
104
B-64647EN/01
• Storage folder
%APPDATA%\MTB\CNCOpera\ProgramGuidance\
Describe relationships between message IDs specified in the program guidance

definition file and character strings to be actually displayed in the following format.
Message ID,Character string\r\n 1
This file must be prepared for each language. Use the same IDs for message IDs
for all languages. 2
Table 2.5.1.20 (g) Items Described in the Program Guidance Message File
3
Item Description
Message ID Message ID (decimal)
Character string Character string to be actually displayed
4
• Describe one set of message ID and character string in each line.

5
• Use a message ID specified in the program guidance definition file in decimal
 format.
• A line break (\r\n) must be entered at the end of each line. 6
MEMO • There are the following restrictions.
The maximum length of a character string depends on the character limit of
the program guidance message display area. 7
8
2.5.1.21 Setting up M code input function
2.5.1.21
You can enable/disable the M code list function. You can also change text and
A1
messages to be displayed in the M code menu screen.
A2
 Enabling M code list function
By enabling the M code list function, you can display [M Code] soft key to display
the M code list window. Z
<1> Prepare an M code menu screen definition file and an M code message file.
• The file name is "dlgmcdeu.txt" only.

• In the default setting state, "dlgmcdeu.txt", where FANUC standard settings
 are written, is provided.
• For the M code menu screen definition file and M code message file, see
MEMO
"■Customizing the M code menu screen" in "2.5.1.21 Setting up M code
input function".
105
B-64647EN/01
<2> Store the M code menu screen definition file in the directory below:
%APPDATA%\MTB\CNCOPERA\M_code\
<3> Enable the M code list function with the MTB configuration file.
1 ● File name and storage folder of the MTB configuration file
• File name
2 Setting_data.txt
• Storage folder
3
● Detailed setting items

[MCode_Function]
• Specifiable key name
5 MCODE_ENABLE: Set whether to enable/disable the M code list function.
6 • M code list function enable/disable setting

For MCODE_ENABLE, set one of the following values.
Table 2.5.1.21 (a) Setting values for MCODE_ENABLE

7 Setting Function enable/disable Description
1 Function enable Enables the M code list function
8 0 Function disable Disables the M code list function
A1  Customizing the M code menu screen

You can change text and messages to be displayed in the M code menu screen.
A2 ● File names to be created

You need to create the files shown below to customize the M code menu screen.
Z M code menu screen definition file

Define the structure of the M code menu screen.
• File name
dlgmcdeu.txt
M code message files

The following shows the M code message files that correspond to the message
IDs described in the M code menu screen definition file. Prepare an M code
message file for each language.
The file names and their corresponding languages are as follows:
106
B-64647EN/01
Table 2.5.1.21 (b) M code message files

File name Description
mcdmsg0u.txt For English display
mcdmsg1u.txt For Japanese display
mcdmsg2u.txt For German display 1
mcdmsg3u.txt For French display
mcdmsg4u.txt
mcdmsg5u.txt
For Italian display
For Spanish display
2
mcdmsg6u.txt For Swedish display
mcdmsg7u.txt For Czech display 3
mcdmsg8u.txt For Portuguese display
mcdmsg9u.txt
mcdmsgau.txt
For Polish display
Russian
4
mcdmsgbu.txt For Chinese (Traditional) display
mcdmsgcu.txt For Chinese (Simplified) display 5
mcdmsgdu.txt For Korean display
mcdmsgeu.txt
mcdmsgfu.txt
Turkish
Dutch
6
mcdmsggu.txt Hungarian
mcdmsghu.txt Bulgarian 7
mcdmsgiu.txt Romanian
mcdmsgju.txt
mcdmsgku.txt
Finnish
Danish
8
mcdmsglu.txt Vietnamese
mcdmsgmu.txt Indonesian A1
mcdmsgnu.txt Slovak
mcdmsgou.txt Slovene
A2
● Creating an M code menu screen definition file
Create an M code menu screen definition file (dlgmcdeu.txt) according to the Z
format below:
The M code menu screen definition file consists of specification lines of tab title
tags to specify tab titles and specification lines of M code character string
definitions to define M code messages.
Format of the tab title tag

<TABn=Tab title message ID>
107
B-64647EN/01
Table 2.5.1.21 (c) Tab title tag

Item Description
TABn= Describe a screen number of each tab for "n" in "TABn="
starting from 1.
1 The M code character strings defined between the tab title line
and the next tab title line are displayed in the same tab screen.
Tab title message ID For a tab title message ID, describe a message ID defined in
2 the M code message file (mcdmsgNu.txt) using an integer.
3 Format of the M code character string definition

M code character string,Message ID
4 Table 2.5.1.21 (d) Tab title tag

Item Description
5 M code character
string
For an M code character string, describe a command code
using a character string.
Use "M" + numeric value for a command code.
6 Message ID For a message ID, describe a message ID defined in the M
code message file (mcdmsgNu.txt) using an integer.
7  Break the line for each definition.

MEMO
8
Description example
A1 <TAB1=2500>
M11,2511
M12,2512
A2 <TAB2=2501>
M71,2521
M72,2522
Z ● Creating an M code message file

Create an M code message file (mcdmsgNu.txt) according to the format below:
Format
Message ID,Character string
Table 2.5.1.21 (e) Tab title tag

Item Description
Message ID For a message ID, specify a message ID specified in the M
code menu screen definition file (dlgmcdeu.txt) using an
integer.
108
B-64647EN/01
Item Description
Character string For a character string, describe a character string to be
actually displayed.
 Break the line for each definition. 1

MEMO
2
3
 •• AEach
number from 0 to 9999 can be used as a message ID.
character string can contain up to 60 single-byte characters including an M
4
MEMO code.
Description example
5
2500,Chuck
2501,Stylus
2511,M11:Chuck clamp
2512,M12:Chuck unclamp 6
2521,M71:Stylus probe ON
2522,M72:Stylus probe OFF
7
2.5.1.22 Setting up the fixed sentence function
2.5.1.22
You can enable/disable the fixed sentence function. You can also change text and 8
messages to be displayed in the insert fixed sentence for machining window.
 Enabling the fixed sentence function

A1
You can enable/disable the fixed sentence function.
When the fixed sentence function is enabled, the [Fixed Sentence] soft key to
display the insert fixed sentence for machining window appears.
A2
<1> Prepare an insert fixed sentence screen definition file, a fixed sentence Z
registration definition file, and a selection screen message file.
• Each file name is as follows:

Insert fixed sentence screen definition file: fixdlgu.txt
Fixed sentence registration definition file: fixfrmNu.txt ("N" varies depending
 on the language.)
Selection screen message file: fixfrm_vgamsgNu.txt ("N" varies depending
MEMO
on the language.)
• For each definition file, see "■Customizing the insert fixed sentence for
machining window" in "2.5.1.22 Setting up the fixed sentence function".
109
B-64647EN/01
<2> Store the definition files in the directory below:

%APPDATA%\MTB\CNCOpera\Fixede_Form
<3> Enable the fixed sentence function with the MTB configuration file.
1
● File name and storage folder of the MTB configuration file
• File name
2 Setting_data.txt
• Storage folder
3 %APPDATA%\MTB\CNCOPERA\SETTING\
● Detailed setting items

[Fixed_Form_Function]
FIXED_FORM_ENABLE: Set whether to enable/disable the fixed sentence
6 function.
• Fixed sentence function enable/disable setting
For FIXED_FORM_ENABLE, set one of the following values.
7
Table 2.5.1.22 (a) Setting values for FIXED_FORM_ENABLE
8 Setting Function enable/disable Description

1 Function enable Enables the fixed sentence function.
0 Function disable Disables the fixed sentence function.
A1
 Customizing the insert fixed sentence for machining window
A2 You can change the display contents in the insert fixed sentence for machining
window with the user customization files below.
Z ● Insert fixed sentence screen definition file [fixdlgu.txt]

Define the name of a tab displayed on the insert fixed sentence screen.
Format of the insert fixed sentence screen definition
<Mode>=***,<Tab>=***,<MsgNo>=***
Define the name of one tab displayed on the fixed sentence screen in one line
until the line break.
110
B-64647EN/01
Table 2.5.1.22 (b) Insert Fixed Sentence Screen Definition

Item Description
<Mode>= Specify the mode (Turning/Milling) where the fixed sentence
belongs with one of the following values:
1: Fixed sentence for turning mode
2: Fixed sentence for milling mode
1
3: For both turning and milling
<Tab>= Specify the number (1 to 7) of a tab where you want to display
the name.
2
The tab name can contain up to eight single-byte characters.
If multiple definitions were set to the same tab, the last defined
information becomes valid.
3
<MsgNo>= Specify a name you want to display with Message ID defined
in fixfrm_vgamsgNu.txt.
4
● Fixed sentence registration definition files [fixfrmNu.txt]
Define the default fixed sentence. 5
Format of the fixed sentence registration definition
<Mode>=***,<Tab>=***,<Title>=***,<Code>=***
Define one fixed sentence in one line until the line break. "N" in fixfrmNu.txt varies 6
depending on the language.
Table 2.5.1.22 (c) Fixed Sentence Registration Definition

7
Item Description
<Mode>= Specify the mode (Turning/Milling) where the fixed sentence 8
belongs with one of the following values:
1: Fixed sentence for turning mode
2: Fixed sentence for milling mode A1
3: For both turning and milling
<Tab>= Specify the number (1 to 7) of a tab where you want to display
the fixed sentence. A2
<Title>= Specify the registration name of the fixed sentence. The
screen can display up to 22 characters.
<Code>= Specify a fixed sentence. Z
Only characters that can be input from the NC MDI keys can
be used for a fixed sentence.
If a fixed sentence has multiple blocks, separate them by ";".
Example: <Code>=M69;M75;G28U0W0V0T00;M74;
 •• The number of fixed sentences that can be registered for each tab is 30.
The number of characters that can be registered for each fixed sentence is
MEMO 256. If 257 or more characters are set, nothing is displayed.
Prepare a fixed sentence registration definition file for each language.
111
B-64647EN/01
Table 2.5.1.22 (d) Fixed sentence registration definition files

File name Supported language Character code
1 fixfrm0u.txt English Shift-JIS
fixfrm1u.txt Japanese Shift-JIS
2 fixfrm2u.txt
fixfrm3u.txt
German
French
Shift-JIS
Shift-JIS
fixfrm4u.txt Italian Shift-JIS
3 fixfrm5u.txt Spanish Shift-JIS
fixfrm6u.txt Swedish Shift-JIS
4 fixfrm7u.txt
fixfrm8u.txt
Czech
Portuguese
Shift-JIS
Shift-JIS
fixfrm9u.txt Polish Shift-JIS
5 fixfrmau.txt Russian UTF-16 (with BOM)
fixfrmbu.txt Chinese (traditional) Shift-JIS
6 fixfrmcu.txt Chinese (simplified) UTF-16 (with BOM)
fixfrmdu.txt Korean UTF-16 (with BOM)
fixfrmeu.txt Turkish Shift-JIS
7 fixfrmfu.txt Dutch Shift-JIS
fixfrmgu.txt Hungarian Shift-JIS
8 fixfrmhu.txt
fixfrmiu.txt
Bulgarian
Romanian
UTF-16 (with BOM)
Shift-JIS
fixfrmju.txt Finnish Shift-JIS
A1 fixfrmku.txt Danish Shift-JIS
fixfrmlu.txt Vietnamese UTF-16 (with BOM)
A2 fixfrmmu.txt
fixfrmnu.txt
Indonesian
Slovakian
UTF-16 (with BOM)
UTF-16 (with BOM)
fixfrmou.txt Slovene UTF-16 (with BOM)
Z
● Selection screen message files [fixfrm_vgamsgNu.txt]
Define a character string displayed on the tab with Message ID and character
string to be displayed.
Format of the selection screen message
Message ID,Message
"N" in fixfrm_vgamsgNu.txt varies depending on the language.
Prepare a selection screen message file for each language.
112
B-64647EN/01
Table 2.5.1.22 (e) Selection screen message files

File name Supported language Character code
fixfrm_vgamsg0u.txt English Shift-JIS
fixfrm_vgamsg1u.txt Japanese Shift-JIS
fixfrm_vgamsg2u.txt German Shift-JIS 1
fixfrm_vgamsg3u.txt French Shift-JIS
fixfrm_vgamsg4u.txt
fixfrm_vgamsg5u.txt
Italian
Spanish
Shift-JIS
Shift-JIS
2
fixfrm_vgamsg6u.txt Swedish Shift-JIS
fixfrm_vgamsg7u.txt Czech Shift-JIS 3
fixfrm_vgamsg8u.txt Portuguese Shift-JIS
fixfrm_vgamsg9u.txt
fixfrm_vgamsgau.txt
Polish
Russian
Shift-JIS
UTF-16 (with BOM)
4
fixfrm_vgamsgbu.txt Chinese (traditional) Shift-JIS
fixfrm_vgamsgcu.txt Chinese (simplified) UTF-16 (with BOM) 5
fixfrm_vgamsgdu.txt Korean UTF-16 (with BOM)
fixfrm_vgamsgeu.txt
fixfrm_vgamsgfu.txt
Turkish
Dutch
Shift-JIS
Shift-JIS
6
fixfrm_vgamsggu.txt Hungarian Shift-JIS
fixfrm_vgamsghu.txt Bulgarian UTF-16 (with BOM) 7
fixfrm_vgamsgiu.txt Romanian Shift-JIS
fixfrm_vgamsgju.txt
fixfrm_vgamsgku.txt
Finnish
Danish
Shift-JIS
Shift-JIS
8
A1
2.5.2 Setting Up the iHMI Machining Cycle
2.5.2
For various parameters of the machining cycle, see the section "APPENDIX (FOR
A2
MACHINE MANUFACTURER)" in "FANUC MANUAL GUIDE i Common to Lathe
System/Machining Center System OPERATOR'S MANUAL" (B-63874EN). Z
2.5.3 Setting Up the iHMI Set-up Guidance

2.5.3
Before using the Set-up Guidance, you need to set the number of measurement
condition types, measurement conditions, and a measuring tool. You can
manually set them in the P-CODE variable or set them on the MANUAL GUIDE i
screen.
For various parameters of the Set-up Guidance, see the section "APPENDIX" in
"FANUC MANUAL GUIDE i SET-UP GUIDANCE FUNCTIONS OPERATOR'S
113
B-64647EN/01
(1) Number of measurement condition types

The types for the number of types are as follows. Determine the type according
to the number of measuring tools to be used or the number of measurement
conditions.
1 • Number of tool measurement types

• Number of workpiece set-up/post-machining inspection types
(2) Measurement conditions
2 The measurement condition types are as follows. Set an appropriate value
according to the machine accuracy or the measuring tool to be used.
3 • Measurement conditions for tool measurement

• Measurement conditions for workpiece set-up/post-machining inspection
(3) Measuring tool settings
4 The measuring tool setting types are as follows. Set the catalog values of a
measuring tool to be used. The set values can be calibrated in a measurement
cycle.
5 • Touch sensor position settings for tool measurement
6 • Probe geometry settings for workpiece set-up/post-machining inspection
2.5.3.1 Manually setting in the P-CODE variable

7 2.5.3.1
The settings are required depending on the measurement type to be used.
8  When measuring a tool using a touch sensor

The following measurement conditions and calibration data need to be set.
A1 • Values need to be specified in millimeters even when the parameter (No.0#2=1)

(inch input) is set.
• Setting the system variable (#8570=1) allows read and write of the P-CODE
A2  variable from the custom macro.
• The following "probe motion" and "probe geometry data" types are associated
MEMO
with each other. For example, probe geometry data associated with probe
Z motion type A needs to be set in probe geometry data type A. Similarly,

configure B to F.
114
B-64647EN/01
● Settings for the number of measurement condition types for tool measurement
m: Value of the parameter (No.12381) (First number of the measurement condition
variable (default 10000))
Table 2.5.3.1 (a) Settings for the Number of Measurement Condition Types for
Tool Measurement
1
P-CODE variable Description
number 2
#[m+0] You can set multiple pairs of measurement condition data
referenced during tool measurement. Specify a value larger
than 1 in this item when you want to change the measurement
conditions depending on the touch sensor to be used in a
3
machine with touch sensors installed in multiple positions. Up
to four pairs can be set. If you use only one pair of
measurement conditions, set 1.
4
● Settings for the measurement conditions for tool measurement 5
6
Table 2.5.3.1 (b) Settings for the Measurement Conditions for Tool
Measurement
7
P-CODE variable number
Description
Type A Type B Type C Type D
Distance X between the
8
#[(m+7)+(1 #[(m+7)+(1 #[(m+7)+(1 #[(m+7)+(1
reference point and tool mount
1×0)+0] 1×1)+0] 1×2)+0] 1×3)+0]
position
Distance Z between the
A1
#[(m+7)+(1 #[(m+7)+(1 #[(m+7)+(1 #[(m+7)+(1
reference point and tool mount
1x0)+1] 1x1)+1] 1x2)+1] 1x3)+1]
position
#[(m+7)+(1 #[(m+7)+(1 #[(m+7)+(1 #[(m+7)+(1 Move speed at first
A2
1x0)+4] 1x1)+4] 1x2)+4] 1x3)+4] measurement
#[(m+7)+(1 #[(m+7)+(1 #[(m+7)+(1 #[(m+7)+(1 Approach amount at first
Z
#[(m+7)+(1 #[(m+7)+(1 #[(m+7)+(1 #[(m+7)+(1 Return amount at first
#[(m+7)+(1 #[(m+7)+(1 #[(m+7)+(1 #[(m+7)+(1 Overrun amount at
#[(m+7)+(1 #[(m+7)+(1 #[(m+7)+(1 #[(m+7)+(1 Move speed to the start point at
#[(m+7)+(1 #[(m+7)+(1 #[(m+7)+(1 #[(m+7)+(1 Move speed at second
#[(m+7)+(1 #[(m+7)+(1 #[(m+7)+(1 #[(m+7)+(1 Return amount after second
1x0)+10] 1x1)+10] 1x2)+10] 1x3)+10] contact
115
B-64647EN/01
● Settings for the number of calibration types for tool measurement

n: Value of the parameter (No.12382) (First number of the calibration variable
(default 10180))
1 Table 2.5.3.1 (c) Settings for the Number of Calibration Types for Tool
Measurement
2 number
#[n+0] You can set multiple pairs of touch sensor calibration data
referenced during tool measurement. Specify a value larger
3 than 1 in this item when you use a machine with touch sensors
installed in multiple positions. Up to four pairs can be set. If
you use only one pair of calibration data, set 1.
4
 When measuring a workpiece using a touch probe
5 The following measurement conditions and calibration data need to be set.
6 • Values need to be specified in millimeters even when the parameter (No.0#2=1)

(inch input) is set.
• Setting the system variable (#8570=1) allows read and write of the P-CODE
 variable from the custom macro.
7 MEMO
with each other. For example, probe geometry data associated with probe
motion type A needs to be set in probe geometry data type A. Similarly,
8 configure B to F.
A1 ● Settings for touch sensor calibration data

(default 10180))
A2
Table 2.5.3.1 (d) Settings for Touch Sensor Calibration Data
Z Type A
Type B Type C Type D
Description
#[(n+7)+(A #[(n+7)+(A #[(n+7)+(A #[(n+7)+(A Sensor position X when

x0)+0] ×0)+(A×1)+ ×0)+(A×2)+ ×0)+(A×3)+ measuring in the +X direction
0] 0] 0] (reference value)
#[(n+7)+(A #[(n+7)+(A #[(n+7)+(A #[(n+7)+(A Sensor position Y when
x0)+1] x0)+(Ax1)+ x0)+(Ax2)+ x0)+(Ax3)+ measuring in the +X direction
#[(n+7)+(A #[(n+7)+(A #[(n+7)+(A #[(n+7)+(A Sensor position Z when
x0)+2] x0)+(Ax1)+ x0)+(Ax2)+ x0)+(Ax3)+ measuring in the +X direction
116
B-64647EN/01

Description
Type A Type B Type C Type D
x0)+3] x0)+(Ax1)+ ×0)+(A×2)+ ×0)+(A×3)+ measuring in the -X direction
#[(n+7)+(A
#[(n+7)+(A #[(n+7)+(A #[(n+7)+(A Sensor position Y when
1
x0)+4] x0)+(Ax1)+ x0)+(Ax2)+ x0)+(Ax3)+ measuring in the -X direction
#[(n+7)+(A
#[(n+7)+(A #[(n+7)+(A #[(n+7)+(A Sensor position Z when
2
x0)+5] x0)+(Ax1)+ x0)+(Ax2)+ x0)+(Ax3)+ measuring in the -X direction
3
x0)+6] x0)+(Ax1)+ x0)+(Ax2)+ x0)+(Ax3)+ measuring in the +Y direction
4
7] 7] 7] (reference value) 5
x0)+9] x0)+(Ax1)+ x0)+(Ax2)+ x0)+(Ax3)+ measuring in the -Y direction
11] 11] 11] (reference value) A1
x0)+12] x0)+(Ax1)+ x0)+(Ax2)+ x0)+(Ax3)+ measuring in the +Z direction
12] 12] 12] (reference value) A2
13] 13] 13] (reference value) Z
x0)+15] x0)+(Ax1)+ x0)+(Ax2)+ x0)+(Ax3)+ measuring in the -Z direction
117
B-64647EN/01
● Settings for the number of measurement condition types for workpiece set-up/
post-machining inspection
1
Table 2.5.3.1 (e) Settings for the Number of Measurement Condition Types for
2 Workpiece Set-up/Post-machining Inspection

number
3 #[m+1] You can set multiple pairs of measurement condition data
referenced during workpiece set-up/post-machining inspection
and probe calibration. Specify a value larger than 1 in this item
4 when you want to change the measurement conditions
depending on the probe to be used in a machine using probes
with a different geometry. Up to six pairs can be set. If you use
5 only one pair of measurement conditions, set 1.
6 ● Settings for the probe motion in the diameter direction

7 Table 2.5.3.1 (f) Settings for the Probe Motion in the Diameter Direction
8 Type A Type B Type C Type D Type E Type F
Description
#[(m+7)+(1 #[(m+7)+(1 #[(m+7)+(1 #[(m+7)+(1 #[(m+7)+(1 #[(m+7)+(1

Move speed at first
A1 1×#[m+0]) 1×#[m+0]) 1×#[m+0]) 1×#[m+0]) 1×#[m+0]) 1×#[m+0])
+(21×0)+0] +(21×1)+0] +(21×2)+0] +(21×3)+0] +(21×4)+0] +(21×5)+0]
measurement
#[(m+7)+(1 #[(m+7)+(1 #[(m+7)+(1 #[(m+7)+(1 #[(m+7)+(1 #[(m+7)+(1

Approach amount at first
A2 1x#[m+0])+ 1x#[m+0])+ 1x#[m+0])+ 1x#[m+0])+ 1x#[m+0])+ 1x#[m+0])+
(21x0)+1] (21x1)+1] (21x2)+1] (21x3)+1] (21x4)+1] (21x5)+1]
measurement
#[(m+7)+(1 #[(m+7)+(1 #[(m+7)+(1 #[(m+7)+(1 #[(m+7)+(1 #[(m+7)+(1

Return amount at first
Z 1x#[m+0])+ 1x#[m+0])+ 1x#[m+0])+ 1x#[m+0])+ 1x#[m+0])+ 1x#[m+0])+
(21x0)+2] (21x1)+2] (21x2)+2] (21x3)+2] (21x4)+2] (21x5)+2]
measurement
#[(m+7)+(1 #[(m+7)+(1 #[(m+7)+(1 #[(m+7)+(1 #[(m+7)+(1 #[(m+7)+(1

Overrun amount at
1x#[m+0])+ 1x#[m+0])+ 1x#[m+0])+ 1x#[m+0])+ 1x#[m+0])+ 1x#[m+0])+
measurement
(21x0)+3] (21x1)+3] (21x2)+3] (21x3)+3] (21x4)+3] (21x5)+3]
#[(m+7)+(1 #[(m+7)+(1 #[(m+7)+(1 #[(m+7)+(1 #[(m+7)+(1 #[(m+7)+(1
Move speed to the start point
1x#[m+0])+ 1x#[m+0])+ 1x#[m+0])+ 1x#[m+0])+ 1x#[m+0])+ 1x#[m+0])+
at measurement
(21x0)+4] (21x1)+4] (21x2)+4] (21x3)+4] (21x4)+4] (21x5)+4]
#[(m+7)+(1 #[(m+7)+(1 #[(m+7)+(1 #[(m+7)+(1 #[(m+7)+(1 #[(m+7)+(1
Move speed at second
1x#[m+0])+ 1x#[m+0])+ 1x#[m+0])+ 1x#[m+0])+ 1x#[m+0])+ 1x#[m+0])+
measurement
(21x0)+5] (21x1)+5] (21x2)+5] (21x3)+5] (21x4)+5] (21x5)+5]
#[(m+7)+(1 #[(m+7)+(1 #[(m+7)+(1 #[(m+7)+(1 #[(m+7)+(1 #[(m+7)+(1
Return amount after second
1x#[m+0])+ 1x#[m+0])+ 1x#[m+0])+ 1x#[m+0])+ 1x#[m+0])+ 1x#[m+0])+
contact
(21x0)+6] (21x1)+6] (21x2)+6] (21x3)+6] (21x4)+6] (21x5)+6]
118
B-64647EN/01
● Settings for the probe motion in the axis direction

Table 2.5.3.1 (g) Settings for the Probe Motion in the Axis Direction
1
Type A Type B Type C Type D Type E Type F
Description
2
#[(m+7)+(1 #[(m+7)+(1 #[(m+7)+(1 #[(m+7)+(1 #[(m+7)+(1 #[(m+7)+(1
Move speed at first
1x#[m+0])+ 1x#[m+0])+ 1x#[m+0])+ 1x#[m+0])+ 1x#[m+0])+ 1x#[m+0])+
(21x0)+7] (21x1)+7] (21x2)+7] (21x3)+7] (21x4)+7] (21x5)+7]
measurement 3
#[(m+7)+(1 #[(m+7)+(1 #[(m+7)+(1 #[(m+7)+(1 #[(m+7)+(1 #[(m+7)+(1
1x#[m+0])+ 1x#[m+0])+ 1x#[m+0])+ 1x#[m+0])+ 1x#[m+0])+ 1x#[m+0])+
(21x0)+8] (21x1)+8] (21x2)+8] (21x3)+8] (21x4)+8] (21x5)+8]
measurement 4
#[(m+7)+(1 #[(m+7)+(1 #[(m+7)+(1 #[(m+7)+(1 #[(m+7)+(1 #[(m+7)+(1
1x#[m+0])+ 1x#[m+0])+ 1x#[m+0])+ 1x#[m+0])+ 1x#[m+0])+ 1x#[m+0])+
(21x0)+9] (21x1)+9] (21x2)+9] (21x3)+9] (21x4)+9] (21x5)+9]
measurement 5
#[(m+7)+(1 #[(m+7)+(1 #[(m+7)+(1 #[(m+7)+(1 #[(m+7)+(1 #[(m+7)+(1
Overrun amount at
1x#[m+0])+ 1x#[m+0])+ 1x#[m+0])+ 1x#[m+0])+ 1x#[m+0])+ 1x#[m+0])+
(21x0)+10] (21x1)+10] (21x2)+10] (21x3)+10] (21x4)+10] (21x5)+10]
measurement 6
#[(m+7)+(1 #[(m+7)+(1 #[(m+7)+(1 #[(m+7)+(1 #[(m+7)+(1 #[(m+7)+(1
1×#[m+0])
+(21×0)+1
1×#[m+0])
+(21×1)+1
1×#[m+0])
+(21×2)+1
1×#[m+0])
+(21×3)+1
1×#[m+0])
+(21×4)+1
1×#[m+0]) Move speed to the start point
+(21×5)+1 at measurement
7
1] 1] 1] 1] 1] 1]
#[(m+7)+(1 #[(m+7)+(1 #[(m+7)+(1 #[(m+7)+(1 #[(m+7)+(1 #[(m+7)+(1
1x#[m+0])+ 1x#[m+0])+ 1x#[m+0])+ 1x#[m+0])+ 1x#[m+0])+ 1x#[m+0])+
Move speed at second 8
measurement
(21x0)+12] (21x1)+12] (21x2)+12] (21x3)+12] (21x4)+12] (21x5)+12]
#[(m+7)+(1 #[(m+7)+(1 #[(m+7)+(1 #[(m+7)+(1 #[(m+7)+(1 #[(m+7)+(1
1x#[m+0])+ 1x#[m+0])+ 1x#[m+0])+ 1x#[m+0])+ 1x#[m+0])+ 1x#[m+0])+
Return amount after second A1
contact
(21x0)+13] (21x1)+13] (21x2)+13] (21x3)+13] (21x4)+13] (21x5)+13]
A2
● Settings for the probe motion in the axis direction
variable (default 10000)) Z
Table 2.5.3.1 (h) Settings for the Probe Motion in the Axis Direction
Description
#[(m+7)+(1 #[(m+7)+(1 #[(m+7)+(1 #[(m+7)+(1 #[(m+7)+(1 #[(m+7)+(1
Move speed at first
1x#[m+0])+ 1x#[m+0])+ 1x#[m+0])+ 1x#[m+0])+ 1x#[m+0])+ 1x#[m+0])+
measurement
(21x0)+14] (21x1)+14] (21x2)+14] (21x3)+14] (21x4)+14] (21x5)+14]
#[(m+7)+(1 #[(m+7)+(1 #[(m+7)+(1 #[(m+7)+(1 #[(m+7)+(1 #[(m+7)+(1
1x#[m+0])+ 1x#[m+0])+ 1x#[m+0])+ 1x#[m+0])+ 1x#[m+0])+ 1x#[m+0])+
measurement
(21x0)+15] (21x1)+15] (21x2)+15] (21x3)+15] (21x4)+15] (21x5)+15]
119
B-64647EN/01

Description
#[(m+7)+(1 #[(m+7)+(1 #[(m+7)+(1 #[(m+7)+(1 #[(m+7)+(1 #[(m+7)+(1
1x#[m+0])+ 1x#[m+0])+ 1x#[m+0])+ 1x#[m+0])+ 1x#[m+0])+ 1x#[m+0])+
measurement
1 (21x0)+16] (21x1)+16] (21x2)+16] (21x3)+16] (21x4)+16] (21x5)+16]
#[(m+7)+(1 #[(m+7)+(1 #[(m+7)+(1 #[(m+7)+(1 #[(m+7)+(1 #[(m+7)+(1
Overrun amount at
1x#[m+0])+ 1x#[m+0])+ 1x#[m+0])+ 1×#[m+0]) 1x#[m+0])+ 1x#[m+0])+
measurement
2 (21x0)+17] (21x1)+17] (21x2)+17] +(21×3 (21x4)+17] (21x5)+17]
#[(m+7)+(1 #[(m+7)+(1 #[(m+7)+(1 #[(m+7)+(1 #[(m+7)+(1 #[(m+7)+(1
Move speed to the start point
1x#[m+0])+ 1x#[m+0])+ 1x#[m+0])+ 1x#[m+0])+ 1x#[m+0])+ 1x#[m+0])+
at measurement
3 (21x0)+18] (21x1)+18] (21x2)+18] (21x3)+18] (21x4)+18] (21x5)+18]
#[(m+7)+(1 #[(m+7)+(1 #[(m+7)+(1 #[(m+7)+(1 #[(m+7)+(1 #[(m+7)+(1
Move speed at second
1x#[m+0])+ 1x#[m+0])+ 1x#[m+0])+ 1x#[m+0])+ 1x#[m+0])+ 1x#[m+0])+
measurement
4 (21x0)+19] (21x1)+19] (21x2)+19] (21x3)+19] (21x4)+19] (21x5)+19]
#[(m+7)+(1 #[(m+7)+(1 #[(m+7)+(1 #[(m+7)+(1 #[(m+7)+(1 #[(m+7)+(1
Return amount after second
1x#[m+0])+ 1x#[m+0])+ 1x#[m+0])+ 1x#[m+0])+ 1x#[m+0])+ 1x#[m+0])+
contact
5 (21x0)+20] (21x1)+20] (21x2)+20] (21x3)+20] (21x4)+20] (21x5)+20]
6 ● Settings for the number of calibration types for workpiece set-up/post-machining

inspection
(default 10180))
7
Table 2.5.3.1 (i) Settings for the Number of Calibration Types for Workpiece
8 P-CODE variable
Set-up/Post-machining Inspection
Description
number
A1 #[n+2] You can set multiple pairs of probe calibration data referenced
during workpiece set-up/post-machining inspection. Specify a
value larger than 1 in this item when you want to set calibration
A2 data for each probe in a machine using probes with a different
geometry. Up to six pairs can be set. If you use only one pair of
calibration data, set 1.
Z
● Settings for probe geometry data
(default 10180))
Table 2.5.3.1 (j) Settings for Probe Geometry Data

Description
#[(n+7)+(18 #[(n+7)+(18 #[(n+7)+(18 #[(n+7)+(18 #[(n+7)+(18 #[(n+7)+(18
×(1+#[n+1]) ×(1+#[n+1]) ×(1+#[n+1]) ×(1+#[n+1]) ×(1+#[n+1]) ×(1+#[n+1])
Probe length
×#[n+0])+(5 ×#[n+0])+(5 ×#[n+0])+(5 ×#[n+0])+(5 ×#[n+0])+(5 ×#[n+0])+(5
×0)+0] ×1)+0] ×2)+0] ×3)+0] ×4)+0] ×5)+0]
120
B-64647EN/01

Description
#[(n+7)+(18 #[(n+7)+(18 #[(n+7)+(18 #[(n+7)+(18 #[(n+7)+(18 #[(n+7)+(18
x(1+#[n+1]) ×(1+#[n+1]) ×(1+#[n+1]) ×(1+#[n+1]) ×(1+#[n+1]) x(1+#[n+1]) Stylus ball diameter (X-
x#[n+0])+(5
x0)+1]
×#[n+0])+(5
×1)+1]
×#[n+0])+(5
×2)+1]
×#[n+0])+(5
×3)+1]
×#[n+0])+(5
×4)+1]
x#[n+0])+(5 axis direction)
x5)+1]
1
#[(n+7)+(18 #[(n+7)+(18 #[(n+7)+(18 #[(n+7)+(18 #[(n+7)+(18 #[(n+7)+(18
x(1+#[n+1])
x#[n+0])+(5
×(1+#[n+1])
×#[n+0])+(5
×(1+#[n+1])
×#[n+0])+(5
×(1+#[n+1])
×#[n+0])+(5
×(1+#[n+1])
×#[n+0])+(5
x(1+#[n+1]) Stylus ball diameter (Y-
x#[n+0])+(5 axis direction)
2
x0)+2] ×1)+2] ×2)+2] ×3)+2] ×4)+2] x5)+2]
#[(n+7)+(18 #[(n+7)+(18 #[(n+7)+(18 #[(n+7)+(18 #[(n+7)+(18 #[(n+7)+(18

Stylus ball position viewed
from the spindle center
3
x(1+#[n+1]) ×(1+#[n+1]) ×(1+#[n+1]) ×(1+#[n+1]) ×(1+#[n+1]) x(1+#[n+1])
when the ball is shifted
x#[n+0])+(5 ×#[n+0])+(5 ×#[n+0])+(5 ×#[n+0])+(5 ×#[n+0])+(5 x#[n+0])+(5
x0)+3] ×1)+3] ×2)+3] ×3)+3] ×4)+3] x5)+3]
position (X-axis direction) 4
Stylus ball position viewed
#[(n+7)+(18 #[(n+7)+(18 #[(n+7)+(18 #[(n+7)+(18 #[(n+7)+(18 #[(n+7)+(18
x(1+#[n+1])
x#[n+0])+(5
×(1+#[n+1])
×#[n+0])+(5
×(1+#[n+1])
×#[n+0])+(5
×(1+#[n+1])
×#[n+0])+(5
×(1+#[n+1])
×#[n+0])+(5
x(1+#[n+1])
x#[n+0])+(5
when the ball is shifted 5
x0)+4] ×1)+4] ×2)+4] ×3)+4] ×4)+4] x5)+4]
position (Y-axis direction)
6
2.5.3.2
2.5.3.2
Setting on the MANUAL GUIDE i screen
The settings are required depending on the measurement type to be used.
7
 Displaying the MANUAL GUIDE i screen 8
<1> Set the following parameters.
• Set the parameter (No.14792#2=1) (Use the MANUAL GUIDE i screen). A1
• Set one of the parameters (No.14794#0 to #5) to 1 (Assign the MANUAL
GUIDE i to a function key).
#0:POS, #1:PRG, #2:OFS, #3:SYS, #4:MES, #5:GRP A2
<2> Restart the system. Z
<3> Display the MANUAL GUIDE i screen from the maintenance display and press
the [Settings] soft key.
The data setting window appears.
 When measuring a tool using a touch sensor

The following measurement conditions and calibration data need to be set in the
data setting window.
121
B-64647EN/01
The following "measurement conditions for tool measurement" and "touch sensor
 position" types are associated with each other. For example, the touch sensor
MEMO
position associated with measurement conditions for tool measurement type A
1 needs to be set in touch sensor position type A. Similarly, configure B to F.
2 ● Settings for the number of measurement condition types for tool measurement
<1> Select the Measurement Condition tab.
3 <2> Select [Motion Settings] and press the <INPUT> key.
<3> Set the number of types to be used in [Number of Measurement Condition
4 Groups for Tool Measurement].
5 • Determine the number of types according to the installation location of a touch

sensor to be used and the measurement condition type.
Example:
6  For one touch sensor installation location and two measurement condition types
(overrun amount large and small)
MEMO Number of types = 2
Type A: Installation location 1, measurement condition (overrun amount large)
7 Type B: Installation location 1, measurement condition (overrun amount small)
• Up to four types can be set.
8 ● Settings for the tool measurement motion

A1 <2> Select the condition to set from [Tool Measurement A to D] and press the
<INPUT> key.
A2 <3> Set each item.
● Settings for the number of touch sensor position types and whether to use the
Z offset value
<1> Select the Calibration tab.
<2> Select [Motion Settings] and press the <INPUT> key.
<3> Set the number of types to be used in [Number of Calibration Data Groups for
Tool Measurement].
<4> Set [Whether to Use Offset Value for Tool Measurement Calibration] (0: Not
use, 1: Use).
122
B-64647EN/01
● Settings for the touch sensor position

<2> Select the condition to set from [Position of Touch Sensor A to D] and press the
<INPUT> key.
<3> Set each item. 1
 When measuring a workpiece using a touch probe 2
The following measurement conditions and calibration data need to be set in the
data setting window.
3
 with each other. For example, probe geometry data associated with probe
motion type A needs to be set in probe geometry data type A. Similarly, 4
MEMO
configure B to F.
5
● Settings for the number of measurement condition types for workpiece set-up/
post-machining inspection 6
<2> Select [Motion Settings] and press the <INPUT> key. 7
<3> Set the number of types to be used in [Number of Measurement Condition
Groups for Workpiece Set-up/Post-machining Inspection].
8
• Determine the number of types according to the probe type and measurement
condition type to be used. A1
Example:
For two probe types (long, short) and two measurement condition types
 (overrun amount large, small)

Number of types = 4
A2
MEMO Type A: Probe (short), measurement condition (overrun amount large)
Type B: Probe (long), measurement condition (overrun amount large)
Type C: Probe (short) measurement condition (overrun amount small)
Z
Type D: Probe (long), measurement condition (overrun amount small)
• Up to six types can be set.
123
B-64647EN/01
● Settings for the probe motion

<2> Select the condition to set from [Workpiece Set-up/Post-machining Inspection
A to F] and press the <INPUT> key.
1 <3> Set each item.
2 ● Settings for the number of touch sensor position types and whether to use the
offset value
3 <2> Select [Motion Settings] and press the <INPUT> key.
<3> Set the number of types to be used in [Number of Calibration Data Groups for
4 Tool Measurement].
<4> Set [Whether to Use Offset Value for Tool Measurement Calibration] (0: Not
use, 1: Use).
5
● Settings for the touch sensor position
6 <1> Select the Calibration tab.
<2> Select the condition to set from [Position of Touch Sensor A to D] and press the
<INPUT> key.
7 <3> Set each item.
8 ● Settings for the machine coordinate value on a surface where the reference
workpiece is placed
A1 <2> Select [Motion Settings] and press the <INPUT> key.
<3> Set the machine coordinate value on a surface where the reference workpiece
A2 is placed in [Machine Coordinate Value on Surface Where Reference
Workpiece Is Placed].
Z A value set in [Machine Coordinate Value on Surface Where Reference

Workpiece Is Placed] is referenced in the following measurement cycles.
• Measurement cycle (probe Z-axis direction) - Calibration - G2001: Probe
 length
• Measurement cycle (probe X-axis direction) - Calibration - G2101: Probe
MEMO
length
For details on measurement cycles, see "Set-up Guidance OPERATOR'S
124
B-64647EN/01
● Settings for the post-machining inspection motion

<2> Select [Motion Settings] and press the <INPUT> key.
<3> After executing post-machining inspection, specify the offset value ratio set as
the tool offset amount in [Offset Amount of Setting Value to Post-machining 1
Inspection Tool Offset Amount].
2
2.5.4 Setting Up the Machine Collision Avoidance Func- 3
tion
2.5.4
To use the machine collision avoidance function (option), you need to create a 3D
machine model beforehand and set various functions. 4
2.5.4.1 Creating a 3D machine model 5

To create a 3D machine model, you need to use simulation software VERICUT
2.5.4.1
provided by CGTech to create the files below.

• Start-up project file (xxx.VcProject) (It contains the information about blanks and
6
jigs.)
• Template of a machine file (xxx.mch or xxx.xmch) 7
• Template of a control file (xxx.ctl or xxx.xctl)
• Template of a tool file (xxx.tls) 8
• Machine structure file (xxx.stl)
Create a machine structure and tool data on a PC and register the data to PANEL
A1
iH Pro.
A2
Z
125
B-64647EN/01
VERICUT
Define a
machine model.
1
2
3
Tool definition
4
5
6
Fig. 2.5.4.1 (a) Creating a machine structure and tool data
7 • For details about how to create a 3D machine model file, contact CGTech.
• To create a 3D machine model file, CGTech simulation software VERICUT
version 7.4.1 or later is required.
8  • If your VERICUT is the version 7.4.1 or later, you can use it.
• When you do not have VERICUT, you can obtain it for free of charge by making
MEMO a partner license agreement with CGTech (Note that support for VERICUT may
A1 be at your expense).
• You can request CGTech to create a 3D machine model file (at your expense).
• For how to use VERICUT, see the VERICUT help.
A2
 Tolerance when creating a 3D machine model
Z To use VERICUT to create a 3D machine model, set a tolerance (cutting
resolution or cutting accuracy) to a value nearly 0.7.
The blank is roughly cut, but this does not cause a problem with detecting
interference.
A smaller tolerance makes the cutting surface of the blank more smooth, but this
increases CPU load.
 • Athissmaller tolerance makes the cutting surface of the blank more smooth, but
increases CPU load.
MEMO • For details about the tolerance, see the VERICUT help or contact CGTech.
126
B-64647EN/01
 Preparing the definition of blanks and jigs

Perform preparations for end users to define blanks and jigs.
In VERICUT, connect one jig ([Fixture]) to the part called [Attach] and one blank
([Stock]) to that jig.
1
2
3
4
5
Fig. 2.5.4.1 (b) Project tree 6

• In VERICUT, you can connect multiple jigs ([Fixture]) and blanks ([Stock]) to 7
[Attach]. However, to use this function, you should always connect one jig
 ([Fixture]) to [Attach] and one blank ([Stock]) to that jig.
MEMO
• You can add multiple model geometries to a jig ([Fixture]) and a blank ([Stock]).
• For details about [Attach], blank ([Stock]), and jig ([Fixture]), see the VERICUT
8
help.
A1
2.5.4.2 Setting various settings of the machine collision avoidance function

A2
Set the following various settings of the machine collision avoidance function.
2.5.4.2
- Common Settings
- Machine Setting
Z
- Individual Path
Follow the procedure below to display the settings screen.
127
B-64647EN/01
<1> From the Home screen, start the machine collision avoidance function.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
A1 The soft keys are switched.
A2
Z
<3> Press the [Common Settings], [Machine Setting], or [Individual Path] soft key.
The common settings screen, machine setting screen, or individual path
settings screen appears.
128
B-64647EN/01
• When [Machine Setting] is enabled, the [Machine Setting] and [Individual Path]
 • Ifsoftyoukeys appear.
changed the settings, you need to restart the machine collision avoidance
MEMO
function to apply the changes.
1
2.5.4.3
2.5.4.3
Setting the common items
Set the common settings of the machine collision avoidance function.
2
3
4
5
6
7
Fig. 2.5.4.3 (a) Common settings screen (Common tab)
8
A1
A2
Z
Fig. 2.5.4.3 (b) Common settings screen (Color tab)
Fig. 2.5.4.3 (c) Soft Keys on the Common Settings Screen
129
B-64647EN/01
• Pressing the [Select Check] soft key allows you to enable/disable the setting
items. (You can perform this operation when focus is placed on the check box.)
 • Pressing the [OK] soft key confirms your entry and exits.
• If input data has an error, a message appears, moving the focus to the error
1 MEMO
item.
• Pressing the [Cancel] soft key discards your entry and exits.
2
Table 2.5.4.3 (a) Items of Common Settings (Common Tab)
3 Item Description Initial value

Auto Preview Time Set the preview estimated time (msec) under 50
(msec) automatic operation. (0 to 600)
4 Manual Preview Time Set the preview estimated time (msec) under 50
(msec) manual operation. (0 to 600)
Update Interval Specify the update interval of a simulation. (128 or 300
5 (msec) above) (PANEL iH Pro only)
[Detail Edit] of Blank/ Enables the [Detail Edit] button for blanks and jigs. Cleared
6 Jig Enabled
[Machine Setting] Enables the machine setting. Cleared

Enabled
7
Table 2.5.4.3 (b) Items of Common Settings (Color Tab)
8 Item Description Initial value
Blank Color 1 Specify the blank color 1 in RGB. (0 to 255) 240 220 130
A1 Blank Color 2 Specify the blank color 2 in RGB. (0 to 255) 240 220 190
Blank Color 3 Specify the blank color 3 in RGB. (0 to 255) 240 180 130
Jig Color 1 Specify the jig color 1 in RGB. (0 to 255) 220 200 170
A2 Jig Color 2 Specify the jig color 2 in RGB. (0 to 255) 190 190 190
Jig Color 3 Specify the jig color 3 in RGB. (0 to 255) 90 90 90
130
B-64647EN/01
2.5.4.4 Setting the machine configuration

Set the machine configuration for the machine collision avoidance function. You
2.5.4.4
can configure the machine configuration settings to use machine collision

avoidance function, such as connection to the CNC or 3D machine model file
storage location.
1
2
3
4
5
6
Fig. 2.5.4.4 (a) Machine Setting Screen (Common Tab) 7
8
A1
A2
Z
Fig. 2.5.4.4 (b) Machine Setting Screen (Notification Tab)
Fig. 2.5.4.4 (c) Soft Keys on the Machine Setting Screen
131
B-64647EN/01
• Pressing the [Select Storage] soft key displays a dialog for you to specify the
location where you want to store the file. (You can perform this operation when
focus is placed on [3D Machine Model File Storage].)
1  • Pressing the [Select Check] soft key allows you to enable/disable the setting
items. (You can perform this operation when focus is placed on the check box.)
MEMO • Pressing the [OK] soft key confirms your entry and exits.
2 item.
3
Table 2.5.4.4 (a) Items of Machine Setting (Common Tab)
4 Item
Node Number
Description
Specify a node number (0 to 7) of the HSSB to be 0
Initial value
connected to the CNC.
5 3D Machine Model
File Storage
Set the storage location of the start-up project file. None
6 Path 1 Name Specify the path name.

Specify the path name (sub system ID) given when
None
creating the 3D machine model file.

Path 2 Name Specify the path name. None
7 Path 3 Name
Select the box to use the selected path.
Specify the path name. None
8 Path 4 Name Specify the path name. None
A1
 Use the initial setting value for the node number.
A2 MEMO
Z
Table 2.5.4.4 (b) Items of Machine Setting (PMC Notification Tab)
Item Description Initial value
Notification PMC Data Specify the flag area for information notification None
No. from the CNC to be used in the notification
function with PMC data.
Form: PMC path (1 or above): Signal address
number (0 or above)
(Example: 1:R100 for R100 in the first path)
Move Notification with Select the box when using move notification with None
PMC Data PMC data.
132
B-64647EN/01

Reload 3D Machine Select the box when reloading a 3D machine None
Model File model file.
Attachment Select the box when replacing an attachment. None
Replacement
Blank/Jig Attachment Select the box when setting the blank/jig None
1
Position Setting attachment position.
Blank Delivery Select the box when delivering a blank. None 2
M/T Mode Change Select the box when switching the milling (M)/ None
turning (T) mode.
Skiving Select the box when switching the skiving. None 3
Model Reset Select the box when resetting a 3D machine None
model file.
4
 Notification function with PMC data
The notification function with PMC data receives information from the CNC via 5
PMC data to control the machine collision avoidance function. When each function
is enabled in the PMC Notification tab, soft keys used to set the enabled function
are displayed as follows: 6
7
Fig. 2.5.4.4 (d) Soft Keys for the Notification Function with PMC Data 8
The following eight functions can be set on a screen displayed when each soft key
is pressed. A1
Table 2.5.4.4 (c) Items of Notification Function with PMC Data Setting
A2
Item Description
Move Notification Function to notify you of move information via PMC data
with PMC Data because the CNC moves a structure with an unknown move Z
path on an axis other than the CNC control axis and PMC
control axis.
Reload 3D Machine Function to reload a 3D machine model file to replace all
Model File structures, such as turret replacement.
Attachment Function to replace an attachment, such as a spindle head.
Replacement
Blank/Jig Attachment Function to adjust the blank/jig attachment position according
Position Setting to the measurement results on the machine.
Blank Delivery Function to deliver a blank in 2-spindle 2-turret turning.
M/T Mode Change Function to switch between the milling (M) mode and turning
(T) mode.
Skiving Function to switch to the skiving mode in a gear machine.
133
B-64647EN/01
Item Description
Model Reset Function to automatically reset the mode geometry.
The notification function with PMC data notifies you of information from the CNC
1 as follows:
<1> The CNC writes notification information to the PMC data area.
2 Specify the information writing area on the setting screen of each function.
<2> The CNC turns on the information notification flag bit corresponding to the
3 written information.
<3> The machine collision avoidance function executes the function corresponding
to the enabled information notification flag bit and then turns off the bit
4 (Machine collision avoidance.
<4> The CNC moves to the next process when the notification flag bit is turned off.
5
The following table shows the area of the flag bit for information notification from
6 the CNC used in the notification function with PMC data.
This area can be specified in [Notification PMC Data No.] in the PMC Notification
tab on the machine setting screen.
7 Table 2.5.4.4 (d) Area of the Information Notification Flag Bit

Offset Function name Information flag bit
8 +0 Move Notification with

PMC Data
bit0 to bit3: Path 1 to 4. Request to move on
the corresponding path
bit4 to bit7: Not used
A1 +1 Reload 3D Machine
Model File
bit0: Request to reload 
+2 Attachment Replacement bit0: Request to replace the attachment 
A2 bit1 to bit7: Not used
+3 Blank/Jig Attachment bit0 to bit3: Path 1 to 4. Request to set the
Position Setting blank position on the corresponding path
Z bit4 to bit7: Path 1 to 4. Request to set the jig
position on the corresponding path
+4 Blank Delivery bit0: Request to deliver the blank 
+5 M/T Mode Change bit0 to bit3: Path 1 to 4. Request to switch the
mode on the corresponding path
+6 Skiving bit0: Request to turn on/off the skiving 
+7 Model Reset bit0: Request to reset the model 
134
B-64647EN/01
 Setting the items of [Move Notification with PMC Data]

Set the items of [Move Notification with PMC Data]. Move information is sent via
PMC data because the CNC moves a structure with an unknown move path on an
axis other than the CNC control axis and PMC control axis.

1
The soft keys are switched.
2
3
<2> Press the right-most soft key. When the display changes, press the [Move
PMC] soft key.
The Move Notification with PMC Data setting screen appears.
4
5
<3> Set each item and press the [OK] soft key.
6
Confirm your entry and exit the settings.
7
8
A1
A2
Z
 • Ifitem.
input data has an error, a message appears, moving the focus to the error
MEMO • Pressing the [Cancel] soft key discards your entry and exits.
135
B-64647EN/01
Table 2.5.4.4 (e) Items of Move Notification with PMC Data Setting
Item Description Initial
value
Move Data Specify an area to store the coordinate value and feedrate None
1 Notification PMC sent via PMC data.
Data No. Specify the target information with an axis number between
101 and 106 in [CNC Axis No. Assignment to Axis
2 Movement of CAS] in the individual path settings.
Axis Offset Description

number
3 101 +0 Machine coordinate value
(Double)
4 102
+8
+16
Feedrate (Double)
Machine coordinate value
(Double)
5 +24 Feedrate (Double)

103 +32 Machine coordinate value
6 (Double)
+40 Feedrate (Double)
106 +80 Machine coordinate value

7 (Double)
+88 Feedrate (Double)
8 Form: PMC path (1 or above): Signal address number (0 or

above)
A1 Interference
PMC Data No.
Specify an area which is notified of interference detection
information set in the machine collision avoidance function
None
(For Detection when interference is detected on any of Path 1 to 4.
A2 Notification)
Offset Description
+0 Interference detection notification
Z (WORD)
Bit0: Interference was detected on any
of Path 1 to 4.
If this signal is turned on, stop an axis corresponding to the
individual path notification signal on the machine.
Form: PMC path (1 or above): Signal address number (0 or
above)
136
B-64647EN/01

value
Interference Specify an area which is notified of interference detection None
PMC Data No. information set in the machine collision avoidance function
(For Individual
Path Notification)
when interference occurs during a move to the notified
coordinate value. 1
Offset Description
+0 Interference detection notification 2
(WORD)
Bit0: Interference was detected on
Coordinate 101 (+ direction)
3
:
4
Coordinate 101 (- direction) 5
Coordinate 102 (- direction)
: 6
Coordinate 106 (- direction)
If this signal is turned on, stop the corresponding axis on the 7
machine.
above) 8
• To use the Double type of PMC data, PMC management software version 60A5/
A1
25 or later is required.
• Use a machine coordinate value for the coordinate value. Be sure to specify the
A2

NOTE
current position for an axis that you do not move.
• Since an axis move using move notification with PMC data is controlled
separately from the CNC axis, it cannot be stopped on the machine collision
avoidance function side. To stop the related axis, monitor the interference PMC Z
data and stop the axis on the machine.
 Setting the items of [Reload 3D Machine Model File]

Configure the settings to reload a 3D machine model file to replace all structures,
such as turret replacement.

137
B-64647EN/01
1 <2> Press the right-most soft key. When the display changes, press the [Reload]
soft key.
The Reload 3D Machine Model File setting screen appears.
2
3
4 Confirm your entry and exit the settings.
5
6
7
8
A1
A2 • Pressing the [Select Storage] soft key displays a dialog for you to specify the
location where you want to store the file. (You can perform this operation when
 focus is placed on [3D Machine Model File Storage].)
Z MEMO
item.
138
B-64647EN/01
Table 2.5.4.4 (f) Items of Reload 3D Machine Model File Setting

value
Reload PMC Specify an area to store the 3D machine model file number None
Data No. you want to reload, which is sent via PMC data. 1
Offset Description
+0 Reload file number (1 to 8) (WORD)
2
above)
(Example: 1:R1100 for R1100 in the first path) 3
3D Machine Specify the storage location of a 3D machine model file you None
Model File want to reload.
Storage The first storage shows the name set in [3D Machine Model
File Storage] in the Common tab on the machine setting
4
screen (Cannot be changed).
5

NOTE
• All of 3D machine model files to be reloaded must have the same machine
configuration. 6
 Setting the items of [Attachment Replacement]

7
Configure the settings to replace a spindle attachment, such as a spindle head.
The connection source component (child side) used in this function is the 1st
spindle on Path 1.
8
<1> Press the [Settings] soft key. A1
A2
Z
<2> Press the right-most soft key. When the display changes, press the [Attach] soft
key.
The Attachment Replacement setting screen appears.
<3> Set each item on the Source 1, Source 2, Connect, and Return tabs and press
the [OK] soft key.
139
B-64647EN/01
Same as the
1st spindle
1 on Path 1 in
the individual
settings
2 (Cannot be
changed).
3
4
5  • Ifitem.
6
Table 2.5.4.4 (g) Items of Connection Destination 1/2 Component (Child Side)
Info Setting
7 Item Description Initial
value
8 Replacement
PMC Data No.
Specify an area to store attachment replacement
information, which is sent via PMC data.
None
Offset Description
A1 +0 Reload file number (1 to 8) (WORD)
+2 Connect or Return
A2 (-1 to -8, 1 to 8) (WORD)

Connect: Set a positive value.
Return: Set a negative value.
Z Form: PMC path (1 or above): Signal address number (0 or

above)
Name Specify the connection destination component name given None
when creating the 3D machine model file.
Spindle Name Specify the 1st spindle name given when creating the 3D None
machine model file.
Tool Index Specify the tool index assigned in the 3D machine model 0
file.
140
B-64647EN/01
Table 2.5.4.4 (h) Items of Connection Destination Component (Parent Side)

Info Setting
value
Name Specify the connection destination component name given
when creating the 3D machine model file.
None 1
Table 2.5.4.4 (i) Items of Return Destination Component (Parent Side) Info
2
Setting
Item Description Initial 3
value
Name Specify the return destination component name given when None
creating the 3D machine model file. 4
● Relationship with the 3D machine model file items 5
The following table shows the relationship between the items set on the
Attachment Replacement setting screen and the 3D machine model file items.
6
(4)
(1)
(2) 7
(5)
8
A1
(3)
A2
Fig. 2.5.4.4 (e) 3D Machine Model File Items

Z
Table 2.5.4.4 (j) Relationship with the 3D Machine Model File Items
No. Item
(1) Connection Source Component (Child Side) Info (Name)
(2) Connection Source Component (Child Side) Info (Spindle Name)
(3) Connection Source Component (Child Side) Info (Tool Index)
(4) Connection Destination Component (Parent Side) Info (Name)
(5) Return Destination Component (Parent Side) Info (Name)
141
B-64647EN/01
 Setting the items of [Blank/Jig Attachment Position Setting]

Configure the settings to adjust the blank/jig attachment position according to the
measurement results on the machine.
1 <1> Press the [Settings] soft key.

2
3 <2> Press the right-most soft key. When the display changes, press the [Position
Adjust] soft key.
4 The Blank/Jig Attachment Position Setting screen appears.
5
6 <3> Set each item and press the [OK] soft key.
7
8
A1
A2
Z
 • Ifitem.
142
B-64647EN/01
Table 2.5.4.4 (k) Items of Blank/Jig Attachment Position Setting

value
Blank Position Specify an area to store the blank attachment position. None
Setting PMC
Data No. Type Offset Description
1
X +0 Relative travel distance in
Y +8
X-axis direction (Double)
Relative travel distance in
2
Y-axis direction (Double)
Z +16 Relative travel distance in 3
Z-axis direction (Double)
A +24 Relative travel distance in
A-axis direction (Double) 4
B +32 Relative travel distance in
B-axis direction (Double)
C +40 Relative travel distance in 5
C-axis direction (Double)
above)
6
Jig Position
Setting PMC
Specify an area to store the jig attachment position.
None
7
Data No. above)
8

NOTE
• To use the Double type of PMC data, PMC management software version 60A5/
25 or later is required.
A1
A2
 Setting the items of [Blank Delivery]
Configure the settings to deliver a blank in 2-spindle 2-turret turning.
Z

<2> Press the right-most soft key. When the display changes, press the [Delivery]
soft key.
The Blank Delivery setting screen appears.
143
B-64647EN/01
1 <3> Set each item and press the [OK] soft key.
2
3
4
5
6
7  •• IfPressing
input data has an error, a message appears.
the [Cancel] soft key discards your entry and exits.
MEMO
8
Table 2.5.4.4 (l) Items of Blank Delivery Setting
A1 Item Description Initial
value
A2 Blank Delivery
Setting PMC
Specify an area to store blank delivery information. None
Data No. Offset Description
Z +0 Delivery method WORD

1: Release 1 (Open)
2: Grab 1 (Close)
3: Release 2 (Open)
4: Grab 2 (Close)

above)
Delivery Setting Specify the delivery setting name given when creating the None
Name 3D machine model file.
144
B-64647EN/01
 Setting the items of [M/T Mode Change]

Configure the settings to switch between the milling (M) mode and turning (T)
mode in a complex machine.

1
2
<2> Press the right-most soft key. When the display changes, press the [Change M/
3
T] soft key.
The M/T Mode Change setting screen appears. 4
5
6
7
8
A1
A2
Z
 • Ifitem.
145
B-64647EN/01
Table 2.5.4.4 (m) Items of M/T Mode Change Setting

value
Change PMC Specify an area to store M/T mode change information. None
1 Data No.
Offset Description
+0 M/T mode (for Path 1) WORD
2 0: Switch to the turning mode (T)
1: Switch to the milling mode (M)
6 Form: PMC path (1 or above): Signal address number (0 or

above)
7 ● Individual settings when using the M/T mode change function

When using the M/T mode change function, set the spindle information as follows:
8 1st Spindle Information: Configure the M mode.
2nd Spindle Information: Configure the T mode.
A1
A2 Tool number notification is
used in both the M and T
Z modes.
Settings for M mode
Settings for T mode
Fig. 2.5.4.4 (f) Individual path settings screen
146
B-64647EN/01
• Settings for M mode

Spindle Name: Specify the tool spindle name in the M mode.
Tool Index: Specify the index number for the tool spindle.
Set how to specify the rotation command for the tool spindle.
• Settings for T mode

1
Spindle Name: Specify the workpiece spindle name in the T mode.
Tool Index: Specify the index number for the turning tool. 2
Set how to specify the rotation command for the workpiece spindle.
• How to replace the tool 3

When using the M/T mode change function, use [Signal] or [Variable] to
perform active tool notification. If [M Code] or [T Code] is used, it does not work
correctly. 4
The 1st spindle data is used for the M mode, and the 2nd spindle data for the T
mode.
5
 Setting the items of [Skiving]
Configure the settings to switch the skiving mode. This works only for Path 1. 6
7
8
<2> Press the right-most soft key. When the display changes, press the [Skiving] A1
soft key.
The Skiving setting screen appears.
A2
Z
147
B-64647EN/01
1
2
3
4
5  •• IfPressing
input data has an error, a message appears.
the [Cancel] soft key discards your entry and exits.
MEMO
6
Table 2.5.4.4 (n) Items of Skiving Setting
7 value
Notification PMC Specify an area to store the skiving mode change. None
Data No.
8 Offset Description
+0 Skiving setting WORD
0: OFF
A1 1: ON
A2 above)
Z  Setting the items of [Model Reset]

Configure the settings to use the model reset function.

148
B-64647EN/01
<2> Press the right-most soft key. When the display changes, press the [Model
Reset] soft key.
The Model Reset setting screen appears.
<3> Set each item and press the [OK] soft key. 2
3
4
5
6
7
 • The above describes only how to display the screen because there are no
8
setting items of the model reset function.
MEMO
A1
A2
2.5.4.5 Configuring the individual path settings
Set the machine collision avoidance function for each path. You can assign a CNC
2.5.4.5
axis number to the axis identifier given when creating a 3D machine model file Z
(xxx.Vcproject) and configure the spindle settings.
149
B-64647EN/01
1
2
3 The setting items
depend on the
selected information
4 notification method.
5 Fig. 2.5.4.5 Individual path settings screen
6 • Every time you press the [Select Path] soft key, you see a different path.
Pressing this key with the maximum path number being displayed displays Path
1. The maximum path number is four for the PANEL iH Pro and two for the
PANEL iH.
7  • Specify the [Select Check] soft key to use a path and the 1st and 2nd spindle
information. When each check box is selected, the appropriate items are
MEMO enabled.
8 • Pressing the [OK] soft key confirms your entry and exits.
item.
A1 • Pressing the [Cancel] soft key discards your entry and exits.
A2 Table 2.5.4.5 Items of Common Settings

Z Path Name Displays the name set in [Path Name] in the

Common tab on the machine setting screen.
None
CNC Axis No. Specify a CNC axis number corresponding to the All -1
Assignment to Axis CAS moving axis.
Movement of CAS
CAS moving X Y Z A B C
axis U V W A2 B2 C2
The selectable values are as follows:

CNC Relative Axis Number: 1 to 48
Move Notification with PMC Data: 101 to 106
Axis not used: -1
For details about move notification with PMC
data, see "■Notification function with PMC data"
in "2.5.4.4 Setting the machine configuration".
150
B-64647EN/01

Active Tool Specify the method notifying you of the number M code 6
Notification of the currently used tool.
Select one of the following options:
• [M Code], [Signal], [Macro Variable] or [T
Code] 1
When selecting [M Code], specify M code
numbers (0 or above). (Example: 6 for
M06) 2
The tool number represents the number of
the last commanded T code.
When selecting [Signal], specify the signal
in the following form. Configure to notify
3
you of the T code number within the range
of four bytes (two words) from the specified
signal. 4
Form: PMC path (1 or above): Signal
address number (0 or above)
(Example: 1:R1000 for R1000 in the first 5
path)
When selecting [Macro Variable], specify
the number of the macro variable in the
following form. Configure to notify you of
6
the T code number with the specified
macro variable.
Form: Path number (1 or above)#Macro
7
number (1 or above)
(Example: 1#123 for #123 in the first path)
When using [T Code], a specified T code is 8
used.
• To use the tool life management and tool
management functions, use [Signal] or A1
[Macro Variable] to notify you a tool number.
• When both of two used spindles are tool
spindles:
When using [M Code] or [T Code], the 1st
A2
spindle is always considered as a tool
spindle (the 2nd spindle cannot be used as
a tool spindle).
Z
When using [Signal], set the T code
number of the 1st spindle to the specified
signal and that of the 2nd spindle to the
next signal (example: For R1000, R1000 is
for the 1st spindle, and R1004 is for the
2nd spindle).
When using [Macro Variable], set the T
code number of the 1st spindle to the
specified variable and that of the 2nd
spindle to the next variable (example: For
#123, #123 is for the 1st spindle, and #124
is for the 2nd spindle).
151
B-64647EN/01

A check box for Select the box to use the 1st spindle. Selected
specifying the 1st
spindle
1 Spindle Name Specify the 1st spindle name given when

None
For one spindle, you can omit its name.
2 When using it as a rotary tool on the turret, do not

specify the name.
Tool Index Specify the tool index assigned to the 1st spindle 1
3 in the 3D machine model file.

When using it as a workpiece spindle for lathe or
a rotary tool on the turret, set 0.
4 1st Spindle
Information
Specify the notification method of the 1st spindle
information.
[M Code]
CW:3
Select one of the following options: CCW:4
• [M Code], [Signal] or [Macro Variable] Stop: 5
5 When selecting [M Code], specify the M
code numbers (0 or above) for [CW],
6 [CCW], and [Stop].
When selecting [Signal], specify the signal
7 in the following form.

Form: PMC path (1 or above): Signal
8 address number (0 or above)
(Example: 1:R1000 for R1000 in the first
path)
A1 Configure to notify you of the spindle
information with the specified signal (byte).
[Stop]: 0 [CW]: 1 [CCW]: 2
A2 When selecting [Macro Variable], specify
the number (1 or above) of the macro
variable in the following form.
Z 
Form: Path number# Macro number
(Example: 1#123 for #123 in the first path)
Configure to notify you of the spindle
information with the specified macro
variable.
[Stop]: 0 [CW]: 1 [CCW]: 2
A check box for Select the box to use the 2nd spindle. Cleared
specifying the 2nd
spindle
152
B-64647EN/01

Spindle Name Specify the 2nd spindle name given when None
When using it as a rotary tool on the turret, do not
specify the name.
If the 1st spindle is not set, the 2nd spindle is 1
disabled.
Tool Index Specify the tool index assigned to the 2nd
spindle in the 3D machine model file.
1
2
When using it as a workpiece spindle for lathe or
a rotary tool on the turret, set 0.
2nd Spindle Set the information as with the 1st spindle None 3
Information information.
When using [M Code] for both the 1st and 2nd
spindles, specify a different number from the 1st 4
spindle.
• When the methods other than [M Code] are used to notify you of the information
5
about the active tool and CW, CCW, and Stop of the spindle, the information is
based on actual machine actions and is passed to you with a time lag of the
preview time.
6
• To use [Signal] or [Macro Variable], keep the values until the state is changed.

NOTE
Set the value as "0" when the NC is in reset state.
• If you changed the settings, restart the machine collision avoidance function to 7
apply the changes.
• Since the PMC control axis is controlled separately from the CNC axis, it cannot
be stopped on the machine collision avoidance function side. To stop the related 8
PMC control axis, take measures such as turning on the ECLRg signal on the
machine for a group to which the axis belongs.
A1
A2
2.5.4.6 Preview time of the machine collision avoidance function
When the machine collision avoidance function is used, it outputs the position
2.5.4.6
(preview coordinate value) advanced for a period of time set in the preview time Z
from the machine coordinate value (current coordinate value) managed on the
CNC, so that the machine can be stopped before interference occurs.
The preview time can be specified in the Common tab on the common settings
screen.
Table 2.5.4.6 (a) Description of Coordinate Values

Item Description
Current coordinate Machine coordinate value managed on the CNC, which is a
value position specified for the servo. It is a position advanced for a
period of time required to decelerate and stop from the actual
machine position.
153
B-64647EN/01
Item Description
Preview coordinate It is a position advanced for a period of the preview time from the
value current coordinate value.
1
Time required to Preview time
decelerate and stop Specified
2 path
3 Current coordinate value Preview coordinate value
Actual machine position
4 Fig. 2.5.4.6 (a) Preview Time of the Machine Collision Avoidance Function
5  Operation before machine stop

There are the following five steps before the machine is stopped by the machine
6 collision avoidance function.
(1) Preview coordinate 0.7 msec or less Machine Collision

value acquisition 12.0 msec Avoidance
7 (2) Interference check
function side
Interference
detected
8 (3) Machine stop command 0.07 msec or less

(4) Stop request receipt by NC CNC side
8.0 msec or less
A1 (5) Machine stop process
(including the time to TS msec
decelerate and stop)
A2 Servo axis stopped
Fig. 2.5.4.6 (b) Operation before Machine Stop

Z
Table 2.5.4.6 (b) Details on Operation before Machine Stop
No. Description Required time
(1) Time to obtain the coordinate value in a 1-path 10-axis 0.7 msec or
configuration. less
(2) Time to determine interference by the machine collision 12.0 msec or
avoidance function based on the preview coordinate value less
obtained in (1) and complete its process.
(3) Time to detect interference and notify the NC of it. 0.07 msec or
less
154
B-64647EN/01
No. Description Required time

(4) Time before the NC starts the stop process after receiving the 8.0 msec or
notification. less
(5) Time required to decelerate and stop. TS msec
(= Time constant (ms) + Servo time constant (normally 33 ms) +
CNC process time (20 ms))
1
Since the current coordinate value is a position advanced for a period of time
required to decelerate and stop from the actual machine position, the minimum 2
time required to detect interference is 20.77 msec, which is the total time of (1) to
(4).
Specify a value greater than the above "minimum time required to detect
interference" and lower than the maximum preview time (600 msec).
3
 • Ittheis load
recommended that the preview time should be 50 msec or less to reduce
4
in obtaining the preview coordinate value.
MEMO
5
6

NOTE
• If the preview time is set shorter than the minimum time required to detect
interference, the machine cannot be stopped before actual interference occurs.
7
 When the rapid traverse time constant is greater than the maximum
8
preview time (600 msec)
If the rapid traverse time constant settings meet the following conditions when a A1
rapid traverse (G00) block is executed in automatic operation, multiply the rapid
traverse rate used in preview coordinate value calculation by the following
magnification: A2
• There is an axis that meets "Rapid traverse acceleration/deceleration time
constant (P1620 + P1621) > (Maximum preview time (600) - TAP)".
• The axis that meets the above condition is moving in rapid traverse (G00) during
Z
automatic operation.
P1620 + P1621
Rapid traverse rate = Rapid
600 - TAP
TAP: Setting value in the parameter (No.10928)

Maximum magnification: 10.0
155
B-64647EN/01
• Even when the fast traverse override is enabled or acceleration/deceleration

 before interpolation is used for fast traverse, if the condition "Rapid traverse
acceleration/deceleration time constant (P1620 + P1621) > (Maximum preview
MEMO
time (600) - TAP)" is met, multiply by the above magnification.
1
2 • There will be an error in the preview coordinate value due to automatic speed
control on the CNC, automatic acceleration/deceleration, or override value
3 changes. The longer the preview time is set, the greater the error may be. For
this reason, specify the minimum value that can stop the axis before
4

NOTE
interference for the preview time.
• Depending on the CNC conditions, such as when minute continuous blocks are
executed or a function that does not support the preview coordinate value is
executed, prediction may not be performed up to the position specified in the
preview time. Estimated required time until the output preview coordinate value
5 is output at the same time. Use this value as well for interference check.
6
2.5.4.7 Signals available during the execution of the machine collision
7 avoidance function
The signals listed below are available during the execution of the machine
2.5.4.7
collision avoidance function.

8
As shown below, "n" in each address represents the position of the address used
A1 
in each path.
Path 1: n = 0 (0 to 999)
Path 2: n = 1 (1000 to 1999)
MEMO
A2 Path 3: n = 2 (2000 to 2999)
Path 4: n = 3 (3000 to 3999)
Z  Machine collision avoidance function executing signal O3C <Fn528.0>

Table 2.5.4.7 (a) O3C<Fn528.0>
Item Description
Section Output signal
Function This signal outputs the execution state of the machine collision
avoidance function.
Action This signal is 1 during the execution of the machine collision avoidance
function.
When the machine collision avoidance function stops, the signal
changes to 0.
156
B-64647EN/01
 Machine collision avoidance function data read stop signal ORS

<Fn528.1>
Table 2.5.4.7 (b) ORS<Fn528.1>
Item Description
Section Output signal 1
Function This signal outputs the state indicating that the machine collision
avoidance function stops the reading of preview coordinate value data.
Action This signal monitors the interval of reading of preview coordinate value
2
data by the machine collision avoidance function. If the parameter
No.10925 is set to an incorrect value, or if the function cannot read data,
the signal changes to 1. This signal returns to 0 when the loading of data 3
restarts.
When this signal is 0, or when one of the interference alarm signals
±OC1 to ±OC8 <Fn528, Fn529> is 1, the interval of reading of data is not 4
monitored.
5
 • The value 1 of this signal indicates that the machine collision avoidance function
stops due to any reason, for example, a hang-up of an application. Check the
NOTE state of the machine collision avoidance function.
6
7
MEMO
8
 Machine collision avoidance function current machine position output A1

signal OMP <Fn528.2>
Table 2.5.4.7 (c) OMP<Fn528.2>
A2
Item Description
Section Output signal
Function This signal outputs the state indicating that only current machine
Z
coordinate values are being output.
Action This signal changes to 1 when the coordinate values obtained by the
machine collision avoidance function are output as current coordinate
values instead of preview coordinate values.
157
B-64647EN/01
 Interference detection alarm signal +OC1 to +OC8 <Fn529>, -OC1 to -OC8

<Fn530>
Table 2.5.4.7 (d) +OC1 to +OC8 <Fn529>, -OC1 to -OC8 <Fn530>
Item Description
1 Section Output signal
Function This signal is output if the machine collision avoidance function detects a
collision.
2 "OC1 to +OC8" represents the number of axes (the 1st to the 8th axes)
for which interference is detected.
"+" represents the positive direction. "-" represents the negative
3 direction.
Output When the axis is commanded to stop in the event of detection of
conditions interference by the machine collision avoidance function, the
4 interference detection alarm (OT516, OT517) occurs. In this case, this
signal changes to 1. Once the signal is 1, that axis and its direction are
stored. You cannot further move the axis to the same direction. You can
5 move it to only the axial direction opposite to the stored direction.
6

NOTE
• Even when the parameter O3A (No.10926#0) is set to 1, if the machine is
commanded to stop, this signal changes to 1.
7
8  • For details about the parameters, see "FANUC Series 30i/31i/32i-MODEL B
MEMO
A1
 Signal address
A2 #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
Fn528 OMP ORS O3C
Z
Fn529 +OC8 +OC7 +OC6 +OC5 +OC4 +OC3 +OC2 +OC1
Fn530 -OC8 -OC7 -OC6 -OC5 -OC4 -OC3 -OC2 -OC1
158
B-64647EN/01
2.6　SETTING UP THE IMPROVEMENT APPLICATION
2.6
2.6 SETTING UP THE IMPROVEMENT

APPLICATION
You can set up the improvement application functions such as the Data Logger 1
and Maintenance Manager.
2
2.6.1 Importing/Exporting Logs Collected with the Data 3
Logger Function
2.6.1
You can export logs collected with the Data Logger function to an external memory
(a memory card or USB flash drive). You can also import logs saved in an external 4
memory to the CNC.
For how to import/export logs, see the section "5.1.5 Importing or Exporting Logs"
in "FANUC iHMI Home Screen OPERATOR'S MANUAL" (B-64644EN). 5
2.6.1.1 Log item configuration file 6
The log item configuration file (DataLoggerInfo.xml) is an XML format file output
2.6.1.1
by exporting log items. Information required to import log items is described.

A description example of DataLoggerInfo.xml is as follows: 7
<dataloggerinfo>
<item> 8
<id>ST_007</id>
<period>600000</period>
<path>1</path>
<section>X0000</section> A1
<num>4</num>
</item>
<item>
(...)
A2
</item>
</dataloggerinfo>
Z
Between <dataloggerinfo> and </dataloggerinfo>, describe log item information
displayed in the log item list.
Describe each log item information between <item> and </item>.
159
B-64647EN/01
 Tags included between <item> and </item>

Table 2.6.1.1 (a) List of tags for log item information
XML tag Requ Child Description
ired element
1 <id>
<period>
<item> ○ <path> Describe information related to one log item.
2 <section>
<num>
Log item ID For details about the descriptions, see the
3 <id> ○ None Id column described in "■ Contents to be described for
each tag".
Describe a collection cycle of data. For the minimum
4 <period> ○ None unit that can be described, see the Period column
described in "■ Contents to be described for each tag".
Describe a data path. For details about the
5 <path> × None descriptions, see the Path column described in "■
Contents to be described for each tag".
6 Describe data sections (axis No./address/variable
number/data number). For details about the
<section> × None
descriptions, see the Section column described in "■
Contents to be described for each tag".
7 <num> × None
Describe the number of obtained data. For details
about the descriptions, see the Num column described
in "■ Contents to be described for each tag".
8
 Symbol description
A1 To use the following symbols between the tags, use a replacement character
string between the tags.
A2 Table 2.6.1.1 (b) List of symbols to be replaced

Target Replacem Usage example
Z symbol ent
character
Before replacement After replacement
string
& & <section>Data0&1</section> <section>Data0&1</section>
< < <section>Data<0></section> <section>Data<0></section>
160
B-64647EN/01
 Contents to be described for each tag

Table 2.6.1.1 (c) Log item information
No. Data Id Path Section Num Period*1
name
1 Control AX_001 1~10 Not Not 1000,5000,10000,30000,60000,1 1
axis actual required requir 800000,3600000
speed ed
2 Control AX_002 1~10 1~32 1~32 1000,5000,10000,30000,60000,1 2
axis load 800000,3600000
meter
3 Control AX_003 1~10 1~32 1~32 1000,5000,10000,30000,60000,1 3
axis load 800000,3600000
current (%)
4 Actual AX_004 1~10 Not Not 1000,5000,10000,30000,60000,1 4
spindle required requir 800000,3600000
speed ed
5 Spindle AX_005 1~10 Not Not 1000,5000,10000,30000,60000,1 5
load meter required requir 800000,3600000
ed
6 Status ST_001 1~10 Not Not 1000,5000,10000,30000,60000,1 6
informatio required requir 800000,3600000
n ed
7 Alarm ST_002 1~10 Not Not 10000,30000,60000,1800000,360 7
message required requir 0000
ed
8 Operator ST_003 1~10 Not Not 10000,30000,60000,1800000,360 8
message required requir 0000
ed
9 PMC ST_004 1~10 Alphabetic Not 1000,5000,10000,30000,60000,1 A1
signal (Bit) al requir 800000,3600000
characters ed
+ four- A2
digit
numeric
value Z
10 PMC ST_005 1~10 Alphabetic 1~16 1000,5000,10000,30000,60000,1
signal (1- al 800000,3600000
byte) characters
+ four-
digit
numeric
value
161
B-64647EN/01

name
signal (2- al 800000,3600000
1 byte) characters
+ four-
digit
numeric
2 value
signal (4- al 800000,3600000
3 byte) characters
+ four-
digit
4 numeric
value
13 Conversati ST_008 1~10 0~999999 1~4 1000,5000,10000,30000,60000,1
5 onal Macro
Variable
999 800000,3600000
6 14 Aux.
Macro
ST_009 1~10 0~999999 1~4
999
1000,5000,10000,30000,60000,1
800000,3600000
Variable
15 Execution ST_010 1~10 0~999999 1~4 1000,5000,10000,30000,60000,1
7 Macro
Variable
999 800000,3600000
16 Custom ST_011 1~10 0~999999 1~4 1000,5000,10000,30000,60000,1

8 macro
variable
999 800000,3600000
17 Program RU_001 1~10 Not Not 1000,5000,10000,30000,60000,1

A1 name required requir 800000,3600000
ed
18 Sequence RU_002 1~10 Not Not 1000,5000,10000,30000,60000,1
A2 no. required requir 800000,3600000
ed
19 Number of RU_003 1~10 Not Not 5000,10000,30000,60000,180000
Z machined
parts
required requir 0,3600000
ed
20 Total RU_004 1~10 Not Not 5000,10000,30000,60000,180000
number of required requir 0,3600000
machined ed
parts
21 Powered RU_005 Not Not Not 5000,10000,30000,60000,180000
Time requir required requir 0,3600000
ed ed
22 Operated RU_006 1~10 Not Not 5000,10000,30000,60000,180000
time required requir 0,3600000
ed
162
B-64647EN/01

name
23 Cutting RU_007 1~10 Not Not 5000,10000,30000,60000,180000
time required requir 0,3600000
24 Fan speed MA_001 Not Not

ed
Not 5000,10000,30000,60000,180000
1
requir required requir 0,3600000
25 Servo
ed
MA_002 1~10 Not
ed
Not 1800000,3600000
2
insulation required requir
deteriorati
on
ed
3
26 Spindle MA_003 1~10 Not Not 1800000,3600000
insulation
deteriorati
required requir
ed 4
on
27 Total travel
distance
MA_004 1~10 0~999999 Not
999
5000,10000,30000,60000,180000
requir 0,3600000 5
ed
28 Spindle
Total
MA_005 1~10 0~999999 Not
999
5000,10000,30000,60000,180000
requir 0,3600000 6
Rotations ed
29 Servo
amplifier
MA_006 Not Not
requir required
Not 5000,10000,30000,60000,180000
requir 0,3600000
7
internal ed ed
cooling fan
speed 8
30 Servo MA_007 Not Not Not 5000,10000,30000,60000,180000
amplifier requir required requir 0,3600000
radiator ed ed A1
cooling fan
speed
31 Common MA_008 Not Not Not 5000,10000,30000,60000,180000 A2
power requir required requir 0,3600000
supply ed ed
internal Z
cooling fan
speed
32 Common MA_009 Not Not Not 5000,10000,30000,60000,180000
power requir required requir 0,3600000
supply ed ed
radiator
cooling fan
speed
33 Spindle MA_010 Not Not Not 5000,10000,30000,60000,180000
internal ed ed
cooling fan
speed
163
B-64647EN/01

name
34 Spindle MA_011 Not Not Not 5000,10000,30000,60000,180000
1 radiator
cooling fan
ed ed
speed
2 35 Servo
amplifier
MA_012 1~10 Not
required
Not 5000,10000,30000,60000,180000
requir 0,3600000
APC ed
battery
3 state
For *1Period, enter one of the numeric values.
4
2.6.1.2 Log file
5 The log file is a CSV file output by exporting logs.

2.6.1.2
In the log file, the contents to be displayed with the data display function are
described.
6 The CSV file consists of date information that describes data dates and data
information that describes data.
7 Date/Time Data
YYYY/MM/DD hh:mm:ss,"○○○○○○"
8
A1 Table 2.6.1.2 Description in the log file
Date/Time header Data header
Describe a date/time header. Describe a data name, path, section name,
A2 number of data, and cycle.
Date/Time cell Data cell
Z Describe a recorded date/time in the form

of "YYYY/MM/DD hh:mm:ss".
Describe log contents between the double
quotes (" ").
A time and the header of data contents are displayed in the first line, and data in
the second and subsequent lines. The description in the data cell is enclosed by
the double quotes (" ").
The following shows an example of the contents in the log file.
File name: DataLog_20160818103200.csv (created at 10:32:00 on August 18,

2016)
Date Time PMC SIGNAL(4byte) path 1 address X0 data4
period 1s
2016/01/01 00:00:00, "030103FF 00000000 00000010 00000000"
2016/01/01 12:00:01 AM, "030103FF 00000000 00000010 00000000"
164
B-64647EN/01
2016/01/01 12:00:02 AM, "030103FF 00000000 00000010 00000000"

2016/01/01 12:00:03 AM, "030103FF 00000000 00000010 00000000"
(...)
2016/8/18 10:31:57, "030103FF 00000000 00000010 00000000"
2016/8/18 10:31:58 AM,
2016/8/18 10:31:59 AM,
"030103FF 00000000 00000010 00000000"
"030103FF 00000000 00000010 00000000"
1
2016/8/18 10:32:00 AM, "030103FF 00000000 00000010 00000000"
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
A1
A2
Z
165
B-64647EN/01
2.6.2 Setting Up the Maintenance Manager

2.6.2
The maintenance item information file (MaintenanceInfo.xml) is used to export/

import maintenance item setting data.
Describe maintenance item information between <maintenanceinfo> and </
1 maintenanceinfo>.
A description example of MaintenanceInfo.xml is as follows:
2 <maintenanceinfo>
<category>
<name>MACHINE</name>
<items>
3 <item>
<itemname>
<lang>
4 <en>Machine01</en>
<ja> 機械 01</ja>
</lang>
</itemname>
5 <abbreviation>
<lang>
<en>M01</en>
6 <ja> 機 01</ja>
</lang>
</abbreviation>
<partsname>
<lang>
7 <en> Machine01-parts </en>

<ja> 機械 01- パーツ </ja>
</lang>
</partsname>
8 <decitionmethod>OR</decitionmethod>
<datatype1>1201</datatype1>
<datarangemax1>123.45</datarangemax1>
<datarangemin1>0</datarangemin1>
A1 <decitiontype1> LOWER</decitiontype1>
</item>
<item>
・
A2 ・
</item>
<item>
・
Z ・
</item>
</items>
</category>
</maintenanceinfo>
For details about the tags related to the maintenance information function, see the
section "A.2 MAINTENANCE ITEM SETTING DATA" in "FANUC iHMI Home
Screen OPERATOR'S MANUAL" (B-64644EN).
166
B-64647EN/01
2.6.2.1 Setting parts placement information

You can set replacement parts information (such as the model number of the SP
2.6.2.1
amplifier etc.) to be displayed on the Information Center. You can also display the
images of parts to be replaced and animation images of replacement procedures
together with the explanations of the procedures for replacing the parts.
For parts whose replacement is difficult for an end user, display contact 1
information such as a phone number of FANUC so that support can be requested.
When contacting FANUC, the following informations (1) to (5) are required.
2
(1) CNC device name
(2) Machine manufacturer name, machine type
(3) CNC software series/version 3
(4) Specifications of the servo amplifier and servo motor (at occurrence of servo-
related failures)
(5) Specifications of the spindle amplifier and spindle motor (at occurrence of 4
spindle-related failures)
5
• Check the mounting positions of the CNC device and servo/spindle amplifiers in
 the allocation drawing.

The FANUC specifications are displayed in the following number format: 6
MEMO Servo/spindle amplifiers: A06B-xxxx-Hxxx
Servo/spindle motors: A06B-xxxx-Bxxx
7
8
A1
A2
Z
167
B-64647EN/01
2.6.2.2 Standard icons list

2.6.2.2
No. Icon Description No. Icon Description No. Icon Description

0 No icon 21 Filter 47 Flow rate
1 1 Fan 22 Regulator 48 Acceleration
2 Battery 23 Belt 49 Speed

2
3 Servo motor 24 Gear 50 Shock
3 4 Spindle 26 Oil 51 Travel distance

Motor
4 5 Condenser 28 Door 52 Signal
6 Cable 29 Cushion 53 Time

5 rubber
7 Touch panel 30 Coolant 54 Number of times
6 of movement
8 LCD panel 31 Light 55 Luminous
intensity
9 Memory 32 Fire extinguisher 56 Torque
7 storage
10 Fuse 33 Tool replacement 57 Actual power
8 11 Common power 34
device
Air cylinder 58
consumption
Integrated power
supply consumption
A1 12 Servo amplifier 36 Pump 59 Regenerative

electric power
13 Spindle 39 Conveyor
A2 Amplifier
14 Pulse coder 41 Resistance value
Z 15 Separate type 42 Temperature

detector
17 Linear guide 43 Pressure
18 Ball screw 44 Concentration
19 Bearing 45 pH
20 Telescopic cover 46 Number of

revolutions
168
B-64647EN/01
2.6.2.3 Switching maintenance items display

You can switch the display/hide of the maintenance items registered in the
2.6.2.3
machine maintenance category according to the PMC signal state.

To switch the maintenance items display, follow the procedure below:
<1> Prepare an maintenance items display switch configuration file described in

1
XML format.
2
 •• For
The file name is "MainteShowSettings.xml" only.
details about the file, see "2.6.2.5 Maintenance items display switch
MEMO configuration file". 3
<2> Store the maintenance items display switch configuration file in the directory 4
below:
%APPDATA%\MTB\Maintenance\Settings\
5
<3> Start the Maintenance Manager application.
• For the Maintenance Manager application, the maintenance items display 6
switch settings are loaded from the XML file and saved in the database.
• If the loading fails, the display switch settings will not be saved in the
database, and the loading of the next display switch settings will be
7
performed.
• When the XML file is successfully loaded, it will be automatically deleted. 8
• The maintenance items remains in the current display state until you restart
the Maintenance Manager application even when the display/hide conditions
A1
 are met while the Maintenance Manager application is running.
MEMO
• When you are done with the settings and then start the Maintenance
Manager application, display switching will be performed according to the A2
display switch settings saved in the database.
Z
 Action of hidden maintenance items
• Measurement is not performed for hidden maintenance items.
When hidden maintenance items are displayed again, previous measurement
results will be discarded.
• Hidden maintenance items are included in the number of registrations in a
category.
Therefore, when the total number of displayed and hidden maintenance items
exceeds the registrable number of maintenance items, you cannot add the
number of maintenance items.
169
B-64647EN/01
2.6.2.4 Outputting the display switch settings of the maintenance items

You can output the current display switch settings of the maintenance items in
2.6.2.4
XML format.
The current display settings of the maintenance items are output in XML format by
storing the file in a specified directory.
1 To output the display switch settings of the maintenance items, follow the
procedure below:
2 <1> Create the following directory.

%APPDATA%\MTB\Maintenance\Settings\backup
3
<2> Create a blank XML file named "MainteShowSettings.xml" and store it in the
directory created in Step 1.
4
<3> Start the Maintenance Manager application.
5 The current display switch settings of the maintenance items are output to the
XML file created in Step 2. Then a time stamp is added to the file name.
6
• For details about the file, see "2.6.2.5 Maintenance items display switch
 configuration file".
• The output is not performed every time you start the Maintenance Manager
7 MEMO
application, as the file name is changed when output is successfully done.
8
2.6.2.5 Maintenance items display switch configuration file
A1 2.6.2.5
The maintenance items display switch configuration file is used for the
maintenance items display switch function.
As the switch conditions of the maintenance items display state, describe various
A2 informations between <mainteshowsettings> and </mainteshowsettings>.
The following shows a description example of an XML file. In this example, the
maintenance item name "test", Path 1, and G1000 are set, and the maintenance
Z item will be displayed when the bit-1 PMC signal state is ON.
<mainteshowsettings>
<items>
<item>
<itemname> test</itemname>
<checktype>1</checktype>
<checkcond>1,G1000.1</checkcond>
<showmode>1</showmode>
</item>
</items>
</mainteshowsettings>
170
B-64647EN/01
 • Create a maintenance items display switch configuration file using the Unicode.
MEMO
1
 Tags included between <mainteshowsettings> and
</mainteshowsettings>
Table 2.6.2.5 (a) List of Tags for Maintenance Item Information
2
XML tag Requi Child Description
red element 3
<items> ○ <item> Maintenance item information group. Describe information
about each maintenance item in the <item> tag.
4
 Tags included between <item> and </item>
Table 2.6.2.5 (b) List of tags for information for each maintenance item
5
XML tag Req Child Description
uired element 6
<itemname> ○ None In English, describe the name of a maintenance item
whose display state you want to switch. You may enter
up to 127 characters for the name. 7
<checktype> × None Describe a determination method to switch the display
state.
Describe a numeric value described in "■ Display state 8
switch determination methods".
If this is not defined, no determination to switch the
display state will be made. A1
<checkcond> × None Describe conditions to switch the display state.
Describe a format according to the determination
method described in "■ Display state switch
determination methods".
A2
If this is not defined, no determination to switch the
display state will be made.
Z
<showmode> × None Set whether to display or hide the item when the
specified PMC is ON
Set 0 (hide) or 1 (display).
If this is not defined, it is taken as 1 (display).
171
B-64647EN/01
 Display state switch determination methods

Table 2.6.2.5 (c) List of display state switch determination methods
How to <checktype> <checkcond>
determine
1 the state
PMC 1 "A,BCCCC.D"
signal (bit) A: Integer of 1 or more
2 B: G, F, X, Y, A, R, T, K, C, D, M, N, E, or Z (regardless of
upper case or lower case letters)
CCCC: Integer from 0 to 9999 (It may be zero filled such as
3 "0001".)
D: Integer from 0 to 9
4  Symbol description
To use the following symbols between the tags, use a replacement character
5 string between the tags.
6 Table 2.6.2.5 (d) List of symbols to be replaced

Replacem Usage example
Target ent Before replacement After replacement
symbol Character
7 string
& & <itemname>Machine0&1 <itemname>Machine0&1
</itemname> </itemname>
8 < < <itemname>Machine<0> <itemname>Machine<0>
</itemname> </itemname>
A1
A2
Z
172
B-64647EN/01
2.7　SETTING UP THE UTILITY APPLICATION
2.7
2.7 SETTING UP THE UTILITY APPLICA-

TION
You can set up the utility application functions such as the manual viewer function, 1
Web browser function, etc.
2
2.7.1 Setting Up the Manual Viewer Function 3
2.7.1
Various settings of the manual list screen are made with the import function.
The manual information configuration file to import and the folder structure are as
follows. 4
2.7.1.1 Manual information configuration file 5
The manual information configuration file (ManualInfo.xml) has description about
2.7.1.1
information required to display the manual list screen.

Describe manual and category information between <manualinfo> and  6
</manualinfo>.
Describe manual information between <manuals> and </manuals> and category
information between <categories> and </categories>.
A description example of ManualInfo.xml is as follows:
7
8
A1
A2
Z
173
B-64647EN/01

<manualinfo>
<manuals>
<manual protect = "1">
<name> MAINTENANCE MANUAL </name>
1 <category> FANUC Series 30i-MODEL B,Series 31i-MODEL B,Series 32i-MODEL B </

category>
<image>iconImage.sgv</image>
<lang>
2 <ja>
<caption> FANUC Series 30i-MODEL B,Series 31i-MODEL B,Series 32i-MODEL B 保守説明
書 </caption>
<file>B-64485JA_02.pdf </file>
3 </ja>
<en>
<caption> FANUC Series 30i-MODEL B,Series 31i-MODEL B,Series 32i-MODEL B
MAINTENANCE MANUAL </caption>
4 <file>B-64485EN_02.pdf </file>
</en>
</lang>
</manual>
5 <manual>
(...)
6
</manuals>
<categories>
<category>
<name>FANUC Series 30i-MODEL B,Series 31i-MODEL B,Series 32i-MODEL B</name>
<lang>
7 <ja>
<caption>FANUC Series 30i-MODEL B,Series 31i-MODEL B,Series 32i-MODEL B</caption>
</ja>
<en>
8 <caption>FANUC Series 30i-MODEL B,Series 31i-MODEL B,Series 32i-MODEL B</caption>
</en>
</lang>
A1 </category>
<category>
(...)
</categories>
A2 </manualinfo>
2.7.1.2 Manual viewer tag list

Z 2.7.1.2
Tags and descriptions included in the manual information configuration file

(ManualInfo.xml) are as follows:
 Tags included between <manuals> and </manuals>

Table 2.7.1.2 (a) List of Tags for Manual Information
ired element
<manual> ○ <name><cat Describe information related to one manual. You can
egory><ima set the protect (delete protection) attribute.
ge><lang> 1 does not allow you to delete the manual.
0 or no description allows you to delete the manual.
174
B-64647EN/01

ired element
<name> ○ None Manual identifier ID. Describe a unique character
string. If you set <name> that is already registered,
the imported information will overwrite the current
information. 1
<category> × None Manual category. Describe the category identifier ID.
If no description is set, the manual is not
categorized. 2
<image> × None Describe the icon image file name.
<lang> ○
If no description is set, the preset image is used.
<[language] Describe information about each language in the
3
> <[language]> tag.
English (<en>) is required.
If a language that is not included in the <lang> tag is 4
set to the display language, information described in
English (<en>) is displayed.
<[language]> ○ <caption> Describe information related to one display 5
<file> language.
<caption> ○ None Describe a title to be displayed on the manual list
screen. 6
If a line is broken, it is also shown broken on the
manual list screen.
<file> ○ None Describe the manual file name.
7
A pdf or txt file name must include the extension.
For a html file, describe the name of a folder
containing index.html. 8
 Tags included between <categories> and </categories> A1
Table 2.7.1.2 (b) List of Tags for Manual Information
XML tag Req
uired
Child
element
Description A2
<category> ○ <name> Describe information related to one category.
<lang> Z
<name> ○ None Category identifier ID. Describe a unique character
string.
<lang> ○ <[language] Describe information about each language in the
> <[language]> tag.
English (<en>) is required.
If a language that is not included in the <lang> tag is
set to the display language, information described
in English (<en>) is displayed.
<[language]> ○ <caption> Describe information related to one display
language.
<caption> ○ None Describe the category name.
175
B-64647EN/01
 Languages Used in the <[language]> Tag

Table 2.7.1.2 (c) Language List
<[language]> Language <[language]> Language <[language]> Language
Tag name Tag name Tag name
1 <en> English <da> Danish <bg> Bulgarian
<ja> Japanese <pt> Portuguese <ro> Romanian
2 <de>
<fr>
German
French
<pl>
<hu>
Polish
Hungarian
<sk>
<fi>
Slovak
Finnish
<zh-CHT> Traditional <sv> Swedish <vi> Vietnamese
3 Chinese
<it> Italian <cs> Czech <id> Indonesian
<ko> Korean <zh-CHS> Simplified <sl> Slovene
4 Chinese
<es> Spanish <ru> Russian
5 <nl> Dutch <tr> Turkish
6  Manual Information Added during Import

If a manual file or folder that is not included in the manual information
configuration file (ManualInfo.xml) is imported, the following information is added:
7 Table 2.7.1.2 (d) Manual Information Added during Import

XML tag Information
8 <name> [Manual file name (folder name for html format)]
<category> Not specified
A1 <image> Not specified

<lang> English
<caption> [Manual file name (folder name for html format)]
A2 <file> [Manual file name (folder name for html format)]
Z  Symbol description
To use the following symbols between the tags, use a replacement character
string between the tags.
Table 2.7.1.2 (e) List of symbols to be replaced

symbol Character
string
& & <itemname>Machine0&1</ <itemname>Machine0&1</
itemname> itemname>
176
B-64647EN/01

symbol Character
string
< < <itemname>Machine<0></
itemname>
<itemname>Machine<0></
itemname> 1
2.7.1.3 Import folder configuration 2

2.7.1.3
• Place manual files (*.pdf, *.txt) and the manual information configuration file
(ManualInfo.xml) under the import folder. 3
For a text file, save it in the UTF-16 (other than Big Endian without BOM)
character code and import it.
• For manual files (*.html), store a set of files including index.html in a folder and
4
place the folder under the import folder. The folder containing a set of html files
is to be imported.
5
• For icon image files (png, bmp, svg), store them under the image folder and
place the folder under the import folder.
The following example shows a configuration with the Manual folder in an external 6
device specified as the import folder.
External
B- pdf file (*.pdf)
7
device Manual 64484E
A_02.pdf
Manuals
B-64485
JA_02.txt
Text file (*.txt)
html file A1
B-64490 index (*.html)
JA_05 .html * Set of files
including index.html A2
Manual information
Manual
Info.xml configuration file Z
(ManualInfo.xml)
Icon image file (*.png,

Images *.png *.bmp, *.svg)
Fig. 2.7.1.3 Import Folder Configuration Example
177
B-64647EN/01
2.7.1.4 Naming rules for manual file update

If the following naming rules are met when a manual without the manual
2.7.1.4
information configuration file (ManualInfo.xml) is imported, the manual file or

folder can be updated during import without deleting the older version.
1  Naming rules
• A file or folder must have the manual name and the version (two-digit number)
2 connected with "_" (underscore).
• The version of a file or folder to be imported must be higher than that of the
3 original file or folder.
For files: For folders:

4
AAAAA_BB. xxx AAAAA_BB
5 Manual
name
Version 
(two-digit number)
Manual
name
Version 
(two-digit number)
6
● For pdf or text files
Current manual Manual to be imported

7
FANUC Series 30i- FANUC Series 30i-
MODEL B, Series MODEL B, Series
8 31i-MODEL B, Import 31i-MODEL B,
Series 32i-MODEL
Series 32i-MODEL
B Lathe B Lathe
A1 OPERATOR'S
MANUAL
OPERATOR'S
MANUAL
Version 1 Version 2
A2 B-64484EN-1_01.pdf B-64484EN-1_02.pdf
The manual is updated because it is regarded as the same.

Z
178
B-64647EN/01
● For html manuals
Current manual Manual to be imported
FANUC Series 30i-MODEL B,

Series 31i-MODEL B, Series
Import FANUC Series 30i-MODEL B,
Series 31i-MODEL B, Series 1
32i-MODEL B 32i-MODEL B
Machining Center Machining Center
OPERATOR'S MANUAL
Version 3
OPERATOR'S MANUAL
Version 2
2
B-64484EN-2_03 (folder) B-64484EN-2_02 (folder)
3
The manual is not updated because it is the same but has a lower version.
4
2.7.2 Setting Up the Web Browser Function 5

2.7.2
The Web browser configuration file (browserinfo.xml), an XML format file,

describes the URL of the start page.
The Web browser configuration file is stored in the following folder:
6
%APPDATA%\USER\Browser\browserinfo.xml
7
2.7.2.1 Description of the Web browser configuration file
2.7.2.1
The description in each <startpage> tag is the information of each start page.
8
<browserinfo>
<startpage>
A1
<name>default</name>
<url>http://xxxxxxxxxx</url>
</startpage>
<startpage>
A2
<name>mtlinki</name>
Z
<url>http://yyyyyyyyyy</url>
</startpage>
<startpage>
<name>zzz</name>
<url>http://zzzzzzzzz</url>
</startpage>
</browserinfo>
</xml>
Table 2.7.2.1 Description of the Web Browser Configuration File

XML tag Description
<name> ID (Set not to be duplicated, up to 63 characters)
<url> Start page URL
179
B-64647EN/01
 • Only ID=default and ID=mtlinki are defined by default in browserinfo.xml.

MEMO
1
2.7.2.2 Setting the start page
2 To set the start page, change the application definition file (apps-general.xml) as
2.7.2.2
follows:
3 <1> Edit apps-general.xml to add the web browser icon.
4 <2> Specify the ID defined in browserinfo.xml in the <subject> tag of the web
browser icon.
5  • Ifdisplayed.
ID is not specified, the start page defined in ID=default in browserinfo.xml is
6 MEMO
7
8
A1
A2
Z
180
B-64647EN/01
2.8　CREATING PROGRAM STORAGE FILES
2.8
2.8 CREATING PROGRAM STORAGE

FILES
The large-capacity memory program operation function allows you to perform 1
automatic operation with the programs stored in a program storage file
(Ncprog.bin) on the PANEL iH Pro.
2
 • This function can only be used when the "large-capacity memory program
operation function" option is used. 3
MEMO
4
2.8.1 Program Storage Files
2.8.1
The program storage file is a file that stores folders and programs that can be
accessed directly from the iHMI CNC. 5
• Maximum size of a program storage file: 40 GB
• Maximum size per program: 2 GB 6
• Maximum number of folders and programs that can be stored: total of 1000 (for
folders and programs combined)
7
8
2.8.2 Creating a Program Storage File (Ncprog.bin)
2.8.2
Create a program storage file with an machine manufacturer application using any A1
one of the equipment and tools.
• PANEL iH Pro
A2
• Program storage file editing tool that runs on a commercially available PC
(Fbinbuild.exe)
• Program storage file edit library (Ncprog.dll)
Z
2.8.3 Program Storage File Edit Library (Ncprog.dll)

2.8.3
The program storage file edit library (Ncprog.dll) is a group of functions, where
program storage file editing tool functions are made into a library so that a
program storage file (Ncprog.bin) can be created or edited from an machine
manufacturer application.
181
B-64647EN/01
The following files are included in the folders "win32" (32-bit version) and "x64"
(64-bit version) of the folder "Ncprog\Ncprogdll\" in the FOCAS2 library of the CNC
Application Development Kit (A08B-9010-J555#ZZ12).
• Ncprog.dll (program storage file edit library)
1 • Ncprog.lib (import library)

• Ncprog.h (header file for C language)
2
 •• The program storage file edit library contains 32- and 64-bit versions.
You can simultaneously execute the functions of the program storage file edit
3 MEMO library from multiple threads.
4 Table 2.8.3 Function List

No. Function name Function description
5 1 fbin_create Creates a new program storage file

(asynchronous function).
×
6 2
3
fbin_open
fbin_close
Opens a program storage file.
Closes a program storage file.


4 fbin_expansion Expands a program storage file (asynchronous ×
function).
7 5 fbin_get_current_folder Obtains a current folder name. 
6 fbin_set_current_folder Changes a current folder. 
8 7
8
fbin_create_program
fbin_delete_program
Creates a program in the current folder.
Deletes a program from the current folder.
×
×
9 fbin_rename_program Change a program name in the current folder. ×
A1 10 fbin_create_folder Creates a sub folder in the current folder. ×
11 fbin_delete_folder Deletes a sub folder from the current folder. ×
A2 12
13
fbin_rename_folder
fbin_information
Changes a sub folder name in the current folder.
Obtains the information of a program storage file.
×

14 fbin_findfirst Starts search for folder/program information. 
Z 15 fbin_findnext Continues search for folder/program information. 
16 fbin_findclose Closes the find handle. 
17 fbin_open_program Opens a program. 
18 fbin_close_program Closes a program. 
19 fbin_get_program_entry Obtains a program entry number. 
20 fbin_seek Moves a program pointer. 
21 fbin_tell Obtains a program pointer. 
22 fbin_read Reads a program. 
23 fbin_write Writes a program. (1) -
24 fbin_write2 Writes a program. (2) -
25 fbin_flash_program Updates program write information. -
182
B-64647EN/01
No. Function name Function description

26 fbin_condense Arranges a program storage file (asynchronous -
function).
27 fbin_get_progress Obtains the progress rate of the asynchronous 
28 fbin_get_state
function.
Obtains the progress state of the asynchronous 
1
function.
29 fbin_cancel Aborts processing of the asynchronous function.  2
: Indicates a function that can be safely used when the program storage file
(PC_MEM device) is selected in the NC.
-: Indicates a function that can be used when the program storage file 3
(PC_MEM device) is selected in the CNC, but requires attention.
×: Indicates a function that cannot be used when the program storage file
(PC_MEM device) is selected in the CNC. 4
• Even if the contents of the program storage file (PC_MEM device) is

5
changed using this library when this file is selected in the CNC, this
change cannot be judged on the CNC side. Avoid using write-related
functions when the program storage file is selected in the CNC. 6
Otherwise, the workpiece that is being machined may be broken,
possibly leading to damage to the machine.
If you unavoidably need to use them, use them in a state that does not 7
interfere with the operation by, for example, deselecting corresponding
programs on the CNC side, and always sufficiently check the operation.
• To use the program storage file edit library (Ncprog.dll) when the
program storage file (PC_MEM device) is selected in the CNC, always
8
WARNING sufficiently check the safety by using FOCAS2 functions, etc.
You can check the CNC state and set the program operation/no edit
settings with the FOCAS2 functions below:
A1
- cnc_pdf_rdmain: Obtains main program information.
- cnc_statinfo2: Reads CNC status information. (2)
- cnc_setpdf_pglock: Sets program operation/no edit settings. A2
- cnc_mcdp_mountchk: Checks the device selection state of a program 
storage file.
- pmc_rdpmcrng: Reads PMC arbitrary data (range specification). Z
- pmc_wrpmcrng: Writes PMC arbitrary data (range specification).
183
B-64647EN/01
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
A1
A2
Z
184
3
CREATING A USER 1
APPLICATION 2
3
4
5
This chapter describes how to create the machine manufacturer's unique
application and add it.
A
3.1 OVERVIEW OF CREATING A USER APPLICATION ........................ 186
3.2 HOW TO CREATE A USER APPLICATION ....................................... 188
3.3 CUSTOMIZING A SCREEN WITH FANUC PICTURE ......................... 196
B-64647EN/01
CHAPTER 3 CREATING A USER APPLICATION 
3.1　OVERVIEW OF CREATING A USER APPLICATION
3.1
3.1 OVERVIEW OF CREATING A USER

APPLICATION
1 The iHMI allows you to add an application (user application) created by the
machine manufacturer to the Home screen. This chapter describes how to create
2 a user application and how to add it to the iHMI.
3  • For the partial customization of the iHMI Home screen, see " Chapter 2
SETTING UP iHMI APPLICATIONS ".
MEMO
4
5
3.1.1 Adding an Application to the iHMI
6 3.1.1
To add a user application to the iHMI Home screen, the following data needs to be
created.
7 Data to create Notes

User application
Icon image file Image created with a general painting tool (png, bmp, svg)
8 Application definition file Information such as an application name and Home screen
position
A1 FANUC designated format (For details, see "2.2.1 Application

Definition File".)
A2 Add an application by creating data on the PC and transferring it to the CNC via a
USB flash drive.
Data transferring
User application (exe, dll, etc.)
Icon image file (bmp, jpg, etc.)
Icon displayed on the Home
Home image definition file
Execute the application from
(FANUC designated text format)
the Home
186
B-64647EN/01
3.1　OVERVIEW OF CREATING A USER APPLICATION
3.1.2 User Application

3.1.2
There are two ways to create a user application.
• Using a general development tool (Visual Studio)

• Using FANUC PICTURE (FANUC's unique CNC screen creation tool)
1
Each has the following features.
2
Visual Studio FANUC PICTURE
Features Creates a complex application using Creates a screen quickly by pasting 3
C/C++, C#, and Visual Basic. Allows screen parts. Allows creation of a
free screen creation. screen that meets the iHMI screen
specifications. 4
Library Windows API Screen parts such as a button and
FOCAS2 library lamp
C/C++ standard library FOCAS2 library (subset) 5
.NET Framework Arithmetic operation
Purpose Complex screen development, such Relatively easy development of a
as the machine manufacturer's screen, such as a machine 6
unique program edit screen or operator's panel screen or
animation parameter setting screen
Screen 7
example
8
A1
A2
Select an appropriate tool to be used according to the application purposes.
Before creating an application, see "1.1.2 Environment Required for iHMI
Customization" to check if the required environment is provided. Z
187
B-64647EN/01
3.2　HOW TO CREATE A USER APPLICATION
3.2
3.2 HOW TO CREATE A USER APPLICA-

TION
1 This section describes how to create a user application using a general
development tool (Visual Studio) and how to use the iHMI library.
2
3.2.1 Overview of Creating an Application

3 3.2.1
You can create an iHMI user application in an environment as described in "1.1.2

Environment Required for iHMI Customization". For how to build an environment,
4 see the document supplied with the SDK.
You can use the iHMI library, FOCAS2 library, or a general library as necessary.
Section 3.2.2 and subsequent sections describe how to create a user application
5 using the iHMI library.
By editing the application definition file, you can add a created application to the
iHMI Home screen.
6
• Before using a general library, the machine manufacturer must fully verify its
7  operation.
• For details about the FOCAS2 library, see the dedicated manual.
MEMO • For details about the application definition file, see "2.2.1 Application Definition
8 File".
A1
A2 3.2.2 Using the iHMI Library
3.2.2
In the iHMI, the iHMI library is available for the user application to interact with the
iHMI. Using the iHMI library allows the following operations.
Z
• Overlapping the user application with the iHMI application
• Starting a specific application from the user application
• Displaying a specific screen when starting the user application
 •• For details about the iHMI library, see the SDK.

To perform the above operations, you need to register an application as a client
MEMO to Application Manager.
188
B-64647EN/01
3.2.2.1 Application Manager

Application Manager is an application to manage the screen switching settings
3.2.2.1
and language settings for iHMI applications. The iHMI library is used to use the
screen switching function and iHMI setting information of Application Manager. 1
To use an iHMI library API, you need to register it as a client to Application
Manager. Client registration requires to use the RegisterClient function in the iHMI 2
library in the user application and change the application definition file.
3
 •• Some APIs in the iHMI library can be used without client registration.
MEMO
For details about the RegisterClient function, see the function specifications.
4
5
#include "../cncappclient/cncappclient.h" Include the header file
:
LRESULT CALLBACK WndProc(HWND hWnd, UINT message, WPARAM wParam, LPARAM lParam)
{
6
switch (message) {
7
case WM_CREATE:
StartAppClient();
Start client process
RegisterClient(_T("AppTest"), WM_USER + 0x100, hWnd) ;
break;
Register client
case WM_USER + 0x100:
switch (wParam) { Put the same value 8
case APP_SHUTDOWN:
DestroyWindow(hWnd);
}
break;
A1
break;
: End client process
case WM_DESTROY:
EndAppClient(); A2
PostQuitMessage(0);
break;
default:
return DefWindowProc(hWnd, message, wParam, lParam);
Z
}
return 0;
}
:
189
B-64647EN/01
 Description example of the application definition file

When the RegisterClient function is used, specify "waitregister" in the <entry> tag
option in addition to the general definition.
1 <entry option="waitregister">
<name>AppTest</name>
2 <caption>
<en>Main Application</en>
<ja> メインアプリケーション </ja>
</caption>
<file>%APPPATH%\AppPrimary\AppPrimary.exe</file>
3 <image>%APPPATH%\Resources\Undefined.svg</image>
</entry>
4 3.2.2.2 Overlapping the user application with the iHMI application

In the iHMI, you can overlap the user application with the iHMI application.
3.2.2.2
5
6
7
8
A1 The following shows an example of displaying the user application in full screen
and the iHMI in the 15-inch size at the lower right on the 19-inch display unit. It
also adds an icon representing the user application to the Home screen and
A2 switches between displaying the entire user application and overlapping it with the
iHMI.
Z  Description example of the user application

Set the user application to be active when it is started from the Home screen and
inactive when another application is running.
 The SetWindowLong function is Win32API. For details, see the MSDN website.
MEMO
190
B-64647EN/01
#include "../cncappclient/cncappclient.h"
:
{
switch (message) {
case WM_CREATE: 1
StartAppClient();
RegisterClient(_T("AppTest"), WM_USER + 0x100, hWnd);
break;
case WM_USER + 0x100: Change the style not to 2
switch (wParam) { activate the application during
case APP_ACTIVATED:
activation
SetWindowLong(hWnd, GWL_EXSTYLE,
GetWindowLong(hWnd, GWL_EXSTYLE) | WS_EX_NOACTIVATE); 3
break;
case APP_DEACTIVATED:
SetWindowLong(hWnd, GWL_EXSTYLE,
GetWindowLong(hWnd, GWL_EXSTYLE) & ~WS_EX_NOACTIVATE);
4
break;
case APP_SHUTDOWN: Change the style
break;
back during 5
}
deactivation
break;
:
case WM_DESTROY:
6
EndAppClient();
PostQuitMessage(0);
break;
default:
7
8
}
return 0;
}
:
A1
Specify "alwaysvisible" in the <entry> tag option in addition to the general
definition. A2
<entry option="alwaysvisible, waitregister">
<name>AppTest</name> Z
<caption>
<en>Main Application</en>
<ja> メインアプリケーション </ja>
</caption>
<image>%APPPATH%\Resources\Undefined.svg</image>
</entry>
191
B-64647EN/01
 Description example of the iHMI whole configuration file

The display position and size of an iHMI application can be changed in the iHMI
whole configuration file. (For details about the iHMI whole configuration file, see
"2.2.2 iHMI Whole Configuration File".)
1 <settings>
:
2 <display>
<inchx10>150</inchx10>
<x>256</x>
<y>256</y>
</display>
3 </settings>
4 3.2.2.3 Starting a specific application from the user application

You can start a specific application from the user application. In addition, the CNC
3.2.2.3
operation screen or maintenance display can be started with a specific screen

5 displayed.
6 The following shows an example of pressing a button on the user application to

display the program display screen of the maintenance display and the program
manager slide of the CNC operation screen.
7  Description example of the user application

To start a specific application, start it using the ExecuteApp function.
Specify the application ID you want to start in the first argument and the screen
8 switching ID in the second argument.
A1
 • For the screen switching ID for the CNC operation screen and the maintenance
display, see the Appendix.
MEMO • For details about the ExecuteApp function, see the function specifications.
A2
Z
192
B-64647EN/01
#include "../cncappclient/cncappclient.h"
:
{
HWND hButton1, hButton2;
static bool pending = false; 1
switch (message) {
case WM_CREATE:
StartAppClient();
RegisterClient(_T("AppTest"), WM_USER + 0x100, hWnd); 2
hButton1 = CreateWindow(TEXT("BUTTON"), TEXT("SDF(Program)"), WS_CHILD |
WS_VISIBLE, 10, 10, 200, 23, hWnd, (HMENU)100, hInst, NULL);
hButton2 = CreateWindow(TEXT("BUTTON"), TEXT("NC(Program Slide)"), WS_CHILD | 3
WS_VISIBLE, 235, 10, 200, 23, hWnd, (HMENU)200, hInst, NULL);
break;
case WM_USER + 0x100:
switch (wParam) {
4
case APP_SHUTDOWN:
DestroyWindow(hWnd); Process when the
break;
case COMMAND_COMPLETED:
application is started up 5
pending = false;
break;
}
break; Start the application
6
case WM_COMMAND: screen by pressing the
switch (LOWORD(wParam)) {
case 100:
if (!pending) {
button
7
if (!ExecuteApp(_T("SDF"), _T("0101"))) {
8
if (IsExecutionPending()) {
pending = true;
}
}
}
break; A1
case 200:
if (!pending) {
if (!ExecuteApp(_T("CNCOPERA"), _T("open,ProgMgrSld"))) {
if (IsExecutionPending()) { A2
pending = true;
}
}
}
Z
break;
}
break;
:
case WM_DESTROY:
EndAppClient();
PostQuitMessage(0);
break;
default:
}
return 0;
}
193
B-64647EN/01
3.2.2.4 Displaying a specific screen when starting the user application

By using the screen switching ID specified in the second argument of the
3.2.2.4
ExecuteApp function, you can change the application behavior (Example: Display
a specific screen of the user application).
1 The following shows an example of setting an icon to display Screen A and

Screen B of the user application on the Home screen.
2
 Description example of the user application
The screen switching ID can be obtained by the GetSubject function. If the screen
3 switching ID is changed, you will be notified of APP_SUBJECT_CHANGED. (For
details about the GetSubject function, see the function specifications.)
4 #include "../cncappclient/cncappclient.h"
:
{
5 switch (message) {
case WM_CREATE:
StartAppClient();
6 RegisterClient(_T("AppTest"), WM_USER + 0x100, hWnd);
break;
case WM_USER + 0x100: Change notification of
switch (wParam) { screen switching ID
case APP_SUBJECT_CHANGED:
7 If(GetSubject() == _T("SCREENA")) {
//Describe a process of displaying Screen A.
Screen switching ID
} else if (GetSubject() == _T("SCREENB")) {

//Describe a process of displaying Screen B.
8 }
InvalidateRect(hWnd, NULL, TRUE);
break;
A1
case APP_SHUTDOWN:
break;
}
A2 :
break;
case WM_DESTROY:
EndAppClient();
Z PostQuitMessage(0);
break;
default:
}
return 0;
}
:

To set an icon to display Screen A and Screen B of the user application on the
Home screen, specify the screen switching ID set in the <subject> tag in the user
application in addition to the general definition.
194
B-64647EN/01
<entry option="waitregister">
<caption>
<en>Main Application (Screen A)</en>
<ja> メインアプリケーション（画面 A）</ja> 1
</caption>
<subject>SCREENA</subject>
2
</entry>
<entry option="waitregister">
3
<caption>
<en>Main Application (Screen B)</en>
<ja> メインアプリケーション（画面 B）</ja>
</caption>
4
5
<subject>SCREENB</subject>
</entry>
6
7
8
A1
A2
Z
195
B-64647EN/01
3.3　CUSTOMIZING A SCREEN WITH FANUC PICTURE
3.3
3.3 CUSTOMIZING A SCREEN WITH

FANUC PICTURE
1 A screen customized for MTB can be created using FANUC PICTURE.
2
 • For details about FANUC PICTURE, see "FANUC PICTURE OPERATOR'S
MANUAL" (B-66284).
MEMO
3
4
3.3.1 Creating a New Operator's Panel Screen
5 3.3.1
 Customizing a screen
6 Customize a screen for MTB according to the following steps.
<1> Start FANUC PICTURE for iHMI.
7
<2> Select [File] > [Project] > [New] from the menu bar.
8 <3> Enter a folder to create a project and project name and then click the <OK>
button.
A1 The [Setting of Project] dialog box appears.
<4> Select a resolution from the [Resolution] combo box and then click the <OK>
A2 button.
196
B-64647EN/01
<5> Select [File] > [Screen] > [New] from the menu bar.
The edit screen appears.
<6> Arrange control and create an operator's panel screen.

1
<7> Select [Project] > [Make MEM File] from the menu bar.
2
<8> Click the <OK> button to create a MEM file.
When a MEM file has been created, a message box will be displayed.
3
 Transferring screen data to the display unit
<1> Select [Project] > [Output MEM File] from the menu bar. 4
<2> Enter a name of the path to the external device (USB flash drive, memory card,
etc.) in [Transfer to] and enable [The FP driver is transferred].
5
<3> Click the <OK> button. 6
A "FANUC PICTURE" folder will be created at the destination.
<4> Insert the external device (USB flash drive, memory card, etc.) specified in the
7
step 3 to the display unit and execute "FANUC PICTURE\installer.bat" on the
external device. 8
 Registering with the Home screen
<1> Open the Home screen configuration file "apps-general.xml" using a text editor.
A1
The application definition file (apps-general.xml) is stored in the iHMI data folder
(%APPDATA%folder). A2
Z
• The text editor used for editing should support the character code described as
shown below in the first line of "apps-general.xml".

MEMO <?xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-16"?>
Character code
197
B-64647EN/01
<2> Add an <entry> tag to "apps-general.xml" as shown below.

Insert it before </apps> at the end of the file in alignment with the <entry> tags
used to define another application.
1 <?xml version="1.0" encoding="UTF-16"?>

<apps home="MainMenu" info="AppMgr">
<entry>
2 :
</entry> <entry> tags of another application
<entry>
:
</entry>
3 Describe the following <entry> tag for FANUC PICTURE.

</apps>
4 Added contents are as follows. A delimiter "\" for the folder should be a single-byte
character.
5 For PANEL iH Pro
6 <entry>
<name>AppFP</name>
<caption>
<en>FANUC PICTURE</en>
7
</caption>
<file>D:\FANUC_PICTURE\FPDriverApp.exe</file>
<current>D:\FANUC_PICTURE</current>
8 </entry>
For PANEL iH
A1 <entry>
<name>AppFP</name>
A2 <caption>
<en>FANUC PICTURE</en>
</caption>
<file>\storage card2\FANUC_PICTURE\FPDriverApp.exe</file>
Z <image>%APPPATH%\Resources\Undefined.svg</image>
<current>\storage card2\FANUC_PICTURE</current>
</entry>
The following table shows details about each tag.
Table 3.3.1 Details of Tags

XML tag Description
<name> Specify "AppFP".
<category> A category whose icon is displayed on the Home screen.
Specify Planning, Machining, Improvement or Utility.
198
B-64647EN/01
XML tag Description

<caption> An application name displayed on the Home screen. Specify
arbitrarily.
<en>: English name, <ja>: Japanese name
<file>
<current>
Describe a FP driver location.
This is a destination of soft copy by installer.bat.
1
<image> Describe an absolute path of the icon file (png, bmp, svg)
displayed on the Home screen.
Specify arbitrarily.
2
3
Incorrect description of apps-general.xml may prevent exit of the iHMI loading
screen and display of the Home screen. In this case, correct apps-general.xml
according to the following steps. 4

<1> Turn off the display unit power.
<2> Turn on the power again while pressing "6" and "7" of the MDI unit together.
NOTE The Windows desktop screen appears. At this point, ignore the NCBOOT32 5
screen.
<3> Correct apps-general.xml using a text editor and save it.
<4> Turn on the display unit power again. 6
 Displaying a customized screen 7

<1> Start iHMI.
When iHMI is running already, restart it. 8
<2> Press the icon registered in the step 2 in "■ Registering with the Home screen".
The created operator's panel screen appears.
A1
A2
 • You can also add a shortcut definition to the configuration file (apps-
general.xml) and start the application via the shortcut. For the setting
MEMO method, see "2.2.1.2 Starting iHMI applications from shortcuts".
Z
3.3.2 Changing an Operator's Panel Screen

3.3.2
To change a created operator's panel screen, follow the steps below.
<1> Start FANUC PICTURE for iHMI.
199
B-64647EN/01
<2> Select [File] > [Project] > [Open] from the menu bar and select a project to edit.
<3> Edit the operator's panel screen.
1 <4> Select [Project] > [Make MEM File] from the menu bar.
2 <5> Click the <OK> button to create a MEM file.

When a MEM file has been created, a message box will be displayed.
3 <6> Select [Project] > [Output MEM File] from the menu bar.
4 <7> Enter a name of the path to the external device (USB flash drive, memory card,
etc.) in [Transfer to].
5 <8> Click the <OK> button.
6 A "FANUC PICTURE" folder will be created at the destination.
<9> Insert the external device (USB flash drive, memory card, etc.) to the display
unit while it is turned off.
7
<10>Start the display unit and press the icon for the operator's panel of the Home
8 screen.
<11>When the following dialog box appears, click [Yes].

A1
A2
Z
200
B-64647EN/01
3.3.3 Simultaneous Display with Another Application

3.3.3
iHMI can display a customized screen of FANUC PICTURE simultaneously with

the Home screen or another application.
1
2
3
4
Outer area (solid line): Customized screen
Inner area (dashed line): CNC operation screen (placed at front) 5
Create a screen according to the following steps.
6
<1> Customize a screen using FANUC PICTURE.
For how to customize a screen, see "3.3.1 Creating a New Operator's Panel
Screen".
7
<2> Copy "Data\screen_setting.xml" in the installation folder to the following folder 8
of the display unit.
For PANEL iH: Storage
Card2\FANUC_PICTURE\OPRATOR_SCREEN_001\data\ A1
For PANEL iH Pro: D:\FANUC_PICTURE\OPRATOR_SCREEN_001\data
<3> Add and change the codes shown in shading in the customized screen setting
A2
section in the Home screen configuration file "apps-general.xml" and save the
addition and change.
Z
<apps home="AppFP">
:
<entry option="waitregister,alwaysvisible,lockpos">
<name>AppFP</name>
:
<subject>App</subject>
</entry>
201
B-64647EN/01
<4> Copy the <entry> tag changed in the step 3 and paste it to the preceding part.
<apps home="AppFP">
:
1 <name>AppFP</name>
:
</entry>
2 <entry option="waitregister,alwaysvisible,lockpos">
<name>AppFP</name>
Copy
:
</entry>
3
<5> Add "nomenu" to the option attribute of the copied <entry> tag and delete the
value of the <subject> tag.
4
<apps home="AppFP">
:
5 <entry option="nomenu,waitregister,alwaysvisible,lockpos">
<name>AppFP</name>
:
6 <subject></subject>
</entry>
<name>AppFP</name>
:
7 <subject>App</subject>
</entry>
8 <6> Add and change the codes shown in shading in the Home screen setting
section in the Home screen configuration file "apps-general.xml" and save the
addition and change.
A1
<entry option="startup,waitregister">
A2 <name>MainMenu</name>
:
</entry>
Z <7> Add and change the following codes shown in shading in the Home screen
configuration file "settings-general.xml" and save the addition and change.
202
B-64647EN/01
Table 3.3.3 (a) Contents of the Configuration File

File contents Element Value
"NN": Section to change name
<settings> inchx10 Application layout
:
<display position="dynamic">
104: 10.4 inches
150: 15 inches
1
<inchx10>NN</inchx10>
190: 19 inches
<x>NN</x>
<y>NN</y>
</display>
x Initial application display
position: X coordinate
2
</settings>
y Initial application display
position: Y coordinate 3
<8> When the Home screen has been started already, restart it. 4
Subsequently, the customized screen is displayed on the back of the Home
screen and the application started from the Home screen.
5
To change the customized screen, follow the steps below to update.
<1> Save a MEM file created after changing the screen with FANUC PICTURE in 6
an external device (USB flash drive, memory card, etc.).
See "3.3.1 Creating a New Operator's Panel Screen".
7
<2> Insert the external device (USB flash drive, memory card, etc.) to the display
unit while it is turned off. 8
<3> Start the display unit and press the icon for the operator's panel of the Home
screen.
A1
<4> When the following dialog box appears, click [Yes]. A2

Z

NOTE
Key input to a customized screen displayed on the back is unavailable.
203
B-64647EN/01
 Changing the screen display position

Use the following FP function to change the position of the application displayed
simultaneously with a customized screen.
1 Table 3.3.3 (b) FP Function

Item Description
2 Function name setfrontpos[x_y]
Data type None
Argument x: X coordinate after change
3 y: Y coordinate after change
4  • For how to use the FP function, see "FANUC PICTURE OPERATOR'S

MANUAL" (B-66284).
MEMO
5
6
7
8
A1
A2
Z
204
4
1
MAINTENENCE 2
3
4
5
This chapter describes how to back up/restore data and replace the software.
A
4.1 DATA BACKUP/RESTORE ................................................................. 206
4.2 AUTOMATIC DATA BACKUP ............................................................... 216
4.3 HOW TO UPDATE THE SOFTWARE .................................................. 220
B-64647EN/01
CHAPTER 4 MAINTENENCE 
4.1　DATA BACKUP/RESTORE
4.1
4.1 DATA BACKUP/RESTORE

You can use the iHMI batch backup function to save all data files created with the
1 iHMI function and general data created by the machine manufacturer or users to
an external device (USB flash drive, memory card, etc.), as well as to perform
restore from saved data.
2
3 Storage device  iHMI batch Backup external

(CF/HD/SSD) backup function device (USB flash
4 • iHMI application data
• Machine manufacturer
Backup process
Restore
drive, memory card,
etc.)
application data process
5 • End user data
6 Although you can select any file but system program files of the operating system
and application for data used in the iHMI batch backup function, based on the
allowable size and runtime for the backup process, the followings are considered
as data that can be backed up.
7
Data type Description
8 iHMI data • Database (data logger, maintenance management information,

tool management function, etc.)
• Setting data files (setting data for the Home screen and
A1 application, etc.)
• Data files (calendar data, memo data, etc.)
Machine • Machine setting data
A2 manufacturer data •
•
Machine manufacturer application data
Operation manual
• Help
Z User data • NC data

• General data
206
B-64647EN/01
4.1.1 Starting the Backup Screen

4.1.1
You can start the operation screen for the iHMI backup function using the following
methods:
For the CNC device with the MDI keyboard (HSSB connection)
1
<1> Power on the CNC device while pressing down the MDI keys <6> and <7>
simultaneously.
Keep the keys pressed down for five seconds. 2
The NCBOOT32 screen appears.
<2> Select the iHMI tab.

3
The operation screen for the batch backup function will be displayed.
For the CNC device without the MDI keyboard

4
<1> Power on the device.
5
<2> Double-click the NCBOOT32 icon on the taskbar.
The NCBOOT32 screen appears. 6
<3> Press the [Setting] soft key.
7
<4> Select the Boot Option tab.
8
<5> From the list of connected CNCs, select the check box for the target device and
press the [OK] soft key.
A1
<6> Power off and then on the device.
The NCBOOT32 screen appears. A2
<7> Select the iHMI tab. Z
The operation screen for the batch backup function will be displayed.
207
B-64647EN/01
1
2
3
4  Batch backup screen
When you start the backup screen, the batch backup screen is displayed.
5
6
D
E
7 F
A G
8 H
B I
A1 C J
K
A2
Z Table 4.1.1 (a) Description of the Batch Backup Screen
Name Description
A Data list Displays individual lists of data to be backed up in a batch.
Name: Displays the names of the individual lists.
File Path: Displays the file paths of the individual lists.
Result: Displays the results of executing [Backup all] or
[Restore all] as "OK" or "NG".
B List name Displays the name of the list currently displayed.
C Progress bar Displays the progress of the [Backup all] or [Restore all] process.
D Backup all Executes batch backup. Execution results will be recorded to the
log file.
208
B-64647EN/01
Name Description
E Restore all Executes batch restore from data that was backed up in a batch.
Execution results will be recorded to the log file.
F Extract Expands and displays the content of all individual files currently
displayed. For details, see the next section "■Individual backup
screen".
1
G Select Expands and displays the content of the individual file selected.
H Add
For details, see the next section "■Individual backup screen".
Additionally registers the individual lists to the list. You can also
2
specify a new list (new file).
I Delete Deletes the individual lists that are selected from the list. 3
J Import List Reads in the backup list from the data backed up in a batch and
replaces it with the current list.
K View Log Displays the details of the execution results (contents of the log 4
file) of [Backup all] or [Restore all].
5
 Individual backup screen
When you press the [Extract] soft key in the batch backup screen, the contents of
all lists are expanded and displayed. 6
Also, when you select an individual list in the batch backup screen and press the
[Select] soft key, the contents of that individual list are expanded and displayed.
In the individual backup screen, you can save and restore data in the list either in 7
a batch or individually.
8
D
E
A1
F
A
A2
G
H
Z
B I
C J
209
B-64647EN/01
Table 4.1.1 (b) Description of the Individual Backup Screen

Name Description
A Data list Displays lists of data to be backed up in a batch.
Name: Displays the name of the data.
1 File Path: Displays the file path of the data.
Result: Displays the results of executing [Backup all] or
[Restore all] as "OK" or "NG".
2 B List name Displays the name of the list currently displayed.
C Progress bar Displays the progress of the [Backup all] or [Restore all] process.
D Backup all Executes batch backup of data in the list.
3 E Restore all Executes batch restore of the data in the list from the data that
was backed up in a batch.
F Backup one Executes backup of only the data selected in the list.
4 G Restore one Executes restore of backed up data for only the data selected in
the list.
5 H Add Additionally registers data to the list. You can specify with a file
name or folder.
6 I Delete
J Back
Deletes the selected data from the list.
Returns to the previous batch backup screen.
7  Backup data lists

The batch backup target data lists are the following text files that are stored in the
iHMI data folder "Fanuc\iHMI\System".
8
Table 4.1.1 (c) Backup Data Lists
A1 File name
AllBackup.bkl
Description
Lists the following individual list files.
iHMIbackup.bkl Individual list for iHMI system data.
A2 MTBbackup.bkl Individual list for MTB data.
UserBackup.bkl Individual list for user data.
Z
The data format is as follows. List and define the name and file path of the data.
If you specify a folder, all files including sub folders under the specified folder will
be backed up.
List name (maximum 30 characters)

Data name/list name (maximum 30 characters), file path
...
210
B-64647EN/01
Example: Contents of AllBackup.bkl (when using PANEL iH Pro)

All backup list files
iHMI data list,%APPDATA%\system\iHMIbackup.bkl
MTB data list,%APPDATA%\system\MTBbackup.bkl
User data list,%APPDATA%\system\UserBackup.bkl 1
Data created with the iHMI basic functions will be registered in "iHMIbackup.bkl"
(default). 2
 Adding data
To data to each list, perform the following: 3
<1> In the individual backup screen, press the [Add] soft key. 4
<2> Enter the name and file path.
5
6
7
Press the [File] soft key to specify a file or the [Folder] soft key to specify a
8
folder. The file selection dialog appears where you can select the folder or file
from the displayed list.
Note that, if you omit the name, the name at the end of the file path will be
A1
automatically selected.
A2
<3> Press the [OK] soft key.
The data is registered to the list.
Z
 Deleting data
To delete data from the list, select the data from the list and press the [Delete] soft
key.
211
B-64647EN/01
4.1.2 Saving Data in a Batch

4.1.2
This function allows you to batch save data in the list displayed on the batch
backup screen into an external device (USB flash drive, memory card, etc.)
1 <1> In the batch backup screen, press the [Backup all] soft key.
The file selection dialog box appears.
2
3
4
5
6
7 <2> Specify the destination folder to save "AllBackup.bkl" to.

The save process starts, the contents of the list will be expanded, and the
8 results will be displayed in the [Result] column one by one as the process
completes.
Data that was successfully saved will be indicated as "OK"; "NG" will be
A1 displayed if the save process was not successful.
When the data save process is completed for all lists, the screen returns to the
original screen with the results of each list displayed.
A2
Z  ToDisplaying
display the results in detail, press the [View Log] soft key. See ""4.1.6
the Details of Batch Save and Restore Results"".
MEMO
212
B-64647EN/01
4.1.3 Restoring Data in a Batch

4.1.3
4.1.4
This function allows you to batch restore data in the list displayed on the batch
backup screen from an external device (USB flash drive, memory card, etc.)
<1> To use a list stored in an external device instead of the current list, press the 1
[Import List] soft key in the batch backup screen.
2
<2> Specify a folder storing the list (AllBackup.bkl).
3
<3> In the batch backup screen, press the [Restore all] soft key.
4
<4> Specify a folder storing the data (AllBackup.bkl).
The data restore process starts, the contents of the list will be expanded, and
the results will be displayed in the [Result] column one by one as the process 5
completes.
Data that was successfully restored will be indicated as "OK"; "NG" will be
displayed if the restore process was not successful. 6
When the data restore process is completed for all lists, the screen returns to
the original screen with the results of each list displayed.
7
 To display the results in detail, press the [View Log] soft key. See ""4.1.6 8
MEMO
Displaying the Details of Batch Save and Restore Results"".
A1
A2
Z
213
B-64647EN/01
4.1.4 Saving Data Individually

4.1.5
This function allows you to save one data in the list displayed on the individual
backup screen into an external device (USB flash drive, memory card, etc.)
1 <1> In the individual backup screen, select one data from the list.
2 <2> Press the [Backup one] soft key.

3 <3> Specify the destination folder.

Data save starts.
The results will be displayed in the [Result] column. Data that was successfully
4 saved will be indicated as "OK"; "NG" will be displayed if the save process was
not successful.
5
6 4.1.5
4.1.6
Restoring Data Individually
This function allows you to restore one data in the list displayed on the individual
backup screen from an external device (USB flash drive, memory card, etc.)
7 <1> In the individual backup screen, select one data from the list.
8 <2> Press the [Restore one] soft key.

A1
<3> Specify a folder storing the data.
Data restoration starts.
A2 The results will be displayed in the [Result] column. Data that was successfully
restored will be indicated as "OK"; "NG" will be displayed if the restore process
was not successful.
Z
4.1.6 Displaying the Details of Batch Save and Restore

Results
4.1.7
When you execute batch save or batch restore, the results of the last executed
process will be recorded to the log file.
Batch save results: "Fanuc\iHMI\System\BackupLog.txt"

Batch restore results: "Fanuc\iHMI\System\RestoreLog.txt"
214
B-64647EN/01
The data format is as follows.
Data name, file path, results ("OK"/"NG")

Data name, file path, results ("OK"/"NG")
...
Data name, file path, results ("OK"/"NG") 1
Name of list that includes the above data, file path, overall results ("OK"/"NG")
Logged execution results for the second and subsequent lists (in the same way as
above) will follow. 2
To display the contents of the log, press the [View Log] soft key in the batch
backup screen. 3
4
5
6
7
8
A1
A2
Z
215
B-64647EN/01
4.2　AUTOMATIC DATA BACKUP
4.2
4.2 AUTOMATIC DATA BACKUP

You can automatically back up data retained in FROM/SRAM of the CNC to
1 FROM, which does not require a battery, and restore it when necessary. This
allows you to easily recover CNC data when it is lost due to an unexpected
contingency, such as a dead battery. You can also set the parameter to retain up
2 to past three backup data. Therefore, CNC data can be switched immediately to
the state after machine adjustment or any backup state.
3 SRAM (requiring a battery)
Backup All SRAM data such as

4 parameters and offset data
5 FROM (requiring no
6 NC program, directory
information
7 Backup data 1
Backup data 2
8 Restore
Backup data 3
A1
A2
 For details about automatic data backup, see "5.3 AUTOMATIC DATA BACKUP"
in "FANUC Series 30i/31i/32i-MODEL B MAINTENANCE MANUAL" (B-64485-
Z MEMO EN).
216
B-64647EN/01
4.2.1 Backing Up to External Memory

4.2.1
Back up SRAM data and user files of the CNC to external memory.
<1> Start the CNC.

<2> Press the <SYSTEM> key.
1
On the system screen that appears, check the following parameters:
• Parameter (No.20) = 4 (or 17) 2
• Parameter MDP (No.138#0) = 1
• Parameter BOP (No.313#0) = 1 3
4
 Set the parameter (No.20) to "4" when using a memory card or "17" when using a
USB flash drive.
MEMO
5
<3> Connect a USB flash drive or memory card to the CNC.
<4> Press the [All I/O] soft key and then [All Data] soft key.
6
The output all data screen appears.
7
 When you press the [All I/O] soft key and then [F Output] soft key, the CNC 8
parameters are output to text data.
MEMO
A1
<5> Switch to EDIT mode.
<6> Press the [Operation] soft key and then [F Output] soft key.
<7> Press the [Execute] soft key.
A2
Text data is output. When it is completed, NC data output signal ALLO will be
set to "0". Z
 For the Series 30i-MODEL B iHMI, you can output data in the "Maintenance
Display" application.
MEMO
<8> Turn off the CNC.

Do it with the USB flash drive inserted.
217
B-64647EN/01
<9> Turn on the CNC again.

<10>When the CNC starts up, SRAM data and user files are output.
1 4.2.1.1
4.2.1.1
List of output text data
When you output data from the CNC, the following text data are saved to the
2 memory:
Table 4.2.1.1 List of Output Text Data
3 Tool Offset
Data type File name
TOOLOFST.TXT
Parameter CNC_PARA.TXT
4 PMC parameter PMC(path
number)_PRM.TXT
PMC parameter (dual check safety) PMCS_PRM.TXT
5 Program ALL-FLDR.TXT
6 Pitch error compensation amount

Custom macro variable
PITCH.TXT
MACRO.TXT
Workpiece origin offset amount EXT_WKZ.TXT
M code group data MC-GROUP.TXT
7 Operator history OPRT_HIS.TXT
Maintenance: Maintenance information MAINTINF.TXT
8 Periodic maintenance: Periodic maintenance data

2nd geometry tool offset
MAINTENA.TXT
SEC_GEOM.TXT
3D compensation data COMP3D.TXT
A1 Rotary Table Dynamic Fixture Offset FIXTURE.TXT
Real-time custom macro variable RTMMACRO.TXT
A2 System Configuration
PMC signal protect
SYS-CONF.TXT
DIDOENBL.TXT
Tool management: Mount history data TLATAHIS.TXT
Z Tool management: Removal history data TLDTAHIS.TXT
Servo spindle information SV_SP_ID.TXT
Tool geometry data (Turret interference check) TOOL-FRM.TXT
Periodic maintenance: Machine system name data MAINTEMC.TXT
P code macro variable PCODE.TXT
Tool geometry dimension data TOOLSIZE.TXT
CNC ID information CNCIDNUM.TXT
Customer's board CSTM_BD.TXT
Operator history signal selection data OHIS_SIG.TXT
Fine torque sensing torque data FNTRQSNS.TXT
3D interference check data 3D-INTER.TXT
218
B-64647EN/01
Data type File name

System alarm history SYS_ALM.TXT
3D rotary error compensation CMP3DROT.TXT
Tool management: All tool management data AL_TLMGR.TXT
Tool management: All customized data AL_TLCSM.TXT 1
Tool life management data TOOLLIFE.TXT
5-axis machine configuration select function
Network setting information
MACHCON.TXT
NETWORK.MEM
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
A1
A2
Z
219
B-64647EN/01
4.3　HOW TO UPDATE THE SOFTWARE
4.3
4.3 HOW TO UPDATE THE SOFTWARE

This appendix describes how to update the i HMI basic function software for the
1 PANEL iH and PANEL iH Pro.

The software type is different depending on the display unit specifications as
follows:
2 PANEL iH: A02B-0323-Hxxx (Integrated LCD D), A13B-0201-Bxxx (Separate
LCD D)
PANEL iH Pro: A08B-0090-Hxxx
3
4.3.1 Preparation
4 4.3.1
Prepare the installation disk and media and check the iHMI version and whether
EWF is enabled/disabled.
5
Table 4.3.1 Items to Be Prepared
6 Item Description
iHMI Disk A02B-0207-K777
The iHMI Disk has the following folder structure:
<WES>: iHMI installer for the PANEL iH Pro
7 <WEC>: iHMI installer for the PANEL iH
Installation media PANEL iH
8 ATA memory card formatted in FAT16

Capacity: 1 or 2 GB
Number of memory cards: One for version 8.0 or later or
two for versions earlier than 8.0
A1 PANEL iH Pro
USB-DVD drive, or USB flash drive to which the WES
folder of the iHMI Disk is copied
A2 Data backup media 1 GB or larger USB flash drive or memory card
Z
4.3.1.1 Checking the iHMI version
Check the current iHMI version.
4.3.1.1
<1> Press the MDI menu key to display the iHMI Home screen.
<2> Press [SETTING].
<3> Press [System Information].
<4> Press [Display Version].
220
B-64647EN/01
4.3.1.2 Checking whether the EWF is enabled/disabled (for PANEL iH Pro

only)
For the PANEL iH Pro, check whether the EWF is currently enabled/disabled.
4.3.1.2
 The EWF is the write protection function for C drive. 1

MEMO
2
<1> Right-click the hardware monitor (F mark) icon on the taskbar and select
[EWF]. 3
4
5
6
<2> Check if the status of [Current EWF protection] is [DISABLE] or [ENABLE].
[ENABLE] indicates that it is enabled. 7
8
A1
A2
Z
<3> Press [Close].
221
B-64647EN/01
4.3.2 Updating the iHMI Basic Software for the PANEL iH

4.3.2
Update the iHMI Basic Software for the PANEL iH as follows:
Back up iHMI data.
1
Install iHMI.
2
Restore iHMI data.
3 4.3.2.1 Folder configuration

The PANEL iH installer consists of the following two folders:
4.3.2.1
4 <WEC\SYSTEM>: iHMI software

<WEC\DATA>: iHMI data
5 4.3.2.2 Backing up iHMI data
6 Back up iHMI data of the PANEL iH.

4.3.2.2
 • For details, see "4.1 DATA BACKUP/RESTORE".

7 MEMO
8  When the iHMI data batch backup function is available (for iHMI version
3.0 or later)
A1 <1> Turn on the PANEL iH while holding down the <6> and <7> MDI keys.
<2> Release the keys when Windows starts up.
A2 After Windows starts up, the NCBOOT32 window opens.

<3> Select the [iHMI] tab.
<4> Insert a USB flash drive or memory card for backup.
Z <5> Press [Backup all].
Backup starts.
 If a dialog box appears for you to select where to save the data, select the
destination folder (USB flash drive or memory card).
MEMO
When the backup is completed, the backup results are listed. If all the lines
show "OK", the data has been successfully backed up.
222
B-64647EN/01
 When the iHMI data batch backup function is not available (for iHMI
versions earlier than 3.0)
<1> Turn on the PANEL iH while holding down the <6> and <7> MDI keys.
After Windows starts up, the NCBOOT32 window opens. 1
<3> Press the <Ctrl> and <Esc> MDI keys and select [Run] from the start menu.
<4> Enter "EXPLORER" to start Windows Explorer. 2
<5> Copy the files in the DATA folder (%APPDATA%) to an ATA memory card
(Storage Card3) or USB flash drive (Hard Disk).
3
Installing the iHMI
4.3.2.3
4.3.2.3
Install the iHMI software.

4
 For iHMI version 7.2 or earlier 5
Install the iHMI software and iHMI data individually.
<1> Copy all the files and folders in the SYSTEM folder to an empty memory card.
6
<2> Insert the ATA memory card storing the copied files into the PCMCIA slot of the
CNC. 7
<3> Turn on the CNC.
The installer automatically starts up, and installation starts.
8
<4> When the completion message appears, restart the PANEL iH.
A1
A2
Z
223
B-64647EN/01
<5> Copy all the files and folders in the DATA folder to an empty memory card.
<6> Insert the ATA memory card storing the copied files into the PCMCIA slot of the
CNC.
<7> Turn on the CNC.
1 The installer automatically starts up.
<8> Press [Start].
2 Installation starts.
3
4
5
6
7
8  For iHMI version 8.0 or later
Install the iHMI software and iHMI data at the same time.
A1 <1> Copy all the files and folders in the SYSTEM folder to an empty memory card.
<2> Copy all the files and folders in the DATA folder to an empty memory card.
A2 <3> Insert the memory card storing the copied files into the PCMCIA slot of the
CNC.
Z <4> Turn on the CNC.

The installer automatically starts up, and installation starts.
224
B-64647EN/01
1
2
3
4
4.3.2.4 Restoring backed-up iHMI data

5
Restore backed-up iHMI data to the DATA folder.
4.3.2.4
6
• For details, see "4.1 DATA BACKUP/RESTORE".
• Restoring data erases the standard settings. To use the original standard 7
 settings, do not restore data.
• To use the original standard settings on the Home screen, such as when
MEMO
evaluating a new function, delete apps-general.xml from the data folder
(\Storage Card2\FANUC\iHMI) after restoration.
8
A1
 When the iHMI data batch backup function is available (for iHMI version
3.0 or later)
<1> Turn on the PANEL iH while holding down the <6> and <7> MDI keys. A2
After Windows starts up, the NCBOOT32 window opens. Z
<4> Insert a USB flash drive or memory card for backup.
<5> Press [Restore all].
iHMI data restoration starts.
 Ifdestination
a dialog box appears for you to select where to save the data, select the
folder (USB flash drive or memory card).
MEMO
225
B-64647EN/01
When the iHMI restoration is completed, the restoration results are listed. If all
the lines show "OK", the data has been successfully restored.
1 versions earlier than 3.0)

<1> Turn on the PANEL iH while holding down the <6> and <7> MDI keys.
2 <2> Release the keys when Windows starts up.
After Windows starts up, the NCBOOT32 window opens.
<3> Press the <Ctrl> and <Esc> MDI keys and select [Run] from the start menu.
3 <4> Enter "EXPLORER" to start Windows Explorer.
<5> Copy the files backed up to the ATA memory card or USB flash drive to the
4 DATA folder (%APPDATA%).
5 4.3.3 Updating the iHMI Basic Software for the PANEL iH

6 4.3.3
Pro
Update the iHMI Basic Software for the PANEL iH Pro as follows:
Back up iHMI data.

7
Disable EWF (if enabled).
8
Uninstall iHMI data.
A1 Install iHMI data.
A2 Restore iHMI data.
Enable EWF.
Z
4.3.3.1 Backing up iHMI data
Back up iHMI data of the PANEL iH Pro.
4.3.3.1
 • For details, see "4.1 DATA BACKUP/RESTORE".

MEMO
226
B-64647EN/01
3.0 or later)
<1> Turn on the PANEL iH Pro while holding down the <6> and <7> MDI keys.
<4> Insert a USB flash drive or memory card for backup. 2
<5> Press [Backup all].
Backup starts.
3
 Ifdestination
folder (USB flash drive or memory card). 4
MEMO
When the backup is completed, the backup results are listed. If all the lines
5
show "OK", the data has been successfully backed up.
6
7
<3> Press the <Ctrl> and <Esc> MDI keys and select [Computer] from the start
menu to start Windows Explorer.
A1
<4> Copy the files in the DATA folder to an ATA memory card or USB flash drive.
The DATA folder location is as follows:
%APPDATA% A2
4.3.3.2 Disabling the EWF Z
Disable the EWF if it is enabled.
4.3.3.2
[EWF].
<2> Press [Disable EWF protection].
<3> Press [Close].
<4> Restart the PANEL iH Pro.
227
B-64647EN/01
4.3.3.3 Uninstalling the iHMI

Uninstall the iHMI software.
4.3.3.3
<1> Run [Programs and Features] from the Control Panel.

1 <2> Select [iHMI] and press [Uninstall].
Software uninstallation starts. Follow the instructions on the screen.
2
 Ifis any files are left in the folder [%APPPATH%], delete all of them. This operation
normally not necessary. However, if files are not deleted because they are
3 MEMO protected, you need to delete them manually.
4 <3> Restart the PANEL iH Pro.
5 4.3.3.4 Installing the iHMI

Install the iHMI software.
4.3.3.4
6
 Ifinsert
a DVD drive is not available, copy the installer folder to a USB flash drive and
it.
MEMO
7
<1> Mount the iHMI Disk.
8 <2> Double-click "iHMI.msi" in the installer folder under WES.
The installer starts up, and installation starts. Follow the instructions on the
A1 screen.
<3> When the completion message appears, run "Add\Update.exe".
A2
4.3.3.5 Restoring backed-up iHMI data
Restore backed-up iHMI data to the DATA folder.
4.3.3.5
Z
• For details, see "4.1 DATA BACKUP/RESTORE".
• Restoring data erases the standard settings. To use the original standard
settings, do not restore data.
 • To use the original standard settings on the Home screen, such as when
evaluating a new function, delete apps-general.xml from the following data
MEMO
folder after restoration:
For PANEL iH Pro (SSD): D:\FANUC\iHMI
For PANEL iH Pro (HDD): C:\ProgramData\FANUC\iHMI
228
B-64647EN/01
3.0 or later)
<4> Insert a USB flash drive or memory card for backup. 2
<5> Press [Restore all].
iHMI data restoration starts.
3
 Ifdestination
folder (USB flash drive or memory card). 4
MEMO
When the iHMI restoration is completed, the restoration results are listed. If all
5
the lines show "OK", the data has been successfully restored.
6
7
<3> Press the <Ctrl> and <Esc> MDI keys and select [Computer] from the start
menu to start Windows Explorer.
A1
<4> Copy the files backed up to the ATA memory card or USB flash drive to the
DATA folder.
The DATA folder location is as follows: A2
%APPDATA%
<5> Restart the PANEL iH Pro.
Z
4.3.3.6 Enabling the EWF
Enable the EWF.
4.3.3.6
After Windows starts up, the NCBOOT32 window opens.
229
B-64647EN/01
[EWF].
<4> Press [Enable EWF protection].
<5> Press [Close].
1 <6> Restart the PANEL iH Pro.
3
4
5
6
7
8
A1
A2
Z
230
5
1
PARAMETERS 2
3
4
5
5.1
5.2
PARAMETERS TO DISABLE EDITING OF PROGRAMS .................. 233
PARAMETER OF SUBPROGRAM CALLS .......................................... 238
A
5.3 PARAMETER OF PROGRAM PROTECTION KEYS ........................... 239
5.4 PARAMETERS TO DISABLE EDITING IN THE AUTOMATIC
OPERATION STOP STATE .................................................................. 240
5.5 PARAMETER TO CHANGE THE NUMBER OF DIGITS FOR PROGRAM
NUMBERS............................................................................................ 242
5.6 PARAMETER TO SELECT A DEVICE ................................................. 243
5.7 PARAMETERS OF THE TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FUNCTION ............ 244
5.8 PARAMETERS OF THE MACHINING SIMULATION FUNCTION ....... 247
5.9 PARAMETERS OF THE CURRENT POSITION/REMAINING TRAVEL
DISTANCE DISPLAY TILES ................................................................. 251
5.10 PARAMETERS OF SERVO LOAD METER DISPLAY ......................... 264
5.11 PARAMETERS OF MODAL INFORMATION DISPLAY........................ 266
5.12 PARAMETERS OF MACHINING INFORMATION DISPLAY................ 282
5.13 PARAMETER TO DISPLAY FEEDRATE INFORMATION .................... 287
5.14 PARAMETERS OF SPINDLE INFORMATION DISPLAY ..................... 291
5.15 PARAMETERS OF MACHINING PROGRAM DISPLAY ...................... 298
5.16 PARAMETER OF N NUMBER SEARCH IN A MACHINING PROGRAM
.............................................................................................................. 304
5.17 PARAMETERS OF SEQUENCE NUMBER STOP............................... 305
5.18 PARAMETERS OF THE CUSTOM MACRO VARIABLE LIST SLIDE.. 306
5.19 PARAMETERS OF THE MACHINE COLLISION AVOIDANCE
FUNCTION ........................................................................................... 308
B-64647EN/01
CHAPTER 5 PARAMETERS 
　
This manual describes all parameters indicated in this manual.

For those parameters that are not indicated in this manual and other parameters,
refer to the parameter manual.
1 A parameter that is valid with only one of the path control types for the lathe
system (T series) and machining center system (M series) is indicated in the
2 upper or lower row as described below. A blank represents an unusable
parameter.
[Example 1] The parameter HTG is common to the T series and M series, and
3 RTV and ROC are parameters used with the T series only.
3 
NOTE
#7
RTV
#6 #5
HTG
#4
ROC
#3 #2 #1 #0
T series
1403
HTG M series
5 [Example 2] The following parameter is used with the M series only.
6 1411
T series
Cutting feedrate M series
7
8
A1
A2
Z
232
B-64647EN/01
5.1　PARAMETERS TO DISABLE EDITING OF PROGRAMS
5.1
5.1 PARAMETERS TO DISABLE EDIT-

ING OF PROGRAMS
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
1
3202 PSR NE9 NE8
2
[Input type] : Parameter input
[Data type] : Bit path
3
# 0 NE8 Specify whether or not to disable the editing of programs with
program numbers O8000 to O8999.
0: Enable. 3
1: Disable.
When this parameter is set to "1", the following editing operations 5

are disabled:
- Program deletion (Even when deletion of all programs is
specified, programs with program numbers 8000 to 99999999 6
are not deleted.)
- Program output (Even when outputting all programs is specified,
programs with program numbers 8000 to 99999999 are not 7
output.)
- Program number search
- Program editing of registered programs 8
- Program registration
- Program comparison
- Displaying programs
A1
The parameter setting does not affect the following programs:

A2

NOTE
• Programs on the data server
• Programs for running and editing memory card programs on the
Z
memory card
# 4 NE9 Specify whether or not to disable the editing of programs with

0: Enable.
1: Disable.
When this parameter is set to "1", the following editing operations

are disabled:
233
B-64647EN/01

specified, programs with program numbers 9000 to 99999999
are not deleted.)
programs with program numbers 9000 to 99999999 are not
1 output.)
2 - Program editing of registered programs
3 - Displaying programs
3 The parameter setting does not affect the following programs:

NOTE
5 memory card
6 # 6 PSR Specify whether or not to enable the search for the program
number of a protected program.
0: Disable.
7 1: Enable.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
8 3204 P9E P8E

A1 [Data type] : Bit path
# 3 P8E Specify whether or not to disable the editing of programs with

A2 program numbers O80000000 to O89999999.
0: Enable.
1: Disable.
Z
are disabled:
specified, programs with program numbers 80000000 to
99999999 are not deleted.)
output.)
- Program editing of registered programs
234
B-64647EN/01

1

NOTE
memory card
2
# 4 P9E Specify whether or not to disable the editing of programs with
3
0: Enable.
1: Disable.
3
are disabled:
5
specified, programs with program numbers 90000000 to
99999999 are not deleted.)
6
output.) 7
- Program editing of registered programs
- Program registration 8
A1
A2

NOTE
memory card
Z
3210 Program protection (PSW)
[Input type] : Locked parameter

[Data type] : 2-word common
[Valid data range]: 0 to 99999999
This parameter sets a password for protecting program Nos. 9000

to 9999. When a value other than zero is set in this parameter and
this value differs from the keyword set in parameter No. 3211, bit 4
(NE9) of parameter No. 3202 for protecting program Nos. 9000 to
235
B-64647EN/01
9999 is automatically set to 1. This disables the editing of program

Nos. 9000 to 9999.
Until the value set as the password (parameter No. 3210) is set as
a keyword (parameter No. 3211), NE9 cannot be set to 0 and the
password cannot be modified.
1
2 3211 Program protection key (KEY)
3 [Data type] : 2-word common

3 When the value set as the password (set in parameter No. 3210) is
set in this parameter, the locked state is released, and the user can
now modify the password and the value set in bit 4 (NE9) of
5 parameter No. 3202.
6

NOTE
The value set in this parameter is not displayed. When the power
is turned off, this parameter is set to 0.
7
3220 Password (PSW)
8
A1 [Valid data range]: 0 to 99999999
This parameter sets a password (PSW). When a value other than 0

A2 is set, a password is set. When a password is set, a blank is
displayed in this parameter, and the state (locked state) where an
operation such as program editing is locked is set. When password
Z (PSW) = 0, namely, in the normal state, or when password (PSW) =
keyword (KEY), namely, in the unlocked state, this parameter can
be set.
3221 Keyword (KEY)

When the same value as the password (PSW) is set in this

parameter, the lock is released (unlocked state).
236
B-64647EN/01
The value set in this parameter is not displayed.

The value of this parameter is initialized to 0 automatically when the
power is turned on. So, if the power is turned off in the unlocked
state and then turned on again, the locked state is automatically
set.
1
3222 Program protection range (minimum value) (PMIN) 2
3
3
3223 Program protection range (maximum value) (PMAX)
[Input type] : Locked parameter 5

6
The programs in a range set here can be locked.
Set the minimum program number and maximum program number
of a desired range. Set these parameters to satisfy PMAX > PMIN. 7
These parameters can be set when password (PSW) = 0, namely,
in the normal state, or when password (PSW) = keyword (KEY),
namely in the unlocked state. 8
[Example]
Parameter (No. 3222) = 7000 A1
Parameter (No. 3223) = 8499
When the values above are set, the programs from O7000 to
O8499 can be locked.
A2
When PMIN = 0, the specification of PMIN = 9000 is assumed.
When PMAX = 0, the specification of PMAX = 9999 is assumed.
Z
So, when these parameters are set to the defaults, the programs
from O9000 to O9999 are locked.
237
B-64647EN/01
5.2　PARAMETER OF SUBPROGRAM CALLS
5.2
5.2 PARAMETER OF SUBPROGRAM

CALLS
1 #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
2 3233 CPD NE8

3 # 4 CPD Programs called by subprogram calls or macro calls are searched
as follows.
3 0: Search in the search target folder in the specified order.
1: Search in a folder with the specified path.
5
6
7
8
A1
A2
Z
238
B-64647EN/01
5.3　PARAMETER OF PROGRAM PROTECTION KEYS
5.3
5.3 PARAMETER OF PROGRAM PRO-

TECTION KEYS
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
1
3290 KEY
2
3
# 7 KEY Specify a memory protection signal used as a memory protection
key.
0: KEY1<Gn046.3>, KEY2<Gn046.4>, KEY3<Gn046.5>, 3
and KEY4<Gn046.6>.
1: KEY1<Gn046.3> only.
5
• The functions of the signals depend on whether KEY=0 or
KEY=1. 6
When KEY = 0:
•KEY1: Enables a tool offset amount, workpiece origin offset
amount, and workpiece coordinates shift amount to be
input.
7
•KEY2: Enables setting data, macro variables, and tool life
 management data to be input.

•KEY3: Enables program registration and editing.
8
NOTE •KEY4: Enables PMC data (counter and data table) to be
input.
When KEY = 1: A1
•KEY1: Enables program registration and editing, and
enables PMC data to be input.
•KEY2 to KEY4: Not used A2
• When a multi-path system is used, the setting for path 1 is
followed.
Z
239
B-64647EN/01
5.4　PARAMETERS TO DISABLE EDITING IN THE AUTOMATIC OPERATION STOP STATE
5.4
5.4 PARAMETERS TO DISABLE EDIT-

ING IN THE AUTOMATIC OPERATION
1 STOP STATE
2 #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
11330 RSC
3 [Input type]
[Data type]
: Parameter input
: Bit path
3 # 7 RSC Specify an action when you execute a cycle start after stopping the
program by a single block stop and editing it.
0: Restart automatic operation.
5 Program editing during a single-block stop on the MANUAL
GUIDE i screen: Disabled
6 1: Display a message that prompts you whether to allow the cycle
start and soft keys. Use a soft key to select an operation you
want to allow or not allow. Actions are different as follows.
- Allowed: When the cycle start is executed again, automatic
7 operation is restarted.
- Not Allowed: The cycle start is disabled.
Program editing during a single-block stop on the MANUAL
8 GUIDE i screen: Enabled
A1 13102
#7
EDT
#6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
A2 [Input type]
[Data type]
: Parameter input
: Bit path
Z

NOTE
When this parameter is set, the power must be turned off before
operation is continued.
# 7 EDT Specify whether or not to disable the editing of programs during

memory operation.
0: Enable.
1: Disable.
240
B-64647EN/01
5.4　PARAMETERS TO DISABLE EDITING IN THE AUTOMATIC OPERATION STOP STATE
1 When 0 is set, during memory operation, you can stop the

program by a single block stop or feed hold, select the EDIT
mode, and edit the program.
When the main program is running:
1
- The same edit functions as used for ordinary editing can be
used.
When a subprogram is running: 2
 - Only the word-unit edit function can be used.
- Any program called from DNC or MDI operation cannot be
NOTE
edited. 3
- Only the program can be edited.
2 Before restarting memory operation, take extreme caution to
return the cursor to the position before stopping the program. If 3
you want to execute the program from other than the cursor
position when stopped, be sure to reset the machine before
executing the program. 5
6
7
8
A1
A2
Z
241
B-64647EN/01
5.5　PARAMETER TO CHANGE THE NUMBER OF DIGITS FOR PROGRAM NUMBERS
5.5
5.5 PARAMETER TO CHANGE THE NUM-

BER OF DIGITS FOR PROGRAM
1 NUMBERS
2 #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
11304 ON8
3 [Input type]
[Data type]
: Parameter input
: Bit path
3
 When this parameter is set, the power must be turned off before
5 NOTE
6 # 3 ON8 Specify the number of digits of program numbers.

0: Four.
1: Eight.
7
• If program numbers are changed from eight digits to four digits,
8 all programs will be automatically deleted from program
memory.
• If this parameter is changed from 1 to 0 and the power is turned
A1 on, the following message appears on the IPL screen. For the

NOTE
Series 30i/31i/32i (with personal computer function with
Windows CE) and for the CNC screen display function, the
message appears on the IPL screen of NCBOOT32.exe. To
A2 delete them, enter 1. Otherwise, enter 0.
PARAMETER NO.11304#3 IS CHANGED.
ALL PROGRAM FILE MUST BE CLEARED.
Z CLEAR FILE OK ? (NO=0, YES=1)
242
B-64647EN/01
5.6　PARAMETER TO SELECT A DEVICE
5.6
5.6 PARAMETER TO SELECT A DEVICE

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
301 EPM 1
[Data type] : Bit system common 2
# 2 EPM Specify whether or not to use a program storage file for running
programs from the HDD/SSD. 3
0: Not use.
1: Use.
3
5
6
7
8
A1
A2
Z
243
B-64647EN/01
5.7　PARAMETERS OF THE TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FUNCTION
5.7
5.7 PARAMETERS OF THE TROUBLE

DIAGNOSIS FUNCTION
1 #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
2 8850 MDG

[Data type] : Bit
3 # 0 MDG Specify whether or not to disable the trouble diagnosis function.
0: Enable.
3 1: Disable.
5
6 NOTE
7 3141 Path name (1st character)
3142 Path name (2nd character)

8
3143 Path name (3rd character)
A1 3144 Path name (4th character)
A2 3145 Path name (5th character)
3146 Path name (6th character)

Z
3147 Path name (7th character)

[Data type] : Word path
[Valid data range]: See the character/code map.
Specify a path name with codes.
Any character string consisting of up to seven alphanumeric
characters, katakana characters, and special characters can be
displayed as a path name.
244
B-64647EN/01
• For the characters/codes, see "APPENDIX G CHARACTER-

TO-CODES CORRESPONDENCE TABLE" in "FANUC Series
30i/31i/32i-MODEL B Common to Lathe System/Machining
Center System OPERATOR'S MANUAL" (B-64484EN). 1
 • When 0 is set in parameter No. 3141, PATH1(,PATH2...) are
displayed as path names.
MEMO
• When optional path name display is enlarged (with bit 2 (PNE)
of parameter No. 11350 set to 1), only alphanumeric characters
2
are displayed. If any other type of characters is set, spaces are
displayed instead.
3
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 3
6301 EXM EXA
[Input type] : Parameter input 5

[Data type] : Bit machine group
# 0 EXA Specify an external alarm message specification. 6

0: Alarm numbers that can be sent are 0 to 999.
When displaying an alarm number, the CNC prefixes the
character string "EX" to the alarm number obtained by adding 7
1000 to the message number.
1: Alarm numbers that can be sent are 0 to 4095.
The CNC prefixes the character string "EX" to an alarm number
8
for display.
# 1 EXM Specify an external operator message specification.

A1
0: Alarm numbers that can be sent are 0 to 999.
- Message for numbers 0 to 99: Displayed together with its
number.
A2
The CNC adds 2000 to this number.
- Message for numbers 100 to 999: Displayed on the screen Z
without its number.
1: Alarm numbers that can be sent are 0 to 4095.
- Message for numbers 0 to 99: Displayed together with its
number.
The CNC prefixes the character string "EX" to a message
number for display.
- Message for numbers 100 to 4095: Displayed on the screen
without its number.
245
B-64647EN/01
6310 Setting for number addition to external operator messages
1 
NOTE
2
[Data type] : Word machine group
3 [Valid data range]: 0 to 4096
This parameter sets the number of messages to which message

3 numbers are to be prefixed in external operator message display.
When 0 is set, the same operation as when 100 is set is performed.
5 [Example] When 500 is set in this parameter, the messages of

message numbers 0 to 499 are displayed together with their
6 numbers on the screen. A message number of 500 and up is not
displayed on the screen, but only the corresponding message is
displayed on the screen.
7
8
A1
A2
Z
246
B-64647EN/01
5.8　PARAMETERS OF THE MACHINING SIMULATION FUNCTION
5.8
5.8 PARAMETERS OF THE MACHINING

SIMULATION FUNCTION
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
1
14702 SFA SFB SFC SFD SR1 SP1 SUB MT1
2
[Data type] : Bit system common
3
# 0 MT1
0: Vertical
1: Horizontal (left side of chuck) 3
# 1 SUB
0: Without sub-spindle 5
1: With sub-spindle
# 2 SP1 6
0: The C=0 position of the sub-spindle on turret 1 is the same as
that of the main spindle on turret 1.
1: The C=0 position of the sub-spindle on turret 1 is 180 degrees 7
away from that of the main spindle on turret 1.
# 3 SR1 8
0: The C-axis + direction of the sub-spindle on turret 1 is the same
as that of the main spindle on turret 1.
1: The C-axis + direction of the sub-spindle on turret 1 is opposite A1
to that of the main spindle on turret 1.
# 4 SFD
A2
0: When G266#5 (SFRD) is 0 and G266#4 (SRVD) is 1, it is
considered to be forward rotation.
When G266#5 (SFRD) is 1 and G266#4 (SRVD) is 0, it is
Z
considered to be reverse rotation.
1: When G266#5 (SFRD) is 1 and G266#4 (SRVD) is 0, it is
When G266#5 (SFRD) is 0 and G266#4 (SRVD) is 1, it is
# 5 SFC
0: When G204#5 (SFRC) is 0 and G204#4 (SRVC) is 1, it is
When G204#5 (SFRC) is 1 and G204#4 (SRVC) is 0, it is
247
B-64647EN/01
1: When G204#5 (SFRC) is 1 and G204#4 (SRVC) is 0, it is

When G204#5 (SFRC) is 0 and G204#4 (SRVC) is 1, it is
1 # 6 SFB
0: When G074#5 (SFRB) is 0 and G074#4 (SRVB) is 1, it is
2 considered to be forward rotation.
When G074#5 (SFRB) is 1 and G074#4 (SRVB) is 0, it is
3 1: When G074#5 (SFRB) is 1 and G074#4 (SRVB) is 0, it is

When G074#5 (SFRB) is 0 and G074#4 (SRVB) is 1, it is
3 considered to be reverse rotation.
# 7 SFA
5 0: When G070#5 (SFRA) is 0 and G070#4 (SRVA) is 1, it is
6 When G070#5 (SFRA) is 1 and G070#4 (SRVA) is 0, it is
1: When G070#5 (SFRA) is 1 and G070#4 (SRVA) is 0, it is
7 When G070#5 (SFRA) is 0 and G070#4 (SRVA) is 1, it is
8 14706 Directions of the axes of the machine
A1 [Input type]
[Data type]
: Parameter input
: Byte path
A2 When the dynamic graphic display function is used, the directions

of the axes of the machine (the orientations of the basic three axes
Z of the workpiece coordinate system for the main spindle) are

selected from the following and set in the parameter:
Setting 16: Right-handed coordinate system Right = +Z, up = +X
Setting 17: Right-handed coordinate system Right = -Z, up = +X
Setting 18: Right-handed coordinate system Right = -Z, up = -X
Setting 19: Right-handed coordinate system Right = +Z, up = -X
Setting 20: Right-handed coordinate system Right = +X, up = +Z
248
B-64647EN/01
Setting = 16 Setting = 17 Setting = 18

1
2
3
Setting = 19 Setting = 20
3
14707 Orientations of the basic three axes of spindle 2
14717 Axis number of C-axis in a simulation

5
[Data type] : Byte path
[Valid data range]: 0 to Number of controlled axes
7
Axis number of C-axis in a simulation
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 8
14788 SCP

A1
[Data type] : Bit system common
# 0 SCP Turret 1 is based on:

A2
0: (Conventional specification)
During polar coordinate interpolation in a machining simulation:
- Drawing is performed with C=0 set to coordinate value 0 of the
Z
virtual axis.
- The current position display of C-axis is a command value
(virtual orthogonal coordinates) + C-axis value (workpiece
coordinates) when starting polar coordinate interpolation.

C language executor function when the MANUAL GUIDE i is
enabled
- A value obtained during polar coordinate interpolation in
cnc_absolute_bg() is a C-axis value when starting polar
coordinate interpolation + virtual axis command value.
249
B-64647EN/01
- The end coordinate C-axis value after polar coordinate

interpolation in anm_rdsimuelm() is a coordinate value when
starting polar coordinate interpolation + polar coordinates.
Coordinate value last specified in the interpolation mode
1: (New specification)
1 During polar coordinate interpolation in a machining simulation:
- Drawing is performed with the C-axis position where G12.1
2 was specified set to coordinate value 0 of the virtual axis.
- The current position display of C-axis is a command value
(virtual orthogonal coordinates).
3 C language executor function when the MANUAL GUIDE i is

enabled
- A value obtained during polar coordinate interpolation in
3 cnc_absolute_bg() is a command value (virtual orthogonal
coordinates).
- The end coordinate C-axis value after polar coordinate
5 interpolation in anm_rdsimuelm() is a value converted into the
workpiece coordinate system.
6
7
8
A1
A2
Z
250
B-64647EN/01
5.9　PARAMETERS OF THE CURRENT POSITION/REMAINING TRAVEL DISTANCE DISPLAY TILES
5.9
5.9 PARAMETERS OF THE CURRENT

POSITION/REMAINING TRAVEL DIS-
TANCE DISPLAY TILES 1
5.9.1 Parameters to Display Axis Names 2

5.9.1
(1) Parameter No. 1020 to set the program axis name for each axis
3
1020 Program axis name for each axis

[Data type] : Byte axis
[Valid data range]: 65 to 67, 85 to 90
5
An axis name (axis name 1: parameter No. 1020) can be arbitrarily
selected from A, B, C, U, V, W, X, Y, and Z. (When G code system
A is used with the lathe system, however, U, V, and W are not 6
selectable.) When bit 0 (EEA) of parameter No. 1000 is set to 1, the
length of an axis name can be extended up to three characters by
setting axis name 2 (parameter No. 1025) and axis name 3 7
(parameter No. 1026) (extended axis name).
For axis names 2 and 3, a character from 0 to 9 and A to Z of ASCII
code can be arbitrarily selected. However, the setting of axis name
8
3 is invalid if axis name 2 is not set for each axis. Moreover, if a
character from 0 to 9 is set as axis name 2, do not use a character
from A to Z as axis name 3.
A1
(Tip) ASCII code
Axis X Y Z A B C U V W
A2
name
Setting 88 89 90 65 66 67 85 86 87
Z
When G code system A is used with the lathe system, and the
character X, Y, Z, or C is used as axis name 1 of an axis, a
command with U, V, W, or H specified for axis name 1 represents
an incremental programming for the axis.
251
B-64647EN/01
• When the setting value is out of range, it cannot be recognized

as an axis name.
• When a multiple repetitive canned cycle for turning is used, no
1 character other than X, Y, and Z can be used as the address of
the axis.
2 • When the custom macro function is enabled, the same
 extended axis name as a reserved word cannot be used. Such

an extended axis name is regarded as a reserved word.
NOTE Because of reserved words of custom macros, extended axis
3 names that start with the following two characters cannot be

used:
AB, AC, AD, AN, AS, AT, AX, BC, BI, BP, CA, CL, CO, US, WH,
WR, XO, ZD, ZE, ZO, ZW
3 • In a macro call, no extended axis name can be used as an
argument.
5
6
7
8
A1
A2
Z
252
B-64647EN/01
5.9.2 Parameters to Display Extended Axis Names and

Subscripts
5.9.2
(1) Bit 0 (EEA) of Parameter No. 1000 to enable/disable an extended axis name
1
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
1000 EEA
2
[Data type] : Bit
3
# 0 EEA Specify whether or not to enable an extended axis name and
extended spindle name.
0: Disable. 3
1: Enable.
(2) Parameter No. 1025 for program axis name 2 for each axis
5
(3) Parameter No. 1026 for program axis name 3 for each axis
1025 Program axis name 2 for each axis

6
1026 Program axis name 3 for each axis 7
[Data type] : Byte axis 8
When axis name extension is enabled (when bit 0 (EEA) of
parameter No. 1000 is set to 1), the length of an axis name can be A1
extended up to three characters by setting axis name 2 and axis
name 3. For axis names 2 and 3, a character from 0 to 9 and A to Z
of ASCII code can be arbitrarily selected. However, the setting of A2
axis name 3 is invalid if axis name 2 is not set for each axis.
Moreover, if a character from 0 to 9 is set as axis name 2, do not
use a character from A to Z as axis name 3. Z
(4) Parameter No. 3131 to set a subscript for an axis name
3131 Subscript of axis name

In order to distinguish axes under parallel operation,
synchronization control, and tandem control, specify a subscript for
each axis name.
253
B-64647EN/01
Setting Description
0 Each axis is set as an axis other than a parallel axis,
synchronization control axis, and tandem control axis.
1 1 to 9 A set value is used as a subscript.
65 to 90 A set letter (ASCII code) is used as a subscript.
2 [Example]When the axis name is X, a subscript is added as
indicated below.
3 Setting Axis name displayed on a screen such as the position

display screen
0 X
3 1 X1
77 XM
5 83 XS
6 If a multi-path system is used, no extended axis name is used

within a path, and no subscript is set for the axis names, then the
path number is automatically used as the subscript for the axis
names. To disable the display of axis name subscripts, set a blank
7 (32) of ASCII code in the parameter for specifying an axis name
subscript.
8
• If even one axis in a path uses an extended axis name when bit
A1 2 (EAS) of parameter No. 11308 is set to 0, subscripts cannot

be used for axis names in the path.
 • If parallel axis control is used together with axis synchronous

control (or tandem control), make sure not to set subscripts of
A2 NOTE
axis names by parameter No. 3131, but to set different axis
names for the axes to apply axis synchronous control (or
tandem control).
Z
(5) Bit 2 (EAS) of parameter No. 11308 to set whether to use subscripts when
using an extended axis name
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
11308 EAS

254
B-64647EN/01
# 2 EAS Specify whether subscripts for axis names or spindle names in that
path can be used or not when an extended axis name or extended
spindle name is used in a path.
0: Cannot be used.
1: Can be used.
1
5.9.3 Parameters to Display Coordinate Values 2

5.9.3
(1) Bit 2 (INI) of parameter No. 0000 to set the unit of input 3
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
0000 INI 3
[Input type] : Setting input
[Data type] : Bit path 5
# 2 INI Specify the unit of input.
0: In metrics. 6
1: In inches.
(2) Bit 0 (INM) of parameter No. 1001 to set the least command increment on the
7
linear axis in metric/inch system
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
8
1001 INM
A1
[Data type] : Bit path
A2

NOTE
Z
# 0 INM Specify the least command increment on the linear axis.

0: In mm (metric system machine).
1: In inches (inch system machine).
(3) Bit 7 (IPR) of parameter No. 1004 to set the least input increment of each axis
ten times greater than the least command increment
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
1004 IPR
255
B-64647EN/01

# 7 IPR Specify whether or not to set the least input increment of each axis
1 ten times greater than the least command increment when a
number with no decimal point is specified.
2 0: Not set it ten times.
1: Set it ten times.
When the increment system is IS-A, and bit 0 (DPI) of parameter
No. 3401 is set to 1 (pocket calculator type decimal point
3 programming), the least input increment cannot be ten times
greater than the least command increment.
3 (4) Bits 0 to 3 of parameter No. 1013 to set the increment system of each axis
5 1013
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3
ISEx
#2
ISDx
#1
ISCx
#0
ISAx
6 [Input type] : Parameter input

7
8 NOTE
A1 #0
#1
ISAx
ISCx
#2 ISDx
A2 #3 ISEx Increment system of each axis
Increment #3 ISE #2 ISD #1 ISC #0 ISA
system
Z IS-A 0 0 0 1
IS-B 0 0 0 0
IS-C 0 0 1 0
IS-D 0 1 0 0
IS-E 1 0 0 0
(5) Bit 0 (EXE) of parameter No. 10351 to extend the stroke of the minimum
increment system E
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
10351 EXE
256
B-64647EN/01

[Data type] : Bit system common
# 0 EXE Specify whether or not to enable the stroke extension of the

minimum increment system E. 1
0: Disable.
1: Enable.
2
 • Use in combination with the minimum increment system E (IS-
E) option.
3
MEMO • When this parameter is enabled, the stroke is ten times greater.
3
5
5.9.4 Parameters of Increment System 0.1 nm Display
5.9.4
6
(1) Bit 3 (ISE) of parameter No. 1013 for the increment system IS-E
(2) Bit 4 (IPF) of parameter No. 1013 to extend the number of digits for program
commands with the minimum increment system E 7
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
1013 ISFx ISEx ISDx ISCx ISAx
8
[Data type] : Bit axis
A1
 When this parameter is set, the power must be turned off before A2
NOTE
Z
#0 ISAx
#1 ISCx
#2 ISDx
#3 ISEx Increment system of each axis
system
IS-A 0 0 0 1
IS-B 0 0 0 0
IS-C 0 0 1 0
IS-D 0 1 0 0
257
B-64647EN/01

system
IS-E 1 0 0 0
1 # 4 ISFx Specify whether or not to enable the extension of the number of

digits for program commands.
2 0: Disable.
1: Enable.
3  This parameter is valid for an axis with the minimum increment

system E.
MEMO
3
(3) Bit 1 (EXD) of parameter No. 13102 to change the position data display format
5
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
6 13102 EXD

7
# 1 EXD Specify whether or not to change the position data display format
on the CNC standard screen when the function to extend the
8 number of digits for program commands with the minimum
increment system E is enabled.
0: Not change.
A1 1: Change.
A2

This parameter is disabled when the function to extend the
number of digits for program commands with the minimum
Z NOTE increment system E is not enabled for any axes.
258
B-64647EN/01
5.9.5 Parameters of Programmable Diameter/Radius

Switching
5.9.5
(1) Bit 3 (DIAx) of parameter No. 1006 to specify the move command (diameter/
radius) for each axis 1
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
1006
DIAx 2
DIAx

3
[Data type] : Bit axis
3

NOTE
operation is continued. 5
# 3 DIAx Specify on which the move command for each axis is based.
6
0: Radius specification.
1: Diameter specification. 7
(2) Bit 2 (DPA) of parameter No. 3194 to set the absolute coordinates, relative
coordinates, and remaining travel distance to follow the setting of bit 3 of
parameter No. 1006
8
(3) Bit 3 (DPM) of parameter No. 3194 to set the machine coordinates to follow the
setting of bit 3 of parameter No. 1006 A1
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
3194 DPM DPA A2
[Data type] : Bit path Z
# 2 DPA Specify how to display the absolute coordinates, relative
coordinates, and remaining travel distance during diameter/radius
specification switching.
0: Follow the specification during switching.
1: Follow the setting of bit 3 (DIAx) of parameter No. 1006.
# 3 DPM Specify how to display the machine coordinates during diameter/

radius specification switching.
1: Follow the specification during switching.
259
B-64647EN/01
(4) Bit 5 (PGD) of parameter No. 3400 to specify G10.9 command (programmable
diameter/radius specification switching)
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
1 3400 PGD

2 [Data type] : Bit path
# 5 PGD Specify whether or not to enable the G10.9 command

(programmable diameter/radius specification switching).
3 0: Disable.
1: Enable.
3
• The option for the diameter and radius switching function is
5 
NOTE
required.
• When the G10.9 command is enabled by this parameter, signal-
based diameter/radius switching is disabled.
6
(5) Bit 7 (PDM) of parameter No. 11222 to set the machine coordinate system
7 select command (G53) to follow the setting of bit 3 of parameter No. 1006
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
8 11222 PDM

A1 [Data type] : Bit path
# 7 PDM Specify how to set coordinates in the machine coordinate system

A2 select command (G53) when switching between diameter and
radius specification with the function for dynamic switching of
diameter/radius specification.
Z 0: Switch between diameter and radius specification.
260
B-64647EN/01
5.9.6 Parameters to Show/Hide Control Axes

5.9.6
(1) Bit 0 of parameter No. 3115 to show/hide the current position

(2) Bit 1 of parameter No. 3115 to show/hide the absolute coordinates, relative
coordinates, and remaining travel distance
1
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
3115 NDAx NDPx 2
[Data type] : Bit axis 3
# 0 NDPx Specify whether or not to display the current position.
0: Display. 3
1: Not display.
5

NOTE
When using the electronic gear box (EGB) function, set 1 for the
EGB dummy axis to disable current position display.
6
# 1 NDAx Specify whether or not to display the current position and the 7
remaining travel distance in absolute and relative coordinates.
0: Display.
1: Not display (The machine coordinates are displayed). 8
5.9.7 Parameters to Align Control Axes to the Top

A1
5.9.7
(1) Bit 0 (TAD) of parameter No. 13102 to align an axis not set for current position A2
display to the top
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 Z
13102 TAD

# 0 TAD Specify how to display the current position of an axis when it is not
displayed by setting bit 0 (NDPx) of parameter No. 3115 to 1 or
when the axis display order is specified by parameter No. 3130.
0: Display the axis as blanks.
1: Align the axis to the top.
261
B-64647EN/01
5.9.8 Parameters to Change the Order of Displaying Con-

trol Axes
5.9.8
(1) Parameter No. 3130 to set the axis display order for current position display
1 screens
2 3130 Axis display order for current position display screens

Set the order in which axes are displayed on current position
display screens.
3
5
5.9.9 Parameters to Preset a Workpiece Coordinate Sys-
6 tem (Absolute/Overall)
5.9.9
(1) Bit 6 (WPS) of parameter No. 3006 to enable/disable each axis workpiece
7 coordinate system preset signal
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
8 3006 WPS

A1 [Data type] : Bit
# 6 WPS Specify whether or not to enable each axis workpiece coordinate

A2 system preset signal.
0: Disable.
1: Enable.
Z When this parameter is set to 1, a workpiece coordinate system is
preset after the end of the high speed program check mode.
(2) Bit 6 (WST) of parameter No. 8168 to automatically set a workpiece coordinate
system
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
8168 WPT

262
B-64647EN/01
# 6 WPT Specify whether or not to automatically set a workpiece coordinate

system for a slave axis at the end of synchronous control.
0: Not cause.
1: Cause.
1
 This parameter is valid when the workpiece coordinate system
option is enabled, and bit 6 (SPV) of parameter No. 8167 is set to
MEMO 1. 2
3
(3) Bit 0 (WPA) of parameter No. 11277 to issue an alarm when the preset signal
is turned off 3
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
11277 WPA 5
# 0 WPA Specify whether or not to issue an alarm when an M code for
turning on the workpiece coordinate system preset signal for an 7
axis is specified but the signal is not turned on, or an auxiliary
function lock is provided.
0: Issue an alarm PS1820 "ILLEGAL DI SIGNAL STATE". 8
1: Not issue an alarm.
When bit 6 (PGS) of parameter No. 3001 is set to 0 (M, S, T, and B A1

codes are not output in the high speed program check mode), if an
M code for turning on the workpiece coordinate system preset
signal for an axis is specified, the system follows the setting of this
A2
parameter.
Z
263
B-64647EN/01
5.10　PARAMETERS OF SERVO LOAD METER DISPLAY
5.10
5.10 PARAMETERS OF SERVO LOAD

METER DISPLAY
1
5.10.1 Parameters to Display Axis Names
2 5.10.1
See "5.9 PARAMETERS OF THE CURRENT POSITION/REMAINING TRAVEL

DISTANCE DISPLAY TILES".
3
3 5.10.2 Parameters to Display Extended Axis Names and
Subscripts
5 5.10.2

6 DISTANCE DISPLAY TILES".
7
5.10.3 Parameters of Axis Name Switching
8
5.10.3

A1
A2 5.10.4 Parameters to Show/Hide Control Axes
5.10.4
Z See "5.9 PARAMETERS OF THE CURRENT POSITION/REMAINING TRAVEL

5.10.5 Parameters to Align Control Axes to the Top

5.10.5

264
B-64647EN/01
5.10　PARAMETERS OF SERVO LOAD METER DISPLAY
5.10.6 Parameters to Change the Order of Displaying Con-

trol Axes
5.10.6

DISTANCE DISPLAY TILES". 1
2
3
3
5
6
7
8
A1
A2
Z
265
B-64647EN/01
5.11　PARAMETERS OF MODAL INFORMATION DISPLAY
5.11
5.11 PARAMETERS OF MODAL INFORMA-

TION DISPLAY
1
5.11.1 Parameters of Modal G Codes
2 5.11.1
(1) Bits 6 (GSB) and 7 (GSC) of parameter No. 3401 to set the G code system
3 #7
GSC
#6
GSB
#5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
3401
3
5
# 6 GSB The G code system is set.
6 # 7 GSC
GSC GSB G code
0 0 G code system A
7 0 1 G code system B
1 0 G code system C
8

G code system B and G code system C are optional functions.
A1 When no option is selected, G code system A is used, regardless
NOTE of the setting of these parameters.
A2
(2) Bit 4 (FPM) of parameter No.3402 to select feed per minute or feed per
revolution
Z
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
FPM
3402

# 4 FPM Specify a G code at power-on time or in the cleared state.

0: G99 or G95 mode (feed per revolution).
1: G98 or G94 mode (feed per minute).
266
B-64647EN/01
(3) Bit 2 (INI) of parameter No. 0000 to set data input in inches/metrics
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
0000 INI

1
# 2 INI Specify the unit of input. 2

0: In metrics.
1: In inches.
3
(4) Bit 3 (TCT) of parameter No. 5040 to set the tool change method
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
3
TCT
5040
5
# 3 TCT Specify the tool change method.
0: Turret rotation (Tool change operation is performed with a T 7
command only).
With a T command, an auxiliary function and tool position offset
operation are performed. 8
1: Automatic tool changer (ATC) (Tool change operation is
performed with an M command such as M06).
With a T command, only an auxiliary function is performed.
A1
This parameter is valid with a lathe system only.
A2
Before changing the setting of this parameter, cancel the
offset. If the setting is changed while the offset is applied, the
WARNING
subsequent offset operation may not be performed correctly Z
or an alarm PS0368 occurs.
(5) Bit 3 (G36) of parameter No. 3405 to set a G code to be used with the
automatic tool change compensation function
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G36
3405
267
B-64647EN/01
# 3 G36 Specify a G code to be used with the automatic tool length

measurement function (M series)/automatic tool offset function (T
series).
1 0: G36 (T series only)/G37.
1: G37.1/G37.2/G37.3.
2
 If it is necessary to use G36 (counterclockwise) in circular
3 MEMO
threading, set this parameter to 1.
3 5.11.2 Parameters of Modal HD.T and NX.T Codes

5.11.2
5 (1) Bit 2 (PCT) of parameter No. 3108 to set modal T, HD.T, and NX.T display
6 #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
3108 PCT

# 2 PCT Specify how to display modal T on the program check screen.

8 0: Display a specified T value.
1: Display HD.T and NX.T.
Displayed values vary depending on the setting of bit 1 (THN) of
A1 parameter No. 13200.
A2 (2) Bit 0 (DHN) of parameter No. 11320 to display modal T, HD.T, and NX.T at the
same time
Z 11320
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
DHN
# 0 DHN Specify whether or not to display HD.T, NX.T, and a T number

simultaneously on the program check screen.
0: Not display.
1: Display.
If DHN is set to 1, HD.T, NX.T, and T are displayed regardless of
the setting of bit 2 (PCT) of parameter No. 3108.
268
B-64647EN/01
(3) Bit 1 (THN) of parameter No. 13200 to set where to obtain modal HD.T and
NX.T information from
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
13200 THN
1
2
# 1 THN Specify the displayed contents of NX.T and HD.T with the tool
management function.
0: The tool type numbers at the first spindle position and the first
3
standby position.
1: The values specified from the PMC window.
3
(4) Parameter No. 11321 to set the spindle tool name (1st character)
(5) Parameter No. 11322 to set the spindle tool name (2nd character)
(6) Parameter No. 11323 to set the spindle tool name (3rd character)
5
(7) Parameter No. 11324 to set the spindle tool name (4th character)
11321 Spindle tool name (1st character)

6
11322 Spindle tool name (2nd character) 7
11323 Spindle tool name (3rd character)
8
11324 Spindle tool name (4th character)

A1
The name of the spindle tool (HD.T) displayed on the program
A2
check screen can be changed.
Any character string consisting of up to four numeric characters,
alphabetical characters, katakana characters, and symbols can be
Z
displayed.

 30i/31i/32i-MODEL B Common to Lathe System/Machining
Center System OPERATOR'S MANUAL" (B-64484EN).
MEMO
• If the first character is 0 or an illegal character code, "HD.T" is
displayed.
269
B-64647EN/01
(8) Parameter No.11325 to set the next machining tool name (1st character)
(9) Parameter No.11326 to set the next machining tool name (2nd character)
(10) Parameter No.11327 to set the next machining tool name (3rd character)
(11) Parameter No.11328 to set the next machining tool name (4th character)
1 11325 Next machining tool name (1st character)
2 11326 Next machining tool name (2nd character)
11327 Next machining tool name (3rd character)
3 11328 Next machining tool name (4th character)

5 The name of the next machining tool (NX.T) displayed on the
program check screen can be changed.
6 Any character string consisting of up to four numeric characters,
alphabetical characters, katakana characters, and symbols can be
displayed.
7
8  30i/31i/32i-MODEL B Common to Lathe System/Machining
Center System OPERATOR'S MANUAL" (B-64484EN).
MEMO
• If the first character is 0 or an illegal character code, "HD.T" is
A1 displayed.
A2 (12) Parameter No. 13220 to set the number of valid tools in tool management
data
Z 13220 Number of valid tools in tool management data

[Data type] : Word system common
[Valid data range]: 0 to 64 (Extended to 240 or 1000 by the addition of an option)
This parameter sets the number of valid tools in tool management
data.
(13) Parameter No. 13250 to set the number of spindle tool numbers
13250 Number of valid spindles
270
B-64647EN/01

This parameter sets the number of spindle positions usable with the
tool management function.
(14) Parameter No. 13251 to set the number of next machining tool numbers 1
13251 Number of valid standby positions
2
[Valid data range]: 0 to 4 3
This parameter sets the number of standby positions usable with
the tool management function.
3
5
5.11.3 Parameters of Modal SRPM, SSPM, and SMAX
5.11.3
6
(1) Bit 7 (CSS) of parameter No. 24314 to show/hide modal SRPM, SSPM, and
SMAX
7
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
24314 CSS
8
A1
# 7 CSS Specify whether or not to display modal information related to
constant surface speed control.
0: Not cause. A2
1: Cause.
5.11.4 Parameters of Modal F Codes

5.11.4
(1) Bit 1 (FR3) of parameter No. 1405 to set the increment system of an F
command without a decimal point in feed per revolution
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
1405
FR3
271
B-64647EN/01

# 1 FR3 Specify the increment system of an F command without a decimal

point in feed per revolution.
1 0: 0.01 mm/rev (0.0001 inch/rev for inch input).
1: 0.001 mm/rev (0.00001 inch/rev for inch input).
2
(2) Bit 2 (FM3) of parameter No. 1404 to set the increment system of an F
command without a decimal point in feed per minute
3 #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
FM3
1404
3
6 # 2 FM3 Specify the increment system of an F command without a decimal

point in feed per minute.
0: 1 mm/min (0.01 inch/min for inch input).
1: 0.001 mm/min (0.00001 inch/min for inch input).
7
8 5.11.5 Parameters of Modal T, D, and H Codes
5.11.5
A1 (1) Bit 7 (STS) of parameter No. 14823 to show/hide the compensation type
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
A2 14823 STS
Z [Input type]
[Data type]
: Parameter input
: Bit system common
# 7 STS Specify whether or not to display the compensation type in the state
display area when it is specified.
0: Not display.
1: Display.
272
B-64647EN/01
5.11.6 Parameters of Modal T Codes

5.11.6
(1) Parameter No. 3032 to set the allowable number of digits for T code
commands
3032 Allowable number of digits for the T code

1
Set the allowable number of digits for the T code. 3
When 0 is set, the allowable number of digits is assumed to be
eight.
3
(2) Parameter No. 5028 to set the number of digits of an offset number used with a
T code command
5
Number of digits of an offset number used with a T code command
5028
6
Specify the number of digits of a T code portion that is used for a
tool position offset number (wear offset number when the tool
geometry/wear compensation function is used).
8
When 0 is set, the number of digits is determined by the number of
tool compensation values.
When the number of tool compensation values is 1 to 9: Lower one
A1
digit
When the number of tool compensation values is 10 to 99: Lower A2
two digits
When the number of tool compensation values is 100 to 999: Lower
three digits Z
[Example]When an offset number is specified using the lower two
digits of a T code, set 2 in parameter No. 5028.
Txxxxxx yy
xxxxxx : Tool selection
yy : Tool offset number
In tool management function, set 4 in this parameter to set four-digit
number in parameter No.13265.
273
B-64647EN/01

NOTE
A value greater than the setting of parameter No. 3032 (allowable
number of digits for the T code) cannot be set.
1
2 (3) Bit 1 (LGN) of parameter No. 5002 to set the geometry offset number of tool
position offset:
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
3 5002
LGN

5 # 1 LGN Specify how to set the geometry offset number of tool position
6 offset.
0: Specify the same number as wear offset number.
1: Specify the same number as tool selection number.
7
 This parameter is valid when the option for tool geometry/wear
compensation is specified.
8 MEMO
A1 5.11.7 Parameters of Modal S Codes

5.11.7
A2 (1) Parameter No. 3031 to set the allowable number of digits for modal S code
commands
Z 3031 Allowable number of digits for the S code

Set the allowable number of digits for the S code.
eight.
274
B-64647EN/01
(2) Bit 3 of parameter No. 3798 to enable/disable the spindle command with a
decimal point
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
3798 SDP
1
2
# 3 SDP Specify whether or not to use high-precision spindle speed control:
0: Not use.
1: Use.
3
3
NOTE
5
5.11.8 Parameters of Modal M Codes (First to Fifth M 6

Codes)
7
5.11.8
(1) Parameter No. 3030 to set the allowable number of digits for modal M code
commands
8
3030 Allowable number of digits for the M code
[Input type] : Parameter input A1

Set the allowable number of digits for the M code. A2
eight.
Z
(2) Bit 7 (M3B) of parameter No. 3404 to show/hide (three) modal M codes
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
3404 M3B

# 7 M3B Specify the number of M codes that can be specified in one block.
0: One.
1: Up to three.
275
B-64647EN/01
(3) Bit 5 (M5B) of parameter No. 11630 to show/hide (five) modal M codes
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
11630 M5B

2
# 5 M5B Specify the number of M codes that can be specified in one block.
0: One (Three when bit 7 of parameter No. 3404 is set to 1).
1: Up to five.
3
3 5.11.9 Parameters of Modal B Codes (Second Auxiliary
Function)
5 5.11.9
(1) Parameter No. 3033 to set the allowable number of digits for the second
6 auxiliary function
3033 Allowable number of digits for the B code (second auxiliary function)

8 Set the allowable number of digits for the second auxiliary function.
eight.
A1 To enable a decimal point to be specified, bit 0 (AUP) of parameter
No. 3450 must be set to 1. In this case, the allowable number of
A2 digits set in this parameter includes the number of decimal places.

If a value exceeding the allowable number of digits is specified, the
alarm PS0003 "TOO MANY DIGIT" is issued.
Z (2) Parameter No. 3460 to set the second auxiliary function specification address
3460 Second auxiliary function specification address

Specify which of A, B, C, U, V, and W is to be used as the address
for specifying the second auxiliary function. If an address used as
an axis name is specified, the second auxiliary function is disabled.
276
B-64647EN/01
Name A B C U V W
Setting 65 66 67 85 86 87
Address B is assumed when a value other than the above is set.

However, the name U, V, or W can be used with the T series only 1
when G code system B or C is used. When a value from 85 to 87 is
specified with G code system A, the specification address for the
second auxiliary function is B.
2
(3) Bit 0 (DPI) of parameter No. 3401 to set how to treat a decimal point in an
address that can include a decimal point
3
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
DPI
3
3401
DPI
5
6
# 0 DPI Specify how to treat a value when a decimal point is omitted in an
address that can include a decimal point.
0: Treat it as the least input increment (normal decimal point input). 7
1: Treat it as the unit of mm, inches, degree, or second (calculator-
type decimal point input).
8
(4) Bit 0 (AUX) of parameter No. 3405 to set the magnification for a value output in
the second auxiliary function
A1
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
3405
AUX
AUX
A2
[Input type] : Parameter input Z
# 0 AUX Specify the magnification for a value output (onto the code signal)
relative to a specified value when the second auxiliary function is
specified in the calculator-type decimal point input format or with a
decimal point.
0: Use the same multiplication factor for both metric input and inch
input.
1: Set a magnification used for inch input ten times greater than
that used for metric input.
277
B-64647EN/01
When the second auxiliary function is specified in the calculator-

type decimal point input format or with a decimal point, the value
output onto the code signal is a specified value multiplied by a
value indicated below.
1 Increment system
Parameter
AUX=0
Parameter
AUX=1
2 IS-A for
reference axis
100 times 100 times
IS-B for 1000 times 1000 times

reference axis
3 Metric input
system
IS-C for
reference axis
10000 times 10000 times
IS-D for 100000 times 100000 times

3 reference axis
IS-E for 1000000 times 1000000 times
reference axis
5 IS-A for 100 times 1000 times
reference axis
6 IS-B for 1000 times 10000 times
reference axis
Inch input IS-C for 10000 times 100000 times
system reference axis
7 IS-D for 100000 times 1000000 times
reference axis
8 IS-E for
reference axis
1000000 times 10000000 times
A1
A2
Z
278
B-64647EN/01
5.11.10 Parameters of Modal C Codes (Third Auxiliary Func-

tion)
5.11.10
(1) Parameter No. 3034 to set the allowable number of digits for the third auxiliary
function 1
3034 Allowable number of digits for the third auxiliary function
2
Set the allowable number of digits for the third auxiliary function.
eight. 3
5
(2) Parameter No. 3463 to set the third auxiliary function specification address
3463 Third auxiliary function specification address

6
[Input type]
[Data type]
: Parameter input
: Byte path
7
for specifying the third auxiliary function.
8
If an address used as an axis name is specified, the third auxiliary
function is disabled. A1
A2
5.11.11 Parameters of Modal A Codes (Fourth Auxiliary
Function) Z
5.11.11
(1) Parameter No. 3035 to set the allowable number of digits for the fourth
auxiliary function
3035 Allowable number of digits for the fourth auxiliary function

Set the allowable number of digits for the fourth auxiliary function.
279
B-64647EN/01

eight.
1 (2) Parameter No. 3464 to set the fourth auxiliary function specification address
2 3464 Fourth auxiliary function specification address
3 [Data type] : Byte path

3 for specifying the fourth auxiliary function.

If an address used as an axis name is specified, the fourth auxiliary
function is disabled.
5
6
5.11.12 Parameters of General Modal Information
5.11.12
7 (1) Bit 2 (INI) of parameter No. 0000 to set the unit of input
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
8 0000 INI

# 2 INI Specify the unit of input.

A2 0: In metrics.
1: In inches.
Z (2) Bits 0 (ISAx), 1 (ISCx), 2 (ISDx), and 3 (ISEx) of parameter No. 1013 to set the
increment system
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
1013 ISEx ISDx ISCx ISAx

[Data type] : Bit axis
280
B-64647EN/01

NOTE
1
# 0 ISAx
# 1 ISCx 2
# 2 ISDx
# 3 ISEx Increment system of each axis
3
system
IS-A 0 0 0 1 3
IS-B 0 0 0 0
IS-C
IS-D
0
0
0
1
1
0
0
0
5
IS-E 1 0 0 0
6
(3) Bit 2 (MID) of parameter No. 10330 to enable/disable the modal information
highlight function
7
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
10330 ADC 8
[Data type] : Bit A1
# 2 ADC Specify whether or not to display a confirmation message at the
time of deletion of all data. A2
0: Display.
1: Not display.
Z
281
B-64647EN/01
5.12　PARAMETERS OF MACHINING INFORMATION DISPLAY
5.12
5.12 PARAMETERS OF MACHINING

INFORMATION DISPLAY
1 (1) Bit 0 (PCM) of parameter No. 6700 to set how to count the total number of
machined parts and the number of machined parts
2 (2) Bit 1 (PRT) of parameter No. 6700 to reset the required parts count arrival
signal
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
3 6700 PRT PCM
3 [Input type]
[Data type]
: Parameter input
: Bit path
5 # 0 PCM Specify how to count the total number of machined parts and the
number of machined parts.
6 0: M02, M30, or an M code specified by parameter No. 6710.

1: Only M code specified by parameter No. 6710.
# 1 PRT Specify the behavior of the required parts count arrival signal
7 PRTSF <Fn062.7> upon reset.

0: Set it to 0.
1: Not set it to 0.
8 (3) Parameter No. 6710 of an M code that counts the number of machined parts
A1 6710 M code that counts the number of machined parts

A2 [Data type] : 2-word path
The total number of machined parts and the number of machined
Z parts are counted (+1) when the M code set is executed.
The setting of 0 is invalid (no count operation is performed with

M00.) Moreover, M98, M99, M198 (external device subprogram

NOTE
calling), and M codes used for subprogram calling and macro
calling cannot be set as M codes for count operation. (Even when
such an M code is set, count operation is not performed, ignoring
the M code.)
282
B-64647EN/01
(4) Parameter No. 6711 to set the number of machined parts
6711 Number of machined parts

[Data type] : 2-word path 1
The number of machined parts is counted (+1) together with the
total number of machined parts when the M02, M30, or an M code 2
specified by parameter No. 6710 is executed.
3

NOTE
The number of parts is not counted for M02, M30 when bit 0
(PCM) of parameter No. 6700 is set to 1. 3
(5) Parameter No. 6712 to set the total number of machined parts
5
6712 Total number of machined parts
6
[Data type] : 2-word path
7
This parameter sets the total number of machined parts.
The total number of machined parts is counted (+1) when M02, 8
M30, or an M code specified by parameter No. 6710 is executed.
A1

NOTE
The number of parts is not counted for M02, M30 when bit 0
(PCM) of parameter No. 6700 is set to 1.
A2
(6) Parameter No. 6713 to set the number of required parts Z
6713 Number of required parts

This parameter sets the number of required machined parts.
Required parts finish signal PRTSF <F0062.7> is output to PMC
when the number of machined parts reaches the number of
required parts.
The number of parts is regarded as infinite when the number of
required parts is zero. The PRTSF signal is then not output.
283
B-64647EN/01
(7) Parameter No. 6750 to set the integrated value of power-on period
6750 Integrated value of power-on period

2 [Unit of data] : min
This parameter displays the integrated value of power-on period.
3 (8) Parameter Nos. 6751 and 6752 to set the operation time (integrated value of
time during automatic operation)
3 6751 Operation time (integrated value of time during automatic operation)

1
5 [Input type] : Setting input

6 [Unit of data] : msec
For details, see the description of parameter No. 6752.
7 6752 Operation time (integrated value of time during automatic operation)

2
8 [Input type] : Setting input

[Unit of data] : min
A1 [Valid data range]: 0 to 999999999
This parameter displays the integrated value of time during
automatic operation (neither stop nor hold time included).
A2 The actual time accumulated during operation is the sum of
parameter Nos. 6751 and 6752.
Z (9) Parameter Nos. 6753 and 6754 to set the integrated value of cutting time
6753 Integrated value of cutting time 1

[Unit of data] : msec
284
B-64647EN/01
6754 Integrated value of cutting time 2

[Unit of data] : min 1
This parameter displays the integrated value of a cutting time that is
performed in cutting feed such as linear interpolation (G01) and 2
circular interpolation (G02 or G03).
The actual time accumulated during cutting is the sum of parameter
Nos. 6753 and 6754.
3
(10) Parameter Nos. 6755 and 6756 to set the integrated value of general-
purpose integrating meter drive signal (TMRON) ON time
3
6755 Integrated value of general-purpose integrating meter drive signal
(TMRON) ON time 1
5
[Input type]
[Data type]
: Setting input
: 2-word path
6
7
6756 Integrated value of general-purpose integrating meter drive signal
(TMRON) ON time 2
8
[Input type] : Setting input A1
[Unit of data] : min
[Valid data range]: 0 to 999999999 A2
This parameter displays the integrated value of a general-purpose
integrating meter start signal TMRON <Gn053.0> from PMC is on.
The actual integrated time is the sum of parameter Nos. 6755 and Z
6756.
(11) Parameters No. 6757 and No. 6758 to set the operation time (integrated
value of one automatic operation time)
6757 Operation time (integrated value of one automatic operation time) 1

285
B-64647EN/01
6758 Operation time (integrated value of one automatic operation time) 2

1 [Unit of data] : min
2 The actual time accumulated during operating is the sum of
parameter Nos. 6757 and 6758.
The operation time is automatically preset to 0 during the power-on
sequence and the cycle start from the reset state.
3
3
5
6
7
8
A1
A2
Z
286
B-64647EN/01
5.13　PARAMETER TO DISPLAY FEEDRATE INFORMATION
5.13
5.13 PARAMETER TO DISPLAY FEE-

DRATE INFORMATION
1
5.13.1 Parameter to Display Feedrate Information
2
5.13.1
(1) Bit 0 (DPF) of parameter No. 3105 to display feedrate information
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 3
3105 DPF

# 0 DPF Specify whether or not to display the actual feedrate. 5

0: Not display.
1: Display.
6
7
5.13.2 Parameters of the Actual Feedrate Unit
8
5.13.2
(1) Bit 2 (INI) of parameter No. 0000 to set the unit of input in metrics/inches
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 A1
0000 INI
[Input type] : Setting input A2

# 2 INI Specify the unit of input. Z

0: In metrics.
1: In inches.
(2) Bit 0 (INM) of parameter No. 1001 to set the least command increment on the
linear axis
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
1001 INM

287
B-64647EN/01

NOTE
1
2 # 0 INM Specify the least command increment on the linear axis.
0: In mm (metric system machine).
1: In inches (inch system machine).
3 (3) Bit 3 (GSC) of parameter No. 3107 to set actual feedrate display
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
3 3107 GSC
5 [Input type]
[Data type]
: Setting input
: Bit path
6 # 3 GSC Specify the feedrate type to be displayed.

0: Feedrate per minute.
1: Follow the setting of bit 5 (FSS) of parameter No. 3191.
7 (4) Bit 5 (FSS) of parameter No. 3191 to set actual feedrate display
* This parameter setting is valid only when bit 3 (GSC) of parameter No. 3107
8 is 1.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
A1 3191 FSS

# 5 FSS Specify whether to display feedrate per minute or feedrate per

Z revolution.
0: Feedrate per revolution when all of the following requirements
are satisfied. Otherwise, feedrate per minute.
- Group 05 G-code is feedrate per revolution. 
- Other than manual feed, rapid traverse, and dry run.
- During axis movement.
1: Fix to feedrate per revolution.
 This parameter is valid only when bit 3 (GSC) of parameter No.

MEMO
3107 is 1.
288
B-64647EN/01
5.13.3 Parameter to Display the Actual Feedrate

5.13.3
(1) Parameter No. 3135 to set the number of decimal places in actual feedrate
display
3135 Number of decimal places in actual feedrate display

1
[Input type] : Setting input 2
Set the number of decimal places in actual feedrate display. 3
In the case of inch input, the number of decimal places is a set
value plus two.
[Setting value] : 0: Metric input Displayed without a decimal point 3
Inch input Displayed using the second decimal place
1: Metric inputDisplayed using the first decimal place
Inch inputDisplayed using the third decimal place 5
2: Metric inputDisplayed using the second decimal place
Inch inputDisplayed using the fourth decimal place
3: Metric inputDisplayed using the third decimal place 6
Inch inputDisplayed using the fifth decimal place
7
 This parameter is valid only for feed per minute.
MEMO 8
A1
5.13.4 Parameters of the Actual Feedrate Speed Meter
5.13.4
(1) Parameter No. 1420 to set the rapid traverse rate for each axis A2
1420 Rapid traverse rate for each axis
Z
[Data type] : Real axis
[Unit of data] : mm/min, inch/min, degree/min (machine unit)
[Min. unit of data] : Depend on the increment system of the applied axis
[Valid data range]: See the standard parameter setting table (C)
(When the increment system is IS-B, 0.0 to +999000.0)
Set the rapid traverse rate when the rapid traverse override is 100
% for each axis.
289
B-64647EN/01
For the data setting range, see the section "A.3 STANDARD
 PARAMETER SETTING TABLES" - "(C) Velocity and angular
1 velocity parameters" in "FANUC Series 30i/31i/32i-MODEL B

MEMO Common to Lathe System/Machining Center System
2
(2) Bit 3 (NDFx) of parameter No. 3115 to consider the feedrate of each axis in
calculation for actual feedrate display
3
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
3 3115 NDFx

5 [Data type] : Bit axis
6 # 3 NDFx Specify whether or not to consider the feedrate of a selected axis in

calculation for actual feedrate display.
0: Consider.
1: Not consider.
7
8
A1
A2
Z
290
B-64647EN/01
5.14　PARAMETERS OF SPINDLE INFORMATION DISPLAY
5.14
5.14 PARAMETERS OF SPINDLE INFOR-

MATION DISPLAY
1
5.14.1 Parameters of Extended Spindle Names and Sub-
5.14.1
scripts 2
(1) Parameter No. 3738 to set the second character of an extended spindle name
of each spindle 3
(2) Parameter No. 3739 to set the third character of an extended spindle name of
each spindle
3
3738 Spindle name 2 of each spindle
3739 Spindle name 3 of each spindle

5
[Input type]
[Data type]
: Parameter input
: Byte spindle
6
The command for a spindle is basically "S".
When all conditions below are satisfied, however, an extended
7
spindle name can be used. An extended spindle name consists of
up to three characters starting with "S" as the first spindle name. 8
Thus, a command for a spindle can be specified.
- The serial (analog) spindle function is enabled.
- The multi-spindle function is enabled. A1
- Bit 0 (EEA) of parameter No. 1000 is set to 1.
- Bit 3 (MPP) of parameter No. 3703 is set to 1.
- Bit 1 (ESN) of parameter No. 3798 is set to 1. A2
- Bit 4 (GTT) of parameter No. 3706 is set to 1. (M series only)
As spindle name 2 (parameter No. 3738) and spindle name 3
(parameter No. 3739), ASCII codes from 0 to 9 and A to Z can be Z
arbitrary set. However, before spindle name 3 for a spindle can be
valid, spindle name 2 must be set for the spindle. Moreover, when a
character from 0 to 9 is set as spindle name 2, do not set a
character from A to Z as spindle name 3.
291
B-64647EN/01
• When an extended spindle name is used, a subscript (for a

main spindle (parameter No. 3718)) and a subscript (for a sub-
1 
NOTE
spindle (parameter No. 3719)) are unusable.
• When the custom macro function is enabled, the same
extended spindle name as a reserved word must not be used.
2 Such an extended axis name is regarded as a reserved word.
(3) Bit 0 of parameter No. 1000 to enable/disable an extended axis name and an
3 extended spindle name
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
3 1000 EEA

5 [Data type] : Bit
6 # 0 EEA Specify whether or not to enable an extended axis name and

extended spindle name.
0: Disable.
1: Enable.
7
(4) Bit 3 of parameter No. 3703 to set how to select the spindle in multi-spindle
control
8
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
A1 3703 MPP

A2 [Data type] : Bit
Z  When this parameter is set, the power must be turned off before
NOTE
# 3 MPP Specify whether or not to select a spindle using a programmed

command instead of using the signals (SWS1 to SWS4 <Gn027.0
to Gn027.2, Gn026.3>) in multi-spindle control.
0: Not cause.
1: Execute.
292
B-64647EN/01
 When this parameter is set to 1, set parameter No. 3781 at the

MEMO
same time.
1
(5) Bit 1 of parameter No. 3798 to set how to specify the spindle in multi-spindle
control 2
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
3798 ESN
3
[Input type]
[Data type]
: Parameter input
: Bit
3
# 1 ESN Specify what to use to specify a spindle a program when the multi-
spindle function is enabled and bit 3 (MPP) of parameter No. 3703
5
is set to 1.
0: P command.
1: Extended spindle name.
6
A spindle to be specified is selected as follows: 7
Bit 1 (ESN) of Bit 3 (MPP) of Selection method
parameter No. 3798 parameter No. 3703
0 0 Signal selection
8
0 1 P command (S_P_)
1 0 Signal selection A1
Extended spindle
name
1 1
or
P command (S_P_)
A2
Z
 This parameter is valid when bit 0 (EEA) of parameter No. 1000 is
set to 1. When setting this parameter to 1, also set parameter
MEMO Nos. 3738 and 3739 properly.
(6) Bit 4 of parameter No. 3706 to set how to select the spindle gear
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
3706
GTT
293
B-64647EN/01

# 4 GTT Specify the spindle gear selection method.

0: Type M
1 1: Type T
2
• This parameter is valid only for M series.
• Type M
There is no gear selection signal input. The CNC selects a gear
3 based on the speed range of each gear set by a parameter
beforehand according to S commands, and the selected gear is
posted through the gear selection signal output. Moreover, the
3 spindle speed matching the gear selected by the gear selection
signal output is output.
Type T
5  There is gear selection signal input. The spindle speed

matching the gear selected by this signal is output.
NOTE • When the constant surface speed control option is selected,
6 type T is selected, regardless of whether this parameter is
specified.
• When type T spindle gear switching is selected, the following
parameters are invalid:
7 No. 3705#2 (SGB), No. 3751, No. 3752, No. 3705#1 (GST),
No.3705#3 (SGT), No.3761, No.3762, No.3705#6 (SFA),
No. 3735, No. 3736
8 On the other hand, parameter No. 3744 becomes valid.

• When multi-spindle control is used, select type T.
A1 (7) Parameter No. 3718 to set a subscript for display of each main spindle
A2 3718
Subscript for display of a serial spindle (main spindle) or analog
spindle
Z [Input type]
[Data type]
: Parameter input
: Byte spindle
Set a subscript to be added to spindle speed display on a screen
such as the position display screen.
Used when the spindle switching function is not used, or used for
the main spindle when the spindle switching function is used.

NOTE
This parameter is invalid when an extended spindle name is used.
294
B-64647EN/01
(8) Parameter No. 3719 to set a subscript for display of each sub-spindle
3719 Subscript for display of a serial spindle (sub-spindle)

[Data type] : Byte spindle 1
Set a subscript to be added to spindle speed display on a screen
such as the position display screen. 2
Used for the sub-spindle when the spindle switching function is
used.
3
 This parameter is invalid when an extended spindle name is used.

3
NOTE
5
(9) Bit 2 of parameter No. 11308 to make a subscript usable when an extended
spindle name is usedFor FANUC For FSI
6
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
11308 EAS 7
[Data type] : Bit 8
# 2 EAS Specify whether subscripts for axis names or spindle names in that
path can be used or not when an extended axis name or extended A1
spindle name is used in a path.
0: Cannot be used.
1: Can be used. A2
5.14.2 Parameters of the Actual Spindle Speed Z

5.14.2
(1) Parameter No. 3031 to set the allowable number of digits for the S code
3031 Allowable number of digits for the S code

Set the allowable number of digits for the M, S, and T codes.
eight.
295
B-64647EN/01
(2) Bit 3 of parameter No. 3798 to enable/disable the spindle command with a
decimal point For FANUC For FSI
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
1 3798 SDP

# 3 SDP Specify whether or not to use high-precision spindle speed control:

3 0: Not use.
1: Use.
3
5 
NOTE
7
5.14.3 Parameters of the Spindle Speed Meter
8
5.14.3
(1) Parameter No. 4020 to set the maximum spindle motor speed
A1 4020
: :
4133
A2
[Data type] : Word spindle
Z
5.14.4 Parameters of the Spindle Load Meter

5.14.4
(1) Parameters to change the spindle load meter display
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
4542 SLI
296
B-64647EN/01
[Data type] : Bit spindle

NOTE
1
# 7 SLI Specify the displayed contents of the spindle speed meter. 2

0: Display the current values only.
1: Display the spindle smart load meter.
This parameter must be set the same for all axes. 3
If not, an alarm SP1259 "ILLEGAL LOAD METER SETTING"
occurs.
3
(2) Parameter No. 24346 to set the short-time allowable ratio in spindle load meter
display
5
24346 Short-time allowable ratio in spindle load meter display

6
[Data type] : Byte spindle
[Unit of data] : %
[Valid data range]: (Undefined)
7
Set the blue and yellow area ratio against the entire spindle load
meter. 8
If 100 or above is set, it is treated as 100.
If 0 or below is set, it is treated as 90.
A1
A2
5.14.5 Parameters of the Current Load Ratio
5.14.5
(1) Parameter No. 4093 to set a load meter display value at maximum output (for Z
low-speed winding)
(2) Parameter No. 4127 to set a load meter display value at maximum output (for
high-speed winding)
4020
to to
4133

[Data type] : Word spindle
297
B-64647EN/01
5.15　PARAMETERS OF MACHINING PROGRAM DISPLAY
5.15
5.15 PARAMETERS OF MACHINING PRO-

GRAM DISPLAY
1
5.15.1 Parameters of Subprogram Calls
2 5.15.1
(1) Parameter No. 20 (MDP) to set input/output devices (memory card, I/O
channel = 4)
3 I/O CHANNEL: Input/output device selection, or interface number for
0020
a foreground input device
3
0021 Foreground output device setting
5 0022 Background input device setting
6 0023 Background output device setting

[Data type] : Byte
The CNC has the following interfaces for transferring data to and
from an external input/output device and the host computer:
8 Input/output device interface (RS-232C serial ports 1 and 2)
Memory card interface
A1 Data server interface

Embedded Ethernet interface
USB flash interface
A2 By setting bit 0 (IO4) of parameter No. 0110, data input/output can
be controlled separately. When IO4 is not set, data input/output is
performed using the channel set in parameter No. 0020. When IO4
Z is set, a channel can be assigned to each of foreground input,
foreground output, background input, and background output.
In these parameters, specify the interface connected to each input/
output device to and from which data is to be transferred. See the
table below for these settings.
Correspondence between settings and input/output devices
Setting Description
0,1 RS-232C serial port 1
2 RS-232C serial port 2
298
B-64647EN/01
Correspondence between settings and input/output devices

4 Memory card interface of CNC
Memory card/USB interface in the secondary display
unit for Ethernet connection or the shared display unit
5
for Ethernet connection
Data server interface
1
9 Embedded Ethernet interface
17 USB flash interface 2
(2) Bit 0 (MDP) of parameter No. 138 to set whether to add a path number to the
extensions of files to be punched and read in external device subprogram calls 3
(3) Bit 7 (MNC) of parameter No. 138 to set whether to execute external device
subprogram calls from the memory card
3
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
0138 MNC MDP
5
6
# 0 MDP Specify whether or not to add a path number to the extensions of
input/output files.
0: Not add.
7
1: Add.
8

NOTE
If a file name is specified by setting F, this parameter is ignored,
and a path number is not added to the extension. A1
A2
# 7 MNC Specify whether or not to execute DNC operation or external device
subprogram call from the memory card.
0: Not cause. Z
1: Execute.
(4) Bit 2 (SBP) of parameter No. 3404 to specify the format of address P with a file
number/program number in external device subprogram calls
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G19
3402
G19

299
B-64647EN/01
# 2 G19 Specify an operation mode at power-on time or in the cleared state.

0: Follow the setting of bit 1 (G18) of parameter No. 3402.
1: G19 mode (YZ plane).
If this bit is set to 1, set bit 1 (G18) of parameter No. 3402 to 0.
1 (5) Parameter No. 6030 to set the M code to execute external device subprogram
calls
2
6030 M code to execute external device subprogram calls

3 [Data type] : 2-word path
Set the M code to execute external device subprogram calls. When
3 0 is set, M198 is used. M01, M02, M30, M98, and M99 cannot be
used to execute external device subprogram calls. When a
5 negative number, 1, 2, 30, 98, or 99 is set for this parameter, M198

is used to execute external device subprogram calls.
6 (6) Bit 7 (DPD) of parameter No. 11356 to set whether to display the external
subprogram under execution with look-ahead blocks or text
7 11356
#7
DPD
#6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
8 [Input type]
[Data type]
: Parameter input
: Bit
A1 # 7 DPD Specify the display format of look-ahead blocks when the DNC or
external subprogram is executed.
0: Analyzed blocks.
A2 1: Input blocks.
Z
5.15.2 Parameter of Program Content Display
5.15.2
(1) Bit 1 (APD) of parameter No. 11350 to set whether to display the program
under execution with look-ahead blocks or text
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
11350 APD

[Data type] : Bit
300
B-64647EN/01

NOTE
1
# 1 APD Specify how to display the program under execution.
0: A display containing look-ahead blocks. 2
1: A text display.
5.15.3 Parameters of Program Numbers 3

5.15.3
(1) Bit 0 (PGR) of parameter No. 11304 to display program numbers with four or
eight digits
5
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0 6
11304 PGR

8

NOTE
operation is continued. A1
# 0 PGR Specify whether or not to switch the screen of the multi-path A2

simultaneous display group when the path select signal is changed.
0: Not switch.
1: Switch to the display group including the selected path.
Z
(2) Bit 0 (PON) of parameter No. 11317 to display program numbers at power-on
with four or eight digits
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
11317 PON

# 0 PON Specify whether or not to enable the program number O8-digit

function.
301
B-64647EN/01
0: Disable.
1: Enable.
1 
This parameter is set by CNC automatically. Therefore, it is
impossible to set by MDI operation. To judge if program number
NOTE O8-digit is valid by user application, see this parameter.
2
3
5.15.4 Parameters of Display during Program Backward by
3 5.15.4
Manual Handle Retrace
(1) Bit 3 (APD) of parameter No. 11308 to show/hide one of blocks already
5 executed
6 #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
11308 FPD

# 3 FPD Specify whether or not to display blocks already executed on the

8 program screen and program check screen.
0: Not display.
A1 1: Display.
A2  This parameter is valid when bit 1 (APD) of parameter No. 11350

MEMO
is 0.
Z
(2) Bit 2 (RPD) of parameter No. 11370 to set whether to display the block being
executed at the start of the program or display from the block just before the
block being executed during the execution of the program backward by manual
handle retrace
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
11370 RPD

[Data type] : Bit
302
B-64647EN/01

NOTE
1
# 2 RPD Specify the display position of the program being executed during
the execution of the program backward by manual handle retrace. 2
0: Display at the start of the program.
1: Display the block first just before the block being executed.
3
 This parameter is invalid when bit 1 (APD) of parameter No.

11350 is 0 and bit 3 (FPD) of parameter No. 11308 is 1, or bit 1
3
MEMO (APD) of parameter No. 11350 is 1.
5
6
7
8
A1
A2
Z
303
B-64647EN/01
5.16　PARAMETER OF N NUMBER SEARCH IN A MACHINING PROGRAM
5.16
5.16 PARAMETER OF N NUMBER

SEARCH IN A MACHINING PRO-
1 GRAM
2
5.16.1 Parameter of Sequence Numbers
5.16.1
3 (1) Bit 1 (SDE) of parameter No. 11353 to set sequence numbers to be displayed
with five or eight digits
3 11353
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1
SDE
#0

6 # 1 SDE Specify the number of digits for sequence numbers on the screen.
0: Five.
1: Eight.
7
8
A1
A2
Z
304
B-64647EN/01
5.17　PARAMETERS OF SEQUENCE NUMBER STOP
5.17
5.17 PARAMETERS OF SEQUENCE NUM-

BER STOP
1
(1) Parameter to set the program number to stop a sequence number
8341 Program number to compare and stop

2
[Input type]
[Data type]
: Setting input
: 2-word path
3
This parameter sets the program number, including a sequence
number, subject to sequence number comparison and stop.
3
Parameter No. 8342 is used to set a sequence number subject to
check termination. 5
(2) Parameter to set the sequence number to stop a sequence number
6
8342 Sequence number to compare and stop
[Input type] : Setting input 7

This parameter sets the sequence number subject to sequence 8
number comparison and stop. If the block containing the sequence
number set with this parameter is executed while the program set
with parameter No. 8341 is being executed, a single block stop A1
occurs after the block is executed. At this time, the setting is
automatically set to -1.
A2
• When -1 is set in parameter No. 8342, comparison and stop is
disabled.
Z
• Comparison and stop cannot be performed using a sequence
number contained in a block (such as a macro statement, M98,
and M99) that is processed only inside the CNC.

NOTE
• When a match is found with the sequence number of a block
(such as an L specification of a canned cycle) that specifies the
number of repeats, operation stops after executing as many
times as the number of repeats.
• If the sequence number set in parameter No. 8342 appears
more than once in the program, operation stops at the block
where the first match is found in the order of execution.
305
B-64647EN/01
5.18　PARAMETERS OF THE CUSTOM MACRO VARIABLE LIST SLIDE
5.18
5.18 PARAMETERS OF THE CUSTOM

MACRO VARIABLE LIST SLIDE
1
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
2 3207 VRN

# 5 VRN Specify whether or not to display the variable names of common
3 variables #500 to #549 on the custom macro variable screen.

0: Not display.
1: Display.
5
6 3290
#7
KEY
#6
MCM
#5 #4 #3 #2
MCV
#1 #0

# 2 MCV Specify whether or not to disable setting a macro variable by MDI

8 key input.
0: Enable.
1: Disable.
A1
# 6 MCM Specify a condition to enable setting a custom macro variable by
MDI key input.
A2 0: Enable in any mode.
1: Enable only in the MDI mode.
Z # 7 KEY Specify a memory protection signal used as a memory protection

key.
0: KEY1<Gn046.3>, KEY2<Gn046.4>, KEY3<Gn046.5>, and
KEY4<Gn046.6>.
1: KEY1<Gn046.3> only.
306
B-64647EN/01
5.18　PARAMETERS OF THE CUSTOM MACRO VARIABLE LIST SLIDE
1 The functions of the signals depend on whether KEY=0 or

KEY=1.
When KEY = 0:
-KEY1: Enables a tool offset amount, workpiece origin offset
1
amount, and workpiece coordinates shift amount to be input.
-KEY2: Enables setting data, macro variables, and tool life
2

management data to be input.
-KEY3: Enables program registration and editing.
NOTE -KEY4: Enables PMC data (counter and data table) to be input. 3
When KEY = 1:
-KEY1: Enables program registration and editing, and enables
PMC data to be input. 3
-KEY2 to KEY4: Not used
2 When a multi-path system is used, the setting for path 1 is
followed. 5
6
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
6008 F16
7
[Data type] : Bit 8
# 0 F16 Specify on which the precision of operation is based.
0: New specification.
1: F16i compatible specification.
A1
A2
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
11369 CSD
Z
# 4 CSD Specify whether or not to display system variables (#1000 to

#8499, #10000 to #89999, #100000 to #199999).
0: Not display.
1: Display.
307
B-64647EN/01
5.19　PARAMETERS OF THE MACHINE COLLISION AVOIDANCE FUNCTION
5.19
5.19 PARAMETERS OF THE MACHINE

COLLISION AVOIDANCE FUNCTION
1
2
 When NC parameter was changed, the machine collision avoidance function
NOTE must be ended.
3
3  Required parameters:
The following parameter settings are required to use this function.
If these parameters are not set, they are automatically set when this function is
5 started.
(1) Bit 4 (O3M) of parameter No. 10926: Outputting preview history information
6 of M, T, and B codes is enabled.
(2) Bit 0 (OE0) of parameter No. 10927: The machine collision avoidance
function is used.
(3) Bit 2 (O3T) of parameter No. 10927: The machine collision avoidance
7 function can be ended while the servo axis is moving.
10925 Monitor time to read machine collision avoidance function data

[Data type] : Word path
A1 [Unit of data] : msec
[Valid data range]: 1 to 5000, 0
A2 This parameter monitors a data read interval from the machine collision avoidance
function and checks if interference detection is correctly processed. If data is not
read for a period of time greater than the value set in this parameter, it is assumed
Z that no inference check is performed, and the "machine collision avoidance
function data read stop signal ORS <Fn528.1>" is set to 1. When this parameter is
set to 0, the setting of 600 (msec) is assumed.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
10926 O3I O3M O3B O3R O3S O3A

# 0 O3A Specify an action when the machine is stopped by the machine

0: Issue alarm Nos. 516 and 517.
308
B-64647EN/01
1: Interlock axes.
# 1 O3S Specify an action at the time of start of automatic operation, single-

block, or next block after skip signal input.
0: Output the preview coordinate value and interlock axes until the
preview time passes. 1
1: Make axes movable as usual when the preview coordinate value
is output.
2
# 2 O3R Specify the rapid traverse rate used in preview coordinate value
calculation in rapid traverse (G00) during automatic operation when
the rapid traverse time constant is greater than the maximum
3
preview time (600 msec).
0: The specified rate.
1: The specified rate multiplied by the magnification (See the
3
description of parameter No. 10928).
5
# 3 O3B Specify an action at the time of start of the next block of the
buffering mask block.
0: Make axes movable as usual when the preview coordinate value 6
is output.
preview time passes. 7
# 4 O3M Specify whether or not to enable outputting preview history
information of M, T, and B codes. 8
0: Disable.
1: Enable (Automatically set).
A1
# 5 O3I Specify an action after the interlock is released if axes are
interlocked by the PMC ladder at the time of start of automatic
operation, single-block, or next block after skip signal input.
A2
0: Make axes movable as usual when the preview coordinate value
is output.
Z
preview time passes.
309
B-64647EN/01
• When parameter O3A is set to 1, if an axis is stopped by the

machine collision avoidance during automatic operation, all
axes related to automatic operation become interlocked. In case
1 of manual operation, axes are interlocked in the direction to that
of the axis stopped by the machine.
2 
NOTE
• Even in the above interlocked state, axes can be moved
manually in the opposite direction to that of the axis stopped by
the machine.
• Even when parameter O3A is set to 1, if an axis is stopped by
3 the machine collision avoidance during automatic operation, the

interference detection alarm signals +/-OC1 to CC8 <Fn529,
Fn530> are set to 1.
3
5 10927
#7
OMD
#6 #5 #4
O3F
#3
ORA
#2
O3T
#1
OE1
#0
OE0

7 # 0 OE0 Specify whether or not to use the machine collision avoidance

function.
0: Not use.
8 1: Use (Automatically set).
# 1 OE1 Specify whether or not to obtain the block end point of preview data
A1 obtained with the machine collision avoidance function.
0: Not obtain.
1: Obtain.
A2
# 2 O3T Specify whether the machine collision avoidance function can be
ended or not while the servo axis is moving.
Z 0: Cannot be ended.
1: Can be ended (Automatically set).
# 3 ORA Specify whether or not to monitor a read interval of preview position

data from the machine collision avoidance function and output the
"machine collision avoidance function data read stop signal ORS
<Fn528.1>" when any of the interference detection alarm signals
+OC1 to +OC8 <Fn529> and -OC1 to -OC8 <Fn530> is set to 1.
0: Not output.
1: Output.
310
B-64647EN/01
# 4 O3F Specify whether or not to enable speed control in the machine

0: Disable.
1: Enable.
# 7 OMD Specify whether or not to cause a delay in output pulses during 1

manual operation in the machine collision avoidance function.
0: Not cause.
1: Cause.
2
• When parameter OE1 is set to 1, if there are multiple end points

3
in the interpolation cycle, the last end point will be output as the
 preview coordinate value.

• When parameter O3F is set to 1, if the condition "(Block length /
3
NOTE Specified rate) x 50 < Preview estimated time" is met, the
specified rate will be decelerated to the following specified rate:
Rate = Block length x 50 / (Preview estimated time) 5
6
10928 Time other than time constant included in the maximum preview time
of the machine collision avoidance function
7
[Data type] : Word system common
8
This parameter sets a period of time required for factors, such as a sampling cycle
A1
on the application, other than time constant included in the maximum preview time
during the execution of the machine collision avoidance function. The setting of
this parameter is used to calculate a preview coordinate value in rapid traverse
A2
when the conditions below are satisfied. When this parameter is set to 0, the
following process is not performed.
The rapid traverse rate used in preview coordinate value calculation is multiplied
Z
by the following magnification when the conditions below are satisfied.
• There is an axis that meets "Rapid traverse acceleration/deceleration time
constant (P1620 + P1621) > (Maximum preview time (600) - TAP)".
• The axis that meets the above condition is moving in rapid traverse (G00) during
automatic operation.
P1620 + P1621
Rapid traverse rate = Rapid
600 - TAP
TAP: Setting value in the parameter
311
B-64647EN/01
Maximum magnification: 10.0
Even when the fast traverse override is enabled or acceleration/deceleration

before interpolation is used for fast traverse, if the condition "Rapid traverse

1 acceleration/deceleration time constant (P1620 + P1621) > (Maximum preview
MEMO time (600) - TAP)" is met, it is assumed to be multiplied by the above
2 magnification.
3 10929 Number of paths to be checked after the buffering suppression block

of the machine collision avoidance function
3 [Input type]
[Data type]
: Parameter input
: Byte system common
5 Number of paths to be checked after the buffering suppression block
6 For 0
For 1 to N
: Follows the setting of bit 3 (O3B) of parameter No. 10926.
: Outputs a preview coordinate value for each of times into which
the preview time is split by this setting value while monitoring the
execution status of the machine collision avoidance function.
7 Example: When this parameter is set to 3, after the buffering suppression block,
the machine outputs the position of the below paths 1 to 3 sequentially while
monitoring the execution status of the machine collision avoidance function and
8 then starts moving the axis of the next block.
Position advanced after preview time Path 3

A1 Start point of next block after
buffering suppression block Path 2
A2
Path used for
Z Path 1
interference check
Actual moving path
312
A
1
APPENDIX 2
3
4
5
A.1
A.2
APPLICATION IDENTIFIER ID ........................................................... 314
CNC OPERATION SCREEN SWITCHING ID (SUBJECT VALUE) .... 315
A
A.3 MAINTENANCE DISPLAY SWITCHING ID (SUBJECT VALUE) ......... 316
A.4 MDI KEY CODE MAP FOR iHMI.......................................................... 324
A.5 FANUC SCREEN COLOR DEFINITION LIST...................................... 333
A.6 FUNCTION SPECIFICATIONS ............................................................ 338
A.7 RESOURCES REQUIRED FOR EACH FUNCTION ............................ 344
B-64647EN/01
CHAPTER A APPENDIX 
A.1　APPLICATION IDENTIFIER ID
A.1
A.1 APPLICATION IDENTIFIER ID

Application identifier IDs specified in the application definition file (apps-
1 general.xml) are as follows.
2 Table A.1 Application Identifier ID List

Identifier ID Application name
MainMenu Home screen
3 DataLog
ResidentApp
Data Logger Service Program
Maintenance Manager/Calendar Service Program
PC PC Operation
4 ToolManager Tool Manager
CALENDAR Calendar
4 CycleTimeEstimation
CNCOPERA
Cycle Time Estimation
NC Operation
ConversationProgT Lathe Conversation
A OpenCAS Machine Collision Avoidance
DATALOGGER Data Logger
7 Maintenance
SERVOVIEWER
Maintenance Manager
SERVO Viewer
CNCPower Power Consumption Monitor
8 Manual Manual Viewer
WhiteBoard MEMO
A1 Browser
Setting
Browser
Setting
SDF Maintenance Display
A2 FileManager File Manager
TroubleShooting Troubleshooting
Z ScrSwitch NC Operation Service Program
314
B-64647EN/01
A.2　CNC OPERATION SCREEN SWITCHING ID (SUBJECT VALUE)
A.2
A.2 CNC OPERATION SCREEN SWITCH-

ING ID (SUBJECT VALUE)
Specify the command "open" and the screen ID for subject. 1
Example:
Main screen: <subject>open, Main</subject> 2
Table A.2 CNC Operation Screen Switching ID 3
Screen ID Screen
Main
ProgMgrSld
Main screen in current mode
Program manager slide
4
ToolOfsSld Tool slide
WorkCrdSld Workpiece coordinates slide 4
CstmMcrSld Custom macro slide
SettingSld
UtilitySld
Setting slide
Utility slide
A
7
8
A1
A2
Z
315
B-64647EN/01
A.3　MAINTENANCE DISPLAY SWITCHING ID (SUBJECT VALUE)
A.3
A.3 MAINTENANCE DISPLAY SWITCH-

ING ID (SUBJECT VALUE)
1 Specify the screen number for subject.
The screen number is used for the C-language executor functions. The
2 relationship between the number and screen is shown in the figure below.
Example:
Current position (absolute coordinates) screen: <subject>0100</subject> or
3 <subject>0x0100</subject>
Current position (relative coordinates) screen: <subject>0200</subject> or
<subject>0x0200</subject>
4
Table A.3 Maintenance Display Switching ID
4 Screen
Number
Screen
POSITION
A 0100 Current position (absolute coordinate) screen
0200 Current position (relative coordinate) screen
7 0300
0400
Current position (overall) screen
Handle interruption screen
0600 Operating monitor screen
8 0700 3D Manual Feed Screen
0800 Current position (relative coordinate) screen
A1 3200
3300
C Language Executor application screen 1(Position screen)
C Language Executor application screen 2(Position screen)
3400 C Language Executor application screen 3(Position screen)
A2 3500 C Language Executor application screen 4(Position screen)
3600 C Language Executor application screen 5(Position screen)
Z 0101
PROGRAM
Program display screen
0201 Program folder screen
0301 Next block display screen
0401 Program check screen
0601 Machining time display screen
0701 Manual numerical command screen
0801 Program restart screen
0901 Robot connection Robot program select screen
3201 C Language Executor application screen 1(Program screen)
316
B-64647EN/01
Screen Screen
Number
3601 C Language Executor application screen 5(Program screen) 1
OFFSET
0102 Tool offset screen
0202 Setting screen
2
0302 Workpiece coordinates setting screen
0602 Custom macro screen 3
0702 Pattern menu screen
0802 Software operator's panel screen
0902 Displaying tool life management (list screen)
4
0b02 Y-axis offset screen
0c02 Workpiece coordinate system shift screen 4
0d02 Tool offset/second geometry tool offset screen
0e02 Tool geometry data screen
1102 Precision level selection screen/Machining quality level selection
A
screen
1202
1302
4th/5th axis offset screen
Chopping parameter setting screen
7
1502 Chuck barrier setting screen
1602 Language screen 8
1702 Protection of data at 8levels screen
1802
1a02
Operation confirmation function setting screen
Active fixture offset display screen
A1
1b02 Fixture offset setting screen
1c02 3D interference check screen A2
1d02 Tool geometry size data setting screen
1f02
2402
Workpiece setting error screen
Dynamic tool offset screen
Z
2702 Machine configuration selecting screen
2802 Machining condition selection screen
2902 Eco setting screen
3202 C Language Executor application screen 1(Offset screen)
0112 Tool offset screen (wear)
317
B-64647EN/01
Screen Screen
Number
0212 Tool offset screen (tool geometry)
0312 Tool offset screen (wear 2)
1 0412 Tool offset screen (tool geometry 2)
0512 Operation level setting screen of the protection of data at 8levels
2 0612 Password change screen of the protection of data at 8levels
0712 Protect level setting screen of the protection of data at 8levels
0812 Operation confirmation function setting screen
3 0912
0a12
Tool offset range setting screen
External workpiece origin offset range setting screen
0b12 Workpiece origin offset range setting screen
4 0c12 Y-axis tool offset range setting screen
0d12 Workpiece shift range setting screen
4 0e12
0f12
Tool management magazine screen
Tool management data screen
1012 Custom macro screen
A 1112 Execution macro variable screen
1212 Conversational macro variable screen
7 1312 Auxiliary macro variable screen

SYSTEM
0103 Parameter screen
8 0203 Diagnosis screen
0303 Servo guide mate screen
A1 0403
0603
System configuration screen
Memory contents display screen
0703 Pitch error compensation screen
A2 0803 Servo parameter setting screen
0903 Spindle setting screen
Z 0b03
0c03
PMC diagnosis/maintenance screen
Ladder diagram monitor and editor screens
0d03 PMC configuration data setting screens
1003 Machining parameter setting screen
1103 ALL IO (RS-232C) screen
1203 ALL IO screen
1303 Operation history screen
1503 Color setting screen
1603 Periodic maintenance screen
1703 Maintenance information screen
1803 Waveform Diagnosis Screen
318
B-64647EN/01
Screen Screen
Number
1a03 Touch panel calibration screen
1b03 FSSB setting screen
1c03 Menu screen for parameter tuning 1
1d03 Power Mate CNC manager screen
1f03 Embedded Ethernet port screen
2003 PCMCIA Ethernet card screen
2
2103 Ethernet screen
2203 PROFIBUS Master screen 3
2403 Machine Remote Diagnosis screen
2503 M code group setting screen
2603 Learning control for parts cutting screen/Learning control screen/Rigid
4
tapping learning control screen
2703
2903
3D error compensation screen/3D rotary error compensation screen
PROFIBUS Slave screen
4
2a03 DeviceNet Master screen
2b03 FL-net (1st) screen A
2c03 DeviceNet Slave screen
2e03
2f03
Dual Check Safety screen
Real time macro screen
7
3003 High pitch error compensation screen
3103 Customer's board screen 8
3203 C Language Executor application screen 1(System screen)
3303
3403
C Language Executor application screen 2(System screen)
C Language Executor application screen 3(System screen)
A1
3503 C Language Executor application screen 4(System screen)
3603 C Language Executor application screen 5(System screen) A2
3803 CNC ID information screen
3903
3a03
C Language Executor Task execution status monitor screen
Fine torque sensing screen
Z
3b03 Setting screen for the 3D machine position compensation function
3d03 Parameter check sum screen
4003 Reference position setting with mechanical stopper screen
4103 Data modification detection setting screen
4203 CC-Link Remote device screen
4403 Robot connection robot status screen
4503 Robot connection setting screen
4603 Power consumption monitoring screen
0113 Spindle setting screen
319
B-64647EN/01
Screen Screen
Number
0213 Spindle tuning screen
0313 Spindle monitor screen
1 0413 Amplifier setting screen for iA
0513 FSSB axis setting screen for iA
2 0613 Amplifier maintenance screen for iA
0713 Servo parameter setting screen
0813 Servo motor tuning screen
3 0913
0a13
Periodic maintenance status screen
Periodic maintenance machine menu screen
0b13 Periodic maintenance NC menu screen
4 0c13 Y-time graph wave display screen
0d13 XY graph wave display screen
4 0e13
0f13
Circle graph wave display screen
Fourier graph wave display screen
1013 Bode graph wave display screen
A 1113 Channel setting screen
1213 Waveform Diagnosis Graph Screen
7 1313
1413
Waveform Diagnosis Parameter Screen
Operation history screen
1513 Operation history signal selection screen
8 1613 Absolute coordinate screen of the Power Mate CNC manager
1713 Machine coordinate screen of the Power Mate CNC manager
A1 1813
1913
Parameter screen of the Power Mate CNC manager
Alarm screen of the Power Mate CNC manager
1a13 Diagnosis screen of the Power Mate CNC manager
A2 1b13 System configuration screen of the Power Mate CNC manager
1c13 System configuration screen
Z 1d13
1e13
Servo information screen
Spindle information screen
1f13 Parameter check sum information screen
2013 Parameter check sum setting screen
2113 Signal status screen
2213 I/O device monitor screen
2313 PMC alarm screen
2413 Data I/O screen
2513 PMC parameter (timer) screen
2613 PMC parameter (counter) screen
2713 PMC parameter (keep relay) screen
320
B-64647EN/01
Screen Screen
Number
2813 PMC parameter (data table) screen
2913 Signal trace screen
2a13 Signal trace (parameter setting) screen 1
2b13 Program list screen
2c13 Ladder diagram monitor / editor screens
2d13 Title display/edit screens
2
2e13 Configuration parameter screens
2f13 PMC function setting screens (for general functions, multi-language
message function, selectable I/O Link assignment function, and
3
override function)
3013 PMC status screen 4
3113 System parameter display/edit screens
3213 I/O module display/edit screens
3313 Symbol and comment display/edit screens
4
3413 Message display/edit screens
3513 Online monitor parameter setting screen A
3613 Embedded Ethernet port common screen
3713
3813
Embedded Ethernet port FOCAS2 screen
Embedded Ethernet port FTP transfer screen
7
3913 Embedded Ethernet port PING screen
3a13 Embedded Ethernet port communication state screen 8
3b13 Embedded Ethernet port task state screen
3c13 PCMCIA Ethernet card common screen
3d13 PCMCIA Ethernet card FOCAS2 screen
A1
3e13 PCMCIA Ethernet card FTP transfer screen
3f13 PCMCIA Ethernet card PING screen A2
4013 PCMCIA Ethernet card communication state screen
4113 PCMCIA Ethernet card task state screen
4213 Ethernet common screen
Z
4313 Ethernet FOCAS2 screen
4413 Ethernet Data Server screen
4513 Ethernet PING screen
4613 Ethernet communication state screen
4713 Ethernet task state screen
4813 Ethernet Data Server mode screen
4913 Ethernet Data Server format screen
4e13 PROFIBUS Master top screen
4f13 PROFIBUS Master bus parameter screen
5013 PROFIBUS Master slave table screen
321
B-64647EN/01
Screen Screen
Number
5113 PROFIBUS Master communication status screen
5213 PROFIBUS Master slave parameter screen
1 5313 PROFIBUS Master module data screen
5413 PROFIBUS Master DI/DO address screen
2 5513 PROFIBUS Master operation mode screen
MESSAGE
0104 Alarm screen
3 0204
0304
Operator message screen
Alarm history screen
0404 Operator message history screen
4 0604 Embedded Ethernet port log screen
0704 PCMCIA Ethernet card log screen
4 0804
0904
Ethernet log screen
FL-net (1st) communication history screen
0b04 System alarm history screen
A 0c04 USB log screen
1004 DeviceNet Master HISTORY screen
7 1104
1304
DeviceNet Slave HISTORY screen
Trouble diagnosis guidance screen
1404 Trouble diagnosis monitor screen
8 1504 Trouble diagnosis parameter screen
3204 C Language Executor application screen 1(Message screen)
A1 3304
3404
C Language Executor application screen 2(Message screen)
C Language Executor application screen 3(Message screen)
3504 C Language Executor application screen 4(Message screen)
A2 3604 C Language Executor application screen 5(Message screen)
0114 Alarm detail screen
Z 0214 All path screen

GRAPHIC
0105 Graphic parameter screen
0205 Tool path graphic screen
0605 Graphic parameter screen of the dynamic graphic
0705 Path graphic screen of the dynamic graphic
0805 Animation graphic screen of the dynamic graphic
0905 Path graphic (tool position) screen of the dynamic graphic
3205 C Language Executor application screen 1(Graphic screen)
322
B-64647EN/01
Screen Screen
Number
CUSTOM 1
0106 Conversational macro 1 screen
2
3206 C Language Executor application screen 1(Custom1 screen)
3306 C Language Executor application screen 2(Custom1 screen) 3
4
CUSTOM2
3207 C Language Executor application screen 1(Custom2 screen) 4
A
7
8
A1
A2
Z
323
B-64647EN/01
A.4　MDI KEY CODE MAP FOR iHMI
A.4
A.4 MDI KEY CODE MAP FOR iHMI

 QWERTY Types
1 Table A.4 (a) QWERTY Types

Key Key code
2 ! Shift + 1 (31)
Q Q (51)
@ Shift + +2 (32)
3 W
#
W (57)
Shift + +3 (33)
E E (45)
4 $
R
Shift + +4 (34)
R (52)
% Shift + +5 (35)
4 T T (54)
& Shift + +7 (37)
Y Y (59)
A * Shift + +8 (38)
U U (55)
( Shift + +9 (39)
7 I I (49)
) Shift + +0 (30)
O O (4F)
8 \ VK_OEM_5 (DC)
P P (50)
A1 `
A
VK_OEM_3 (CO)
A (41)
~ Shift + ` (CO)
A2 S
_
S (53)
Shift + - (BD)
D D (44)
Z ;
F
VK_OEM_1 (BA)
F (46)
: Shift + ; (BA)
G G (47)
" Shift + ' (DE)
H H (48)
' VK_OEM_7 (DE)
J J (4A)
[ VK_OEM_4 (DB)
K K (4B)
] VK_OEM_6 (DD)
L L (4C)
324
B-64647EN/01
Key Key code

| Shift + \ (DC)
Z Z (5A)
^ Shift + +6 (36)
X
<
X (58)
Shift + , (BC)
1
C C (43)
>
V
Shift + . (BE)
V (56)
2
/ VK_OEM_2 (BF)
B B (42) 3
? Shift + / (BF)
N N (4E)
None None 4
M M (4D)
=
0
VK_OEM_PLUS (BB)
0 (30) 4
END VK_END (23)
1
{
1 (31)
Shift + [ (DB)
A
2 2 (32)
}
3
Shift + ] (DD)
3 (33)
7
4 4 (34)
5 5 (35) 8
6 6 (36)
HOME
7
VK_HOME (24)
7 (37) A1
8 8 (38)
9 9 (39) A2
+ Shift + = (BB)
- VK_OEM_MINUS (BD)
, VK_OEM_COMMA (BC) Z
. VK_OEM_PERIOD (BE)
EOB VK_OEM_1 (BA)
SP VK_SPACE (20)
INPUT VK_RETURN (0D)
CAN VK_BACK (08)
ALTER VK_ADD (6B)
INSERT VK_INSERT (2D)
DELETE VK_DELETE (2E)
→ VK_RIGHT (27)
← VK_LEFT (25)
325
B-64647EN/01
Key Key code

↑ VK_UP (26)
↓ VK_DOWN (28)
PAGE↑ VK_PRIOR (21)
1 PAGE↓ VK_NEXT (22)
ABC/abc VK_CAPITAL (14)
2 SHIFT VK_SHIFT (10)
CTRL VK_CONTROL (11)
ALT VK_MENU (12)
3 TAB VK_TAB (09)
ESC VK_ESCAPE (1B)
4 HELP
:::
VK_SUBTRACT (6D)
VK_NUMPAD9 (69)
Menu
4 RESET
POS VK_NUMPAD1 (61)
PROG VK_NUMPAD2 (62)
A OFS/SET VK_NUMPAD3 (63)
MESSAGE VK_NUMPAD5 (65)
7 GRAPH
CUSTOM2
VK_NUMPAD6 (66)
VK_NUMPAD8 (68)
CUSTOM1 VK_NUMPAD7 (67)
8 None None
SYSTEM VK_NUMPAD4 (64)
A1
Table A.4 (b) M Series ONGP Types
A2 (
Key
Shift + 9 (39)
Key code
O O (4F)
Z )
N
Shift + +0 (30)
N (4E)
E E (45)
G G (47)
C C (43)
P P (50)
U U (55)
X X (58)
V V (56)
Y Y (59)
W W (57)
Z Z (5A)
326
B-64647EN/01
Key Key code

? Shift + / (BF)
Q Q (51)
, VK_OEM_COMMA (BC)
I
A
I (49)
A (41)
1
J J (4A)
@
K
Shift + +2 (32)
K (4B)
2
_ Shift + - (BD)
R R (52) 3
# Shift + +3 (33)
M M (4D)
= VK_OEM_PLUS (BB) 4
S S (53)
*
T
Shift + +8 (38)
T (54) 4
+ Shift + = (BB)
L
[
L (4C)
VK_OEM_4 (DB)
A
F F (46)
]
D
VK_OEM_6 (DD)
D (44)
7
& Shift + +7 (37)
H H (48) 8
% Shift + +5 (35)
B B (42)
\\ VK_OEM_5 (DC) A1
~ Shift + ` (C0)
$ Shift + +4 (34)
! Shift + +1 (31) A2
SP VK_SPACE (20)
`
/
VK_OEM_3 (C0)
VK_OEM_2 (BF)
Z
EOB VK_OEM_1 (BA)
CAN VK_BACK (08)
^ Shift + +6 (36)
- VK_OEM_MINUS (BD)
> Shift + . (BE)
. VK_OEM_PERIOD (BE)
< Shift + , (BC)
0 0 (30)
END VK_END (23)
1 1 (31)
327
B-64647EN/01
Key Key code

{ Shift + [ (DB)
2 2 (32)
} Shift + ] (DD)
1 3
"
3 (33)
Shift + ' (DE)
2 4
'
4 (34)
VK_OEM_7 (DE)
5 5 (35)
| Shift + \ (DC)
3 6 6 (36)
HOME VK_HOME (24)
7 7 (37)
4 ; VK_OEM_1 (BA)
8 8 (38)
: Shift + ; (BA)
4 9 9 (39)
ALTER VK_ADD (6B)
A INSERT
DELETE
VK_INSERT (2D)
VK_DELETE (2E)
7 → VK_RIGHT (27)
← VK_LEFT (25)
8 ↑
↓
VK_UP (26)
VK_DOWN (28)
A1 PAGE↓ VK_NEXT (22)
TAB VK_TAB (09)
A2 ESC
HELP
VK_ESCAPE (1B)
VK_SUBTRACT (6D)
ABC/abc VK_CAPITAL (14)
Z SHIFT VK_SHIFT (10)
ALT VK_MENU (12)
RESET
POS VK_NUMPAD1 (61)
PROG VK_NUMPAD2 (62)
OFS/SET VK_NUMPAD3 (63)
MESSAGE VK_NUMPAD5 (65)
GRAPH VK_NUMPAD6 (66)
328
B-64647EN/01
Key Key code

Menu VK_NUMPAD9 (69)
Table A.4 (c) T Series ONGP Types

1
Key Key code
( Shift + 9 (39) 2
O O (4F)
)
N
Shift + +0 (30)
N (4E) 3
E E (45)
G
Q
G (47)
Q (51)
4
P P (50)
A
X
A (41)
X (58)
4
B B (42)
Z Z (5A)
A
D D (44)
C C (43)
? Shift + / (BF) 7
Y Y (59)
, VK_OEM_COMMA (BC)
U U (55) 8
J J (4A)
W W (57)
@ Shift + +2 (32) A1
H H (48)
_
V
Shift + - (BD)
V (56) A2
# Shift + +3 (33)
M
=
M (4D)
VK_OEM_PLUS (BB)
Z
S S (53)
* Shift + +8 (38)
T T (54)
+ Shift + = (BB)
L L (4C)
[ VK_OEM_4 (DB)
I I (49)
] VK_OEM_6 (DD)
K K (4B)
& Shift + +7 (37)
R R (52)
329
B-64647EN/01
Key Key code

% Shift + +5 (35)
F F (46)
\\ VK_OEM_5 (DC)
1 ~
$
Shift + ` (C0)
Shift + +4 (34)
2 !
SP
Shift + +1 (31)
VK_SPACE (20)
` VK_OEM_3 (C0)
/ VK_OEM_2 (BF)
3 EOB VK_OEM_1 (BA)
CAN VK_BACK (08)
4 ^
-
Shift + +6 (36)
VK_OEM_MINUS (BD)
> Shift + . (BE)
4 .
<
VK_OEM_PERIOD (BE)
Shift + , (BC)
0 0 (30)
A END
1
VK_END (23)
1 (31)
{ Shift + [ (DB)
7 2 2 (32)
} Shift + ] (DD)
3 3 (33)
8 " Shift + ' (DE)
4 4 (34)
' VK_OEM_7 (DE)
A1 5 5 (35)
| Shift + \ (DC)
6 6 (36)
A2 HOME VK_HOME (24)
7 7 (37)
Z ;
8
VK_OEM_1 (BA)
8 (38)
: Shift + ; (BA)
9 9 (39)
ALTER VK_ADD (6B)
INSERT VK_INSERT (2D)
DELETE VK_DELETE (2E)
→ VK_RIGHT (27)
← VK_LEFT (25)
↑ VK_UP (26)
↓ VK_DOWN (28)
330
B-64647EN/01
Key Key code

PAGE↓ VK_NEXT (22)
TAB VK_TAB (09)
ESC VK_ESCAPE (1B) 1
HELP VK_SUBTRACT (6D)
ABC/abc
SHIFT
VK_CAPITAL (14)
VK_SHIFT (10)
2
ALT VK_MENU (12) 3
RESET
POS
PROG
VK_NUMPAD1 (61)
VK_NUMPAD2 (62)
4
OFS/SET VK_NUMPAD3 (63)
MESSAGE VK_NUMPAD5 (65) 4
GRAPH VK_NUMPAD6 (66)
CUSTOM2
CUSTOM1
VK_NUMPAD8 (68)
VK_NUMPAD7 (67)
A
Menu VK_NUMPAD9 (69) 7
 Horizontal soft keys
8
Table A.4 (d) Horizontal soft keys
Key
1st from left VK_F11 (7A)
Key code
A1
2nd from left VK_F1 (70)
3rd from left VK_F2 (71) A2
4th from left VK_F3 (72)
5th from left
6th from left
VK_F4 (73)
VK_F5 (74)
Z
12th from left VK_F12 (7B)
331
B-64647EN/01
 Right Vertical Soft Keys

Table A.4 (e) Right Vertical Soft Keys
Key Key code
1st from bottom VK_F13 (7C)
1 2nd from bottom VK_F14 (7D)
2 3rd from bottom

4th from bottom
VK_F15 (7E)
VK_F16 (7F)
5th from bottom VK_F17 (80)
3 7th from bottom VK_F19 (82)
4 9th from bottom

10th from bottom
VK_F21 (84)
VK_F22 (85)
4 12th from bottom VK_F24 (87)
A  Left Vertical Soft Keys (for 19 Inch Only)

Table A.4 (f) Left Vertical Soft Keys (for 19 Inch Only)
7 Key Key code
1st from bottom Shift + VK_F13 (7C)
8 2nd from bottom

3rd from bottom
Shift + VK_F14 (7D)
Shift + VK_F15 (7E)
4th from bottom Shift + VK_F16 (7F)
A1 5th from bottom Shift + VK_F17 (80)
6th from bottom Shift + VK_F18 (81)
A2 7th from bottom

8th from bottom
Shift + VK_F19 (82)
Shift + VK_F20 (83)
Z 10th from bottom Shift + VK_F22 (85)
332
B-64647EN/01
A.5　FANUC SCREEN COLOR DEFINITION LIST
A.5
A.5 FANUC SCREEN COLOR DEFINITION

LIST
1
The following table shows RGB values for color definition for the iHMI screen.
 Basic screen
2
5 3
2 4
3
6 4
8 A
7
7
8
1
A1
A2
Z
4
333
B-64647EN/01
Black Blue Gray Navy

1 Base background RGB(0, 0, 0) RGB(75, 85, RGB(58, 76, RGB(7, 9, 57)
color 95) 87)
2 Tile color RGB(54, 54, RGB(196, RGB(54, 54, RGB(182,
1 54) 216, 235) 54) 199, 223)
3 Fixed text color RGB(180, RGB(11, 110, RGB(180, RGB(12, 115,
2 230, 220) 130) 230, 220) 133)
4 Warning text color RGB(248, RGB(229, RGB(248, RGB(235, 97,
141, 3) 134, 27) 159, 3) 0)
3 5 Window title color RGB(255,

255, 255)
RGB(255,
255, 255)
RGB(255,
255, 255)
RGB(255,
255, 255)
6 Window frame color RGB(48, 13, RGB(48, 13, RGB(48, 13, RGB(48, 13,
4 (Second layer)
7 Soft key color
133)
RGB(90, 90,
133)
RGB(155,
133)
RGB(125,
133)
RGB(103,
(Base/first layer) 90) 170, 185) 144, 145) 122, 143)
4 8 Soft key color RGB(40, 40,

(Base/second layer) 40)
RGB(52, 70,
88)
RGB(98, 101, RGB(71, 72,
89 73)
A  Individual setting screen
9 18 10 13
7
8 11
A1 12
A2
Z
16
14,15 17
334
B-64647EN/01

9 Cursor color RGB(0, 180, RGB(0, 180, RGB(0, 93, RGB(0, 93,
(With focus) 255) 255) 101) 101)
10 Cursor color RGB(203, RGB(203, RGB(48, 13, RGB(48, 13,
(Without focus) 230, 255) 230, 255) 133) 133) 1
11 Variable text color RGB(245, RGB(0, 0, 0) RGB(255, RGB(0, 0, 0)
245, 245) 255, 255)
12 Text color for RGB(0, 0, 0) RGB(0, 0, 0) RGB(0, 0, 0) RGB(0, 0, 0)
2
editable data
13 Window frame
color
RGB(0, 93,
101)
RGB(0, 93,
101)
RGB(0, 93,
101)
RGB(0, 93,
101)
3
(First layer)
14 Soft key color RGB(0, 93,
(First layer window/ 101)
RGB(0, 93,
101)
RGB(0, 93,
101)
RGB(0, 93,
101)
4
first layer)
15 Soft key color RGB(0, 64,
(First layer window/ 59)
RGB(0, 64,
59)
RGB(0, 64,
59)
RGB(0, 64,
59)
4
second layer)
16 Soft key text color
(Enabled)
RGB(245,
245, 245)
RGB(245,
245, 245)
RGB(245,
245, 245)
RGB(245,
245, 245)
A
17 Soft key text color RGB(140, RGB(140, RGB(140, RGB(140,
(Disabled) 140, 140) 140, 140) 140, 140) 140, 140) 7
18 Selected text color RGB(0, 0, 0) RGB(0, 0, 0) RGB(0, 0, 0) RGB(0, 0, 0)
8
A1
A2
Z
335
B-64647EN/01
 Slide
1
2
3
4
4
19,20
A
7 19 Soft key color
Black
RGB(48, 72,
Blue
RGB(48, 72,
Gray
RGB(48, 72,
Navy
RGB(48, 72,
(Slide/first layer) 179) 179) 179) 179)
8 20 Soft key color

(Slide/second
RGB(0, 23,
133)
RGB(0, 23,
133)
RGB(0, 23,
133)
RGB(0, 23,
133)
layer)
A1
A2
Z
336
B-64647EN/01
1
2
3
4
4
21,22
A
21 Soft key color
(Second layer
RGB(115, 50,
146)
RGB(115, 50,
146)
RGB(115, 50,
146)
RGB(115, 50,
146)
7
window/
first layer)
22 Soft key color RGB(48, 13, RGB(48, 13, RGB(48, 13, RGB(48, 13,
8
(Second layer 133) 133) 133) 133)
window/
second layer)
A1
A2
Z
337
B-64647EN/01
A.6　FUNCTION SPECIFICATIONS
A.6
A.6 FUNCTION SPECIFICATIONS

This section describes usable image data and CncAppClient function
1 specifications.
2 A.6.1 CncAppClient Function Specifications

A.6.1
* Use Unicode (UTF-16) for the language code.
3 Table A.6.1 CncAppClient Function Specifications

Item Specification
4 Start client process
Function name BOOL StartAppClient()
4 Argument
Return value Returns TRUE if the process succeeds and FALSE if it fails.
Description Starts the client process.
A To register an application as a client to Application Manager, add this
process to when the application starts.
End client process
7 Function name BOOL EndAppClient()
Argument
8 Return value
Description
Returns TRUE if the process succeeds and FALSE if it fails.
Ends the client process.
To register an application as a client to Application Manager, add this
A1 Register client
process to when the application closes.
Function name BOOL RegisterClient(LPCTSTR appName, UINT msg, HWND winid)

A2 Argument LPCTSTR appName: Application identifier ID
UINT msg: Window message used for notification from Application
Manager
Z HWND winid: Application window handle
Description Registers an application as a client to Application Manager.
To register an application as a client to Application Manager, add this
process after StartAppClient().
When an application registered as a client is inactive (when an
application registered to another iHMI is running), the application is
hidden.
Start application
Function name BOOL ExecuteApp(LPCTSTR appName, LPCTSTR subject)
Argument LPCTSTR appName: Application identifier ID
LPCTSTR subject: Character string (up to 63 characters, nullable)
passed to the application
338
B-64647EN/01
Item Specification
Return value Returns TRUE if the application starts up and FALSE if not.
Description Starts an application with the identifier ID appName. The subject value
is sent to the application.
If the return value is FALSE, the application startup may be in the wait
1
state. If so, do not call other Application Manager functions until the
application is started up.
The wait state can be checked with the IsExecutionPending function. 2
If you start an application by using the ExecuteApp function, the last
activated application will be as follows. 3
Last activated application Display state
Home screen Displayed on
background
4
Application registered to the client Hidden
Other application Displayed on 4
background
Check application startup pending

Function name BOOL IsExecutionPending ()
A
Argument
Return value Returns TRUE if the application startup is in the wait state and FALSE if 7
not.
Description Checks if the application startup is in the wait state. Use this function
after the ExecuteApp function. 8
Check application startup
Function name
Argument
BOOL IsAppExecuted(LPCTSTR appName)
LPCTSTR appName: Application identifier ID
A1
Description Checks if an application with the identifier ID appName is running. A2
Retrieve application window handle
Function name
Argument
HWND GetAppHwnd(LPCTSTR appName)
LPCTSTR appName: Application identifier ID
Z
Return value Returns the application window handle if the process succeeds and
NULL if it fails.
Description Retrieves the window handle of an application with the identifier ID
appName.
Activate application
Function name BOOL ActivateApp(LPCTSTR appName, bool active)
Argument LPCTSTR appName: Application identifier ID
boot active: Active state
Description Activates an application with the identifier ID appName if active is true
and deactivates it if active is false.
339
B-64647EN/01
Item Specification
Retrieve application subject value
Function name LPCTSTR GetSubject()
Argument
1 Return value Returns the application subject value if the process succeeds and
NULL if it fails.
2 Description Retrieves the application subject value.
Set application subject value
Function name BOOL SetAppSubject(LPCTSTR appName, LPCTSTR subject)
3 Argument LPCTSTR appName: Application identifier ID

LPCTSTR subject: Character string (up to 63 characters, nullable)
passed to the application
4 Return value Returns TRUE if the process succeeds and FALSE if it fails.
Description Passes the subject value to an application with the identifier ID
appName.
4 Set application display size
Function name BOOL SetAppDisplay(UINT32 inchx10, const POINT* pt)
A Argument UINT32 inchx10: Value ten times the application display size (select
104, 150, or 190).
const POINT* pt: Application display position (coordinate on the upper
left corner).
Description Set the application display size. You can apply the settings by saving
8 the changes (executing SaveApps()) and restarting the application

(executing RestartApps()).
Save setting changes
A1 Function name BOOL SaveApps()

Argument
A2 Description Saves the setting changes. This applies the changes to setting.xml.
End Application
Z Function name BOOL QuitApps()

Argument
Description Exits the iHMI application.
Restart application
Function name BOOL RestartApps()
Argument
Description Restarts the iHMI application.
340
B-64647EN/01
Item Specification
Call Home screen
Function name BOOL GoAppHome()
Argument
Return value Returns TRUE if the process succeeds and FALSE if it fails. 1
Description Calls the Home screen.
Call last screen
Function name BOOL GoAppBack()
2
Argument
Return value Returns TRUE if the process succeeds and FALSE if it fails. 3
Description Calls the last used screen.
Retrieve currently selected display language
Function name LPCTSTR GetAppLanguage()
4
Argument
Return value Two-character language code defined in ISO639-1. (en, ja, etc.) 4
However, a three-character code is used instead only for Simplified
Chinese (chs) and Traditional Chinese (cht).
The language settings are defined in settings.xml. A
Description Retrieves the display language currently selected.
When the language is changed, a message is sent to show that the
wParam value of the window message specified in the argument of the 7
RegisterClient function is LANGUAGE_CHANGED.
Set display language
Function name BOOL SetAppLanguage(LPCTSTR language) 8
Argument Two-character language code defined in ISO639-1. (en, ja, etc.)
However, a three-character code is used instead only for Simplified
Chinese (chs) and Traditional Chinese (cht). A1
The language settings are defined in settings.xml.
Return value
Description
Sets the language displayed on iHMI.
A2
Retrieve currently selected theme
Function name LPCTSTR GetAppColor() Z
Argument
Return value Character string representing the theme. (black, navy, gray, blue)
Character strings black, navy, gray, and blue correspond to colors
"black", "navy", "gray", and "blue gray" respectively.
Description Retrieves the theme currently selected.
When the theme is changed, a message is sent to show that the
wParam value of the window message specified in the argument of the
RegisterClient function is COLOR_CHANGED.
341
B-64647EN/01
Item Specification
Set theme
Function name BOOL SetAppColor(LPCTSTR color)
Argument Character string representing the theme. (black, navy, gray, blue)
1 Character strings black, navy, gray, and blue correspond to colors
"black", "navy", "gray", and "blue gray" respectively.
Description Sets the theme for iHMI.
Lock key input
3 Function name
Argument
BOOL SetAppKeyLockBits(UINT32 bits)
Bit string specifying a key to be locked.
Bit0 - 9: VK_NUMPAD0 to VK_NUMPAD9 (corresponding to function
4 keys)
Bit10: VK_MENU (ALT key) + VK_TAB
Applies a lock with bit ON or releases a lock with bit OFF.
4 Return value
Description
Applies a lock on the specified key input. A value specified by the
argument is reflected immediately.
A This function is available with iHMI Ver. 4.0 onward.

Retrieve information center display status
Function name BOOL IsInfoCenterVisible()
7 Argument
Return value Returns TRUE if the information center is displayed and FALSE if not.
8 Description Checks if the information center is displayed on an application.

This function is available with iHMI Ver. 7.0 onward.
A1
A.6.2 CncAppClient Notification Message
A2 A.6.2
Table A.6.2 CncAppClient Notification Message

Z Message Description
APP_ACTIVATED Application becomes active.
APP_DEACTIVATED Application becomes inactive.
APP_SHUTDOWN Application has been exited.
APP_CHANGED Active application has been changed.
APP_SUBJECT_CHANGED Subject has been changed.
APP_ACTIVATING Application is attempting to be active.
COMMAND_COMPLETED Command to Application Manager is completed.
LANGUAGE_CHANGED Display language has been changed.
COLOR_CHANGED Theme color has been changed.
INFOCENTER_SHOWN Information center is displayed.
342
B-64647EN/01
Message Description
INFOCENTER_HIDDEN Information center is hidden.
1
2
3
4
4
A
7
8
A1
A2
Z
343
B-64647EN/01
A.7　RESOURCES REQUIRED FOR EACH FUNCTION
A.7
A.7 RESOURCES REQUIRED FOR EACH

FUNCTION
1
A.7.1 For PANEL iH
2 A.7.1
The PANEL iH has three memory storages: Main memory, Storage 1, and Storage
2. You can select 2, 4, 8, or 16 GB for a CF (compact flash) card used for Storage
2.
3 Select the size of a CF card to be mounted based on the amount of data that can
be saved in the iHMI basic function applications shown in Table A.6.1.1 (b) and
the amount of memory that can be used in the MTB application shown in Table
4 A.6.1.2.
4 A.7.1.1
A.7.1.1
Memory usage in the iHMI basic functions
The following table shows the memory usage in the iHMI basic function
applications. It may increase or decrease when functions are added in the future.
A
Table A.7.1.1 (a) Memory Usage in the iHMI Basic Function Applications
7 Application
Main memory
1 GB
Storage 1
FROM:
Storage 2 (*2)
CF: 2GB CF: 4/8/16 GB
512MB
8 OS+ file system

Home screen
220MB
70MB
120MB
30MB
130MB 140MB
CNC Operation Screen 70MB 100MB 100MB 150MB

Maintenance screen 10MB 10MB
A1 PC Operation 10MB 10MB
Data Logger 20MB 10MB 230MB 650MB
Maintenance Manager 50MB 10MB 130MB 130MB
A2 Tool Manager 30MB 10MB 200MB 350MB
Calendar 20MB 10MB 10MB 20MB
Whiteboard 30MB 10MB 50MB 100MB
Z Manual Viewer 50MB 20MB 100MB 100MB
Browser 30MB 10MB
SERVO Viewer 70MB 15MB 100MB 300MB
Machining Simulation 50MB 15MB
Total (*1) 730MB 380MB 1 GB 2GB
*1 You can set which applications are registered with the Home screen and
enabled. Therefore, the actual total usage is the total of applications registered
with the Home screen.
*2 The maximum available capacity of some applications varies depending on the
size of Storage 2. For details, see "Table A.7.1.1 (b) Amount of Data That Can
Be Saved in the iHMI Basic Function Applications".
344
B-64647EN/01
The following table shows the differences in the amount of data that can be saved
in the iHMI basic function applications depending on the size of Storage 2.
Table A.7.1.1 (b) Amount of Data That Can Be Saved in the iHMI Basic Function
Applications
1
Storage 2
Application
CF: 2GB CF: 4/8/16 GB
CNC Operation Screen Diagnosis data image
500 KB x 100 images
Diagnosis data image
500 KB x 200 images
2
Tool Manager 1000 tools 2000 tools
Data Logger 230MB
(For 4 hours at 1 ms cycle)
650MB
(For 12 hours at 1 ms cycle)
3
Calendar 10 MB 20 MB
Whiteboard
(20 records, 5 years)
50 records
(20 records, 10 years)
100 records
4
SERVO Viewer 10 records 30 records
4
A.7.1.2 Amount of memory that can be used in the MTB application
A.7.1.2
The machine manufacturers can use the amount of memory shown in Table A
A.6.1.2 for their own application according to the size of the selected Storage 2.
Table A.7.1 Amount of memory that can be used in the MTB application
7
Main memory Storage 2
Application
1 GB CF: 2GB CF: 4GB CF: 8 GB CF: 16GB 8
MTB application 250MB 500MB 1 GB 4GB 10GB
A1
A.7.2
A.7.2
For PANEL iH Pro A2
The PANEL iH Pro has two memory storages: Main memory and storage. You can
select the main memory from the three sizes (2/4/8 GB) and the storage from SSD
(three sizes: 16/32/64 GB) or HDD (500 GB only). The storage is normally Z
partitioned into two areas (Storage 1 and Storage 2).
Select the size of the main memory and storage to be mounted based on the
amount of data that can be saved in the iHMI basic function applications shown in
Table A.6.2.1 (b) and the amount of memory that can be used in the MTB
application shown in Table A.6.2.3 (a) and Table A.6.2.3 (b).
345
B-64647EN/01
A.7.2.1 Memory usage in the iHMI basic functions

The following table shows the memory usage in the iHMI basic function
A.7.2.1
applications. It may increase or decrease when functions are added in the future.
1 Table A.7.2.1 (a) Memory Usage in the iHMI Basic Function Applications
Storage 2 (*2)
2 Application Main memory Storage 1
SSD: 16GB
SSD: 32/64
GB, HDD
OS+ file system 900MB 11GB 100MB 200MB
Home screen 120MB 30MB
3 CNC Operation Screen 110MB 140MB 100MB 150MB
Maintenance screen 20MB 10MB
PC Operation 30MB 10MB
4 Data Logger
Maintenance Manager
40MB
60MB
10MB
10MB
230MB
130MB
650MB
130MB
Tool Manager 40MB 10MB 200MB 350MB
4 Calendar
Whiteboard
40MB
50MB
10MB
10MB
10MB
50MB
20MB
100MB
Manual Viewer 60MB 20MB 100MB 100MB
A Browser
SERVO Viewer
50MB
100MB
10MB
15MB 100MB 300MB
Machining Simulation 50MB 15MB
7 Total (*1) 1670MB 11.3GB 1 GB 2GB
*1 You can set which applications are registered with the Home screen and
enabled. Therefore, the actual total usage is the total of applications
8 registered with the Home screen.
*2 The maximum available capacity of some applications varies depending on the
size of Storage 2. For details, see "Table A.7.2.1 (b) Amount of Data That Can
A1 Be Saved in the iHMI Basic Function Applications".
The following table shows the differences in the amount of data that can be saved
A2 in the iHMI basic function applications depending on the storage size.
Z Table A.7.2.1 (b) Amount of Data That Can Be Saved in the iHMI Basic Function
Applications
Storage 2
Application
SSD (16 GB) SSD: 32/64 GB, HDD
CNC Operation Screen Diagnosis data image Diagnosis data image
500 KB x 100 images 500 KB x 200 images
Tool Manager 1000 tools 2000 tools
Data Logger 230MB 650MB
(For 4 hours at 1 ms cycle) (For 12 hours at 1 ms cycle)
Calendar 10 MB 20 MB
(20 records, 5 years) (20 records, 10 years)
Whiteboard 50 records 100 records
SERVO Viewer 10 records 30 records
346
B-64647EN/01
A.7.2.2 Memory usage in option functions

The following table shows the memory usage in the iHMI option function
A.7.2.2
applications. The option functions require 4 GB or larger main memory.

1
Table A.7.2 Amount of memory that can be used in the MTB application
Application Main memory Storage 1 Storage 2 2
Machine Collision 700MB 50MB 200MB
Avoidance
Cycle Time Estimation 200MB 50MB 300MB 3
Interactive 100MB 50MB 300MB
Programming
4
A.7.2.3 Amount of memory that can be used in the MTB application
A.7.2.1
The machine manufacturers can use the amount of memory shown in Table
4
A.6.2.3 (a) and Table A.6.2.3 (b) for their own application according to the size of
the selected main memory and storage.
A
Table A.7.2.1 (a) Amount of Main Memory That Can Be Used in the MTB
Application 7
Main memory
Application
2GB 4GB 8GB
MTB application 300 MB 1 GB 4GB 8
Table A.7.2.1 (b) Amount of Storage Memory That Can Be Used in the MTB A1
Application
Application
storage
SSD: 16GB SSD: 32GB SSD: 64GB HDD
A2
MTB application 1 GB 10GB 40GB 460GB
347
B-64647EN/01
1
2
3
4
4
A
7
8
A1
A2
Z
348
ADDITIONAL INFORMATION
Description Added in FANUC iHMI SETUP MANUAL
1. Type of Technical Document to Be Revised
Name
FANUC iHMI SETUP MANUAL
Specification B-64647EN/01-01
2. Contents of Revision
Newly created/
Added Application
Modified/ timing
Category Name/Description
Deleted
Basic functions
Option functions
Unit
Maintenance parts
Precautions
Correction of errors
Ver. 12.1 -> Ver. 14.1: Added descriptions
Others due to specification addition Added
Name Description Added in FANUC iHMI

SETUP MANUAL
Figure Submitt
01 171016 Number B-64647EN/01-01 ed by
Ver Designed
sion Date Contents of revision FANUC Corporation Page 1/21
by
The description of "Customizing the vertical soft keys" is as follows:
Starting a user application from a vertical soft key

When you customize a vertical soft key on the CNC operation screen, you can call the
corresponding user application registered to iHMI by pressing the customized soft key.
■ Overview of vertical soft key customization

You can customize blank vertical soft keys on the second page (except for some fixed keys).
Vertical soft keys
The number of soft keys that can be customized varies depending on the display unit size as
shown in the table below:
Table 1 Number of Soft Keys That Can Be Customized

Display unit size Number of soft keys that can be customized
10.4" 6
15" 6
19" 9
 If you cannot call an application from a customized vertical soft key, the cause is
MEMO
displayed in the message box. Remove the cause and call the application again.

SETUP MANUAL
Figure Submitt
01 171016 Number B-64647EN/01-01 ed by
Ver Designed
by
■ Vertical soft key setting file
To customize a vertical soft key, define the vertical soft key array in the vertical soft key setting
file.
The specification of the vertical soft key setting file is as shown in the table below:
Table 2 Specification of the Vertical Soft Key Setting File

Item Description
Description format XML (Ver.1.0)
Text encoding UTF-16 LE (with BOM)
File name 10.4-inch VSKeySetting104.xml If the left file does not exist, the
display following file is loaded:
15-inch display VSKeySetting150.xml VSKeySetting.xml
19-inch display VSKeySetting190.xml
Saved location PANEL iH \Storage Card2\FANUC\iHMI\MTB\CNCOpera\Setting\VSKey
(folder) PANEL iH Pro D:\FANUC\iHMI\MTB\CNCOpera\Setting\VSKey
(SSD type)
PANEL iH Pro C:\ProgramData\FANUC\iHMI\MTB\CNCOpera\Setting\VSKey
(HDD type)

SETUP MANUAL
Figure Submitt
01 171016 Number B-64647EN/01-01 ed by
Ver Designed
by
Elements described in the vertical soft key setting file are as shown in the table below:
Table 3 Elements Described in the Vertical Soft Key Setting File

Tag name Description Note
settings Root element of the vertical soft key Be sure to describe at least one in the
settings. file.
page Element that represents one page of Be sure to describe at least one as a
the vertical soft keys. child node of settings.
If blank is specified, the vertical soft
key page will be all blank.
entry Element that represents one soft key. If blank is specified, the corresponding
You can define multiple soft keys, and soft key will be blank.
they are placed in the order that they
are defined.
name Specify the identifier ID of an If nothing or blank is specified, the
application to start with the soft key. corresponding soft key will be blank.
(*1)
subject Specify a character string to be passed This element is optional.
when an application to start with the
soft key is called. (*1)
The parameter can contain up to 63
characters.
image Specify the name of an icon image to If nothing or an invalid file is specified,
be displayed on the soft key (For the corresponding soft key will be
details, see Table 4). blank.
key Specify a function key that works as This element is optional.
the soft key shortcut. If an invalid value or blank is specified,
the shortcut will be disabled.
The function keys corresponding to
character strings that can be specified
are as follows:
Configurable Function key
character
string
FUNCKEY5 <S1>
FUNCKEY6 <SHIFT> + <S1>
FUNCKEY7 <S2>
(*1) For details on identifier IDs and character strings passed when an application is called, see
"2.2.1 Application Definition File".
The format of icon images that can be displayed on the vertical soft keys is as shown in the
table below:
Table 3 Format of Icon Images That Can Be Displayed on the Vertical Soft Keys
Item Description
Format PNG (alpha channel allowed)
Bit depth 32-bit
Display 10.4-inch 33 x 33 pixels  The display size is automatically adjusted to the
size display specified size when drawing.
15-inch display 51 x 51 pixels  The 15/19-inch display unit icon can be used
19-inch display 51 x 51 pixels for the 10.4-inch display unit.
Saved PANEL iH \Storage Card2\FANUC\iHMI\MTB\CNCOpera\Setting\VSKey\image
location PANEL iH Pro D:\FANUC\iHMI\MTB\CNCOpera\Setting\VSKey\image
(folder) (SSD type)
PANEL iH Pro C:\ProgramData\FANUC\iHMI\MTB\CNCOpera\Setting\VSKey\image
(HDD type)

SETUP MANUAL
Figure Submitt
01 171016 Number B-64647EN/01-01 ed by
Ver Designed
by
■ Description example of the vertical soft key setting file

<settings>

<page>

<entry>

<name>App1</name>

<subject>ExtraParameter</subject>

<image>App1Image.png</image>

<key>FUNCKEY5</key>
</entry>

<entry>
</entry>

<entry/>


<entry>

<name>App2</name>
<image>App2Image.png</image>
</entry>

</page>
</settings>
 If you specify soft keys (entry elements) more than the number of soft keys that can be
customized in one page (page element), the excess soft keys will not be displayed.
Example: If seven entry elements are defined for the 10.4-inch display unit, the seventh
MEMO entry element will not be displayed.
 If the number of soft keys (entry elements) specified in one page (page element) is less
than the number of soft keys that can be customized, the shortage soft keys will be
blank.

SETUP MANUAL
Figure Submitt
01 171016 Number B-64647EN/01-01 ed by
Ver Designed
by
The description of "Notes on the Japanese/Chinese input function" is as follows:
Notes on the Japanese/Chinese input function

This section describes notes on application development.
■ Common to PANEL iH/PANEL iH Pro

Operation verification
Before using this function, verify the operation thoroughly including applications created by the
machine manufacturer.
How to enable the Japanese/Chinese input function

You can also enable this function by specifying enabled in the ime attribute in the iHMI
configuration file (settings-general.xml) <languages> tag.

<settings>
:
<languages ime="enabled"/>
</settings>
In PANEL iH Pro, if this function is enabled, the Windows keyboard settings are changed at
iHMI startup, and you may be prompted to restart the machine.
To prohibit the Japanese/Chinese input, specify prohibited in the ime attribute in the iHMI
configuration file (settings-general.xml) <languages> tag.

<settings>
:
<languages ime="prohibited"/>
</settings>
The Japanese/Chinese input function is disabled, and the "Japanese And Chinese Input" item
is not displayed on the setting screen.
 To enable the setting, you need to restart the machine.

MEMO
 For details on the iHMI configuration file, see "2.2.2 iHMI Whole Configuration File".
How the Japanese/Chinese input function is achieved

This function is achieved by using Windows standard IMEs. To input Japanese/Chinese in
applications, use Windows API IMM (Input Method Manager) functions or Text Service
Framework (PANEL iH Pro only).

SETUP MANUAL
Figure Submitt
01 171016 Number B-64647EN/01-01 ed by
Ver Designed
by
Trigger for the Japanese/Chinese input function
If Japanese/Chinese input is enabled, when an application is displayed on top, the window
message "WM_INPUTLANGCHANGEREQUEST" is sent to the application. The application
can switch the input language by responding to this message.
 For details on Windows API IMM functions, Text Service Framework, and
MEMO WM_INPUTLANGCHANGEREQUEST message, see MSDN
(https://msdn.microsoft.com/).
■ PANEL iH
Displaying the language bar
The language bar is hidden by default. You can show the language bar by setting the following
registries:
[HKEY_CURRENT_USER\Software\Microsoft\IMEJP\3.1\Window]
"IsMinimized"=dword:0
[HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\Software\Microsoft\IMEJP\3.1\Window]
"IsMinimized"=dword:0
[HKEY_CURRENT_USER\Software\Microsoft\Windows\CurrentVersion\CHSIME03]
"ShowState"=dword:1
[HKEY_CURRENT_USER\ControlPanel\Chinese IME UI\Settings]
"ShowState"=dword:1
■ PANEL iH Pro
Inputting alphabets from the MDI keyboard
When this function is enabled, the alphabet input operation from the MDI keyboard changes.
For example, the operation when the <G> key is pressed on the MDI keyboard is as follows:
When disabled: When the user presses the <G> key, the MDI keyboard driver notifies the OS
that the keys have been pressed in the order of <Shift> On -> <g> -> <Shift>
Off.
This results in inputting the upper-case letter "G" to the application.
When enabled: The MDI keyboard driver sets <CapsLock> On, and when the user presses
the <G> key, the driver notifies the OS that the key <g> has been pressed.
This results in inputting the upper-case letter "G" to the application.
 The above operation change does not affect an application that obtains input characters
using Windows message WM_CHAR.
Meanwhile, it may affect an application that monitors the keyboard operation using the
Windows API GetKeyState function.
Before using this function, be sure to verify the application operation.
MEMO  If this operation affects an application, prohibit Japanese/Chinese input in the iHMI
configuration file (see "How to enable the Japanese/Chinese input function") and set the
following registry:
[HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\SOFTWARE\FANUC\MMCMDI]
"CapitalKey"=dword:0

SETUP MANUAL
Figure Submitt
01 171016 Number B-64647EN/01-01 ed by
Ver Designed
by
Changing the keyboard layout
When this function is enabled, the keyboard layout for Japanese input changes from the
Japanese 106 keyboard to the English 101 keyboard.
If this operation affects an application, prohibit Japanese/Chinese input in the iHMI
configuration file (see "How to enable the Japanese/Chinese input function") and set the
following registry:
[HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\SYSTEM\CurrentControlSet\Services\i8042prt\Parameters]
"LayerDriver JPN"="kbd106.dll"
"OverrideKeyboardIdentifier"="PCAT_106KEY"
MEMO  To enable the setting, you need to restart the machine.
Displaying the language bar

The language bar is hidden by default. You can show the language bar by adding the langbar
attribute in the iHMI configuration file (settings-general.xml) <languages> tag as follows:

<settings>
:
<languages langbar="511"/>
</settings>
A value specified in the langbar attribute is the same as the argument (hexadecimal format) of
the ITfLangBarMgr interface and ShowFloating method in Text Service Framework.

 For details on the iHMI configuration file, see "2.2.2 iHMI Whole Configuration File".
MEMO
 For details on the ITfLangBarMgr interface and ShowFloating method, see MSDN
(https://msdn.microsoft.com/).

SETUP MANUAL
Figure Submitt
01 171016 Number B-64647EN/01-01 ed by
Ver Designed
by
Learning result of text conversion
The learning result of text conversion is saved in the C drive by default. Therefore, if the EWF
(Enhanced Write Filter) is used, the learning result is lost when the machine is turned off. To
retain the learning result even after power-off when the EWF is used, change the IME
properties setting so that the user dictionary file is saved in the D drive.
 Saving the learning result is supported for Japanese IME only.

 For details on the EWF, see "8.3 OS PROTECTION BY THE EWF FUNCTION" in
MEMO "FANUC PANEL i CONNECTION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL" (B-64223EN-1).
 For details on the IME properties, see the Windows Help.
<https://support.microsoft.com/en-us/products/windows?os=windows-7>

SETUP MANUAL
Figure Submitt
01 171016 Number B-64647EN/01-01 ed by
Ver Designed
by
The description of the customization function for the tool list (tree view) on the tool individual settings screen
is as follows:
■ Overview
You can customize the tool list (tree view) on the tool individual settings screen.
To customize the tool list (tree view), define the following items in the customization definition
file:
 Tree name
 Tree order
 Tool data items

SETUP MANUAL
Figure Submitt
01 171016 Number B-64647EN/01-01 ed by
Ver Designed
by
Description example of the customization definition file
#Perform tree customize of Individual Tool Settings: YES or NO
INDIVIDUAL_TREE_CUSTOMIZE=YES
#Display item list
TREE_ITEM={
[Tool]
Offset, OFS_NUMBER,TIP
sample1,OFS_NUMBER,TIP,MAG
[Holder]
}
:
Adding to the individual tool settings screen tree

An optional tree item defined in the customization setting file is displayed as a child node of the
tool management number or group number in the individual tool settings screen tree.
If a tree item displayed by customization is selected, the tool data item defined in the
customization setting file is displayed in the tool data.
If the tree name does not fit in one line, it is displayed in two lines.
If the tree name does not fit in two lines, the trailing characters are omitted.
While a tree item displayed by customization is selected, the tool image preview shows "Tool
Image".

SETUP MANUAL
Figure Submitt
01 171016 Number B-64647EN/01-01 ed by
Ver Designed
by
■ Customizable tool data items
Customizable tool data items that can be linked to the defined tree are as follows:
Table 1 Customizable Tool Data Items

No. Item Display condition Customizable
Option
Tool life Tool
Standard
function function
1 No. ○ ○
2 Group Number ○ ○
3 Number in Group ○ ○
4 Tool Name ○ ○
5 Tool Number (T) ○ ○
6 Option Group Number ○ (*1) ○
7 Magazine Number ○ ○
8 Pot Number ○ ○
9 Origin Magazine ○ (*2) ○
10 Origin Pot ○ (*2) ○
11 Tool Management ○ ○
12 Tool Size ○ (*2) ○
13 Data Access ○ ○
14 Data Search ○ ○
15 Tool Life Count Period ○ (*3) ○
16 Spindle Speed (S) ○ ○
17 Feedrate (F) ○ ○
18 Life Count Type ○ ○ ○
19 Life Consumption ○ ○ ○
20 Tool Life Counter ○ ○ ○
21 Maximum Tool Life Value ○ ○ ○
22 Forenoticed Tool Life ○ (*1) ○ ○
23 Tool Life State ○ ○ ○
24 Path ○ (*9) (*9) ○
25 Coord. System ○ (*9) (*9) ○
26 Length Offset No. (H) (*4) ○ ○ ○
27 Diameter Offset No. (D) (*4) ○ ○ ○
28 Shape Compensation No. ○ ○
(TG) (*4)
29 Wear Compensation No. ○ ○
(TW) (*4)
30 Length Offset No. (OFS) (*4) ○ (*9) (*9) ○
31 Offset Data (*5) ○ ○
32 Virtual Tool Tip Direction ○ ○
33 Tool Type (*6) (*7) ○ ○
34 Oversize Tool Geometry ○ (*2) ○
Number
35 Tool Model Number ○ ○
36 Tool Image ○ ×
37 Flutes ○ ○
38 Holder Shape (*6) ○ ○
39 Tool Setting Position ○ ○
40 Size Data 1 to 8 (*6) (*8) ○ ○
41 Comment ○ ○
42 Customized Data 0 to 40 ○ (*10) ○
43 Holder Model Number ○ ○
44 Holder Image ○ ×
45 Use Tool Number ○ ○
46 Tool parts image ○ ×

SETUP MANUAL
Figure Submitt
01 171016 Number B-64647EN/01-01 ed by
Ver Designed
by
*1: You need to set the tool life management B function (parameter LFB (No.6805#4) = 1).
*2: The tool management expansion B function option is required.
*3: The tool management expansion function or tool management expansion B function option is required.
*4: The display items vary depending on the option or parameter.For detail, see "A.3.3 Setting offset numbers
for each tool" in "FANUC iHMI Home Screen OPERATOR'S MANUAL (B-64644EN)".
*5: The display items vary depending on the option or parameter.For details, see "3.2.1.4 Managing offset
data for each tool" in "FANUC iHMI Home Screen OPERATOR'S MANUAL (B-64644EN)".
*6: To set data for 32 pairs or more, the tool geometry dimension data option is required.
*7: The tool geometry dimension data tool type addition option is required for some tool types.
*8: The display items vary depending on the tool type.For details, see "3.2.1.5 Tool Geometry Dimension Data
That Can Be Set" in "FANUC iHMI Home Screen OPERATOR'S MANUAL (B-64644EN)".
*9: This item is hidden because the settings are not necessary. Or, it is hidden depending on the system
configuration.
*10: The tool management function customized data expansion (5 to 20 or 5 to 40) is required for Customized
Data 5 to 40.

SETUP MANUAL
Figure Submitt
01 171016 Number B-64647EN/01-01 ed by
Ver Designed
by
■ Customization setting file
Define the following items in the customization setting file:
 Tree name
 Tree order
 Tool data items
In the Tool Manager, the customization setting file is loaded to determine items to be displayed
on the individual settings screen when an application is started.
Description rules for individual settings screen tree customization in the customization
setting file
Describe the definition of the customization setting file in the following setting for individual
settings screen tree customization:
TREE_ITEM={}
Individual settings screen tree customization is disabled under one of the following conditions:
 There is no tree customization definition in the customization setting file.
 The customization setting file does not exist.
The following shows the definition types of the customization setting file:
Table 2 Definition Types of the Customization Setting File

Function Definition type Details
Tree INDIVIDUAL_TREE_ Describe it in upper case from the beginning.
customization CUSTOMIZE When INDIVIDUAL_TREE_CUSTOMIZE=YES is set,
enable/disable individual settings screen tree customization is
enabled.
Item definition TREE_ITEM={ Describe it in upper case from the beginning.
It indicates the definition start of individual settings
screen tree customization.
} Describe it from the beginning.
It indicates the definition end of customization.
Tree name [TOOL] List one name you want to display in the tree in each
Tree order [HOLDER] line.
Optional tree name Tree items are displayed in the order that the names
are described in the customization setting file.
Up to two optional tree names can be defined.
Tool data item Symbol name Describe symbol names for items you want to display,
each separated by a comma, following the defined
optional tree name.
Items are displayed in the order that the symbol
names are described in the customization setting file.
For details on the symbol name types of tool data
items, see "Table 3 Correspondence Table for Display
Symbols".
Comment # Putting # at the beginning treats the line as a
comment line. A comment line does not affect the
customization setting behavior.
Use a comment line to leave a note in the
customization setting file.

SETUP MANUAL
Figure Submitt
01 171016 Number B-64647EN/01-01 ed by
Ver Designed
by
Table 3 Correspondence Table for Display Symbols
No. Item Symbol name
1 No. NUMBER
2 Group Number GROUP
3 Number in Group GROUPNUM
4 Tool Name T_NAME
5 Tool Number (T) T_CODE
6 Option Group Number O_GROUP
7 Magazine Number MAG
8 Pot Number POT
9 Origin Magazine O_MAG
10 Origin Pot O_POT
11 Tool Management T_MANAGE
12 Tool Size T_SIZE
13 Data Access DATA_ACCS
14 Data Search DATA_SRCH
15 Tool Life Count Period L_PERIOD
16 Spindle Speed (S) SPEED
17 Feedrate (F) FEEDRATE
18 Life Count Type L_TYPE
19 Life Consumption L_CONSUM
20 Tool Life Counter L_COUNT
21 Maximum Tool Life Value L_MAX
22 Forenoticed Tool Life L_NOTICE
23 Tool Life State L_STATUS
24 Path PATH
25 Coord. System COORDINATE
26 Length Offset No. (H) OFS_NUMBER
27 Diameter Offset No. (D)
28 Shape Compensation No. (TG)
29 Wear Compensation No. (TW)
30 Length Offset No. (OFS)
31 Offset Data OFS_DATA
32 Virtual Tool Tip Direction TIP
33 Tool Type T_TYPE
34 Oversize Tool Geometry Number T_GEONUM
35 Tool Model Number T_MODEL
36 Flutes FLUTES
37 Holder Shape HOLDER
38 Tool Setting Position SETTING
39 Size Data 1 to 8 T_SIZEDAT
40 Comment COMMENT
41 Customized Data 0 to 40 CUSTOM
42 Holder Model Number H_MODEL
43 Use Tool Number T_USENUM

SETUP MANUAL
Figure Submitt
01 171016 Number B-64647EN/01-01 ed by
Ver Designed
by
 The customization setting is disabled under one of the following conditions:
 [Tool] or [Holder] is not described.
 Three or more optional tree names were defined.
 The definition of the target tree name is disabled under one of the following conditions:
 There is no tool data item definition in the defined optional tree name.
MEMO
 There is an invalid tool data item definition in the defined optional tree name.
 The definition described last is enabled, and the definitions before that are ignored under
one of the following conditions:
 Multiple [Tool] or [Holder] items were defined.
 Multiple optional tree names were defined.

SETUP MANUAL
Figure Submitt
01 171016 Number B-64647EN/01-01 ed by
Ver Designed
by
The description of the customization function for the table column width in the table display screen is as
follows:
■ Overview
In the table display screen, you can customize the table column size.
The column size can be specified in the MTB customization setting file (custom.txt).
Description example of the MTB customization definition file

#Perform table customize: YES or NO
CUSTOMIZE=YES
#Display item list
TABLE_ITEM={
T_TYPE
L_CONSUM,70
TIP,70
SETTING
・
・
・
#Column Size
T_NAME,100
}
■ Customization setting file

Define the following item in the customization setting file:
 Column size
In the Tool Manager, the customization setting file is loaded to determine items to be displayed
on the table display screen when an application is started.
Description rules for column size customization

Describe the definition of the customization setting file in the following setting for table display
item customization:
TABLE_ITEM={}
Column size customization is disabled, and only display item customization is enabled under
the following condition:
 CUSTOMIZE=YES is defined, but there is no description in TABLE_ITEM={}.

SETUP MANUAL
Figure Submitt
01 171016 Number B-64647EN/01-01 ed by
Ver Designed
by
The following shows the definition types of the customization setting file:
Table 1 Definition Types of the Customization Setting File

Item definition TABLE_ITEM={ Describe it in upper case from the beginning.
It indicates the definition start of table display item
customization.
} Describe it from the beginning.
It indicates the definition end of customization.
Column size Positive integer Describe the column size, following the display item symbol
(Unit: px) for a tool data item for which you want to set the column
size, separated by a comma.
The maximum size is the default value, and the minimum
size is 50. If a specified number is out of range, the default
value is used.
A tool data item without the column size is displayed at the
default size.
For details on display item symbols for which the column
width can be set, see "Table 2 Correspondence Table for
Display Symbols".
 The definition described first is enabled, and the definitions after that are ignored under
the following condition:
MEMO
 Multiple display item customization definitions were described in the customization
setting file.

SETUP MANUAL
Figure Submitt
01 171016 Number B-64647EN/01-01 ed by
Ver Designed
by
■ Customizable display items
Table 2 Correspondence Table for Display Symbols

No. Item Symbol name Maximum column
Show/hide setting
size (px)
10.4" 15.0" 19.0"
Column size
setting
1 Tool Name (Tool T_NAME × ○ 138 220 240
management function)
Tool Name (Other than tool 198 280 330
management function)
2 Group Number GROUP × ○ 80 80 100
3 Number in Group GROUPNUM × ○ 60 60 80
4 Tool Type T_TYPE ○ × - - -
5 Tool Number (T Code) T_CODE ○ ○ 100 100 120
6 Option Group Number O_GROUP ○ ○ 120 120 120
7 Magazine Number MAG ○ ○ 80 80 100
8 Pot Number POT ○ ○ 80 80 100
9 Origin Magazine O_MAG ○ ○ 80 80 100
10 Origin Pot O_POT ○ ○ 80 80 100
11 Tool Management T_MANAGE ○ ○ 100 100 120
12 Tool Life Count Type L_TYPE ○ ○ 100 100 120
13 Tool Size T_SIZE ○ ○ 120 120 140
14 Data Access DATA_ACCS ○ ○ 120 120 140
15 Data Search DATA_SRCH ○ ○ 120 120 140
16 Tool Life Count Period L_PERIOD ○ ○ 120 120 140
17 Spindle Speed (S) SPEED ○ ○ 100 100 120
18 Feedrate (F) FEEDRATE ○ ○ 100 100 120
19 Tool Life Counter L_COUNT ○ ○ 130 130 130
20 Maximum Tool Life Value L_MAX ○ ○ 130 130 130
21 Forenoticed Tool Life L_NOTICE ○ ○ 130 130 130
22 Tool Life State L_STATUS ○ ○ 150 150 150
23 Tool Life Consumption L_CONSUM ○ × - - -
24 Path PATH ○ ○ 60 60 75
25 Length Offset No. (H) OFS_NUMBER (*1) ○ ○ 80 80 80
26 Diameter Offset No. (D)
27 Shape Compensation No.
(TG)
28 Wear Compensation No.
(TW)
29 Length Offset No. (OFS)
30 Offset Data 1 to 13 OFS_DATA (*2) ○ ○ 120 120 120
31 Virtual Tool Tip Direction TIP ○ ○ 80 80 100
32 Oversize Tool Geometry T_GEONUM ○ ○ 80 80 100
Number
33 Flutes FLUTES ○ ○ 80 80 100
34 Holder Shape HOLDER ○ ○ 80 80 100
35 Tool Setting Position SETTING ○ ○ 80 80 100
36 Size Data 1 to 8 T_SIZEDAT (*3) ○ ○ 100 100 120
37 Customized Data 0 to 40 CUSTOM (*4) ○ ᇞ 100 100 120
(*5)
35 Coord. System COORDINATE ○ ○ 120 120 140
36 Catalog No. CATALOG (*6) ○ ○ 90 90 90
37 Conditions

SETUP MANUAL
Figure Submitt
01 171016 Number B-64647EN/01-01 ed by
Ver Designed
by
(*1) When OFS_NUMBER is defined, all of Nos. 22 to 26 that are viewable are displayed.
(*2) When OFS_DATA is defined, all of Offset Data 1 to 13 that are viewable are displayed.
You can select them individually by defining OFS_DATA1 to 13.
(*3) When T_SIZEDAT is defined, all of Dimension Data 1 to 8 that are viewable are displayed.
You can select them individually by defining T_SIZEDAT1 to 8.
(*4) When CUSTOM is defined, all of Customized Data 0 to 40 that are viewable are displayed.
You can select them individually by defining CUSTOM0 to 40.
(*5) For Customized Data 0, the column size cannot be customized. For Customized Data 1 to 40, the column
size can be customized.
(*6) When CATALOG is defined, Catalog No. and Conditions are displayed.
However, only Catalog No. is displayed depending on the machine configuration.

SETUP MANUAL
Figure Submitt
01 171016 Number B-64647EN/01-01 ed by
Ver Designed
by
The following description was added:
2.4.2.6 Outputting the estimation result to an XML file

You can output the estimation result displayed on the screen to an XML file.
The estimation result output to a file can be used for other applications.
Estimation result output settings

Use the following procedure to enable the estimation result output:
Open the following setting file (text file):
File location: D:\FANUC\iHMI\MTB\CycleTimeEstimation\Setting
File name: Setting_data.txt
Change the following setting in the file to "YES" and save it.
[Result]
OUTPUT_RESULT = YES
Output timing and output location of the estimation result file

When the estimation result output is set to be enabled, the estimation result file is output at the
following timings:
 When estimation is completed
 When estimation data update is completed
The output destination and file name are as follows:

 Output destination: D:\FANUC\iHMI\MTB\CycleTimeEstimation\Result
 File name: Result.xml
Only one estimation result is retained for each program and is overwritten every time
estimation is executed.
When the estimation result output file is opened in an application, it must be read-only.
MEMO Close the file immediately when necessary work is done after it is opened.
This is because the estimation result file cannot be updated while it is open in an
application.
The estimation result file cannot be opened in an application while it is being written.

SETUP MANUAL
Figure Submitt
01 171016 Number B-64647EN/01-01 ed by
Ver Designed
by
Description Added/modified in FANUC iHMI SETUP MANUAL
1. Type of Technical Document to Be Revised
Name
Description Added/modified in FANUC iHMI SETUP MANUAL
Specification B-64647EN/01-2
2. Contents of Revision
Newly
created/
Added Application
Category Name/Description Modified/ timing
Deleted
Basic functions
Option functions
Unit
Maintenance parts
Precautions
Correction of keys that can be specified as
shortcut keys Modify
Correction of errors
Ver. 14.1 -> Ver. 16.1: Added descriptions due to
Others specification addition Add
Description Added in
Name
Figure Submitt
01 180202 Newly registration Number B-64647EN/01-2 ed by
Ver Designed
sion Date by Contents of Revision FANUC Corporation Page 1/5
The following descriptions about keys that can be specified as shortcut keys of "<key> tags" in "Table 2.2.1.2
<shortcuts> Tag Descriptions" in "2.2.1.2 Setting shortcut keys" was corrected.
Due to this correction, the content of <shortcuts> tags in “■ Description example of setting file”was also
corrected.
(Description of <key> tags)

The following keys can be specified as shortcut keys:
FUNCKEY1: <PROG> key
FUNCKEY2: <OFFSET> key
FUNCKEY3: <MESSAGE> key
FUNCKEY4: <GRAPH> key
FUNCKEY5: <CUSTOM1> key
FUNCKEY6: <CUSTOM2> key
FUNCKEY7: <SYSTEM> key
(Content of <shortcuts> tags in “■ Description example of setting file”)
<shortcuts>
<entry>
<key>FUNCKEY1</key>
<name>App02</name>
<subject>open,Main</ subject >
</entry>
<entry invalidname="App01">
<key>FUNCKEY5</key>
<name>App03</name>
</entry>
</shortcuts>
Name
Figure Submitt
Ver Designed
The following description was added:
2.4.1.3 Limiting the display items in the tool catalog data management
screen
When reflecting the catalog data set as reference data to the NC tool database, the items
displayed in the tool catalog data management screen will be limited to the items in the
“reference data”.
To enable this setting, add the definition that is marked to the customization setting file that is
stored in the following location:
%APPDATA%\MTB\ToolManager\custom.txt
CATALOG_DISPLAY_ONLY_NC_DATA=YES
Table 2.4.1.3 List of Reference Data Items when Reflecting Catalog Data
No. Tool Type Item name of tool catalog data (source) Item name of tool NC
data (destination)
1 - TOOL Catalog No. Catalog No.
2 TOOL Tool Name Tool Name
3 TOOL Tool Type Tool Type
4 TOOL Tool Image Tool Image
5 TOOL Comment Comment
6 TOOL Flutes Flutes
7 Tool Part Tool Model Number Tool Model Number
8 Tool Part Tool parts image Tool parts image
9 Insert Geometry Type -
Tool Part
(*2)
10 Holder Part Holder Model Number Holder Model Number
11 Holder Part Holder Image Holder Image
12 Holder Geometry Type -
Holder Part
(*2)
13 Holder Part Cutting Angle Cutting Angle
14 Tool Part Nose Angle Nose Angle
General Tool
15 Tool Part Cut Edge Length (*1) Tip Width
16 Tool Part Tip Thickness Tip Thickness
18 Threading Tool Tool Part Cut Edge Length (*1) Tip Width
21 Grooving Tool Tool Part Cut Edge Length Tip Length
23 Tool Part Inscribed Circle Diameter Tip Length
Button Turning
24 Tool Part Inscribed Circle Diameter Tip Width
Tool
26 Holder Part Cutting Angle Cutting Angle
27 Point Corner Tool Part Nose Angle Nose Angle
28 Straight Tool Tool Part Cut Edge Length (*1) Tip Width
31 Versatile Tool Tool Part Cut Edge Length Tip Length
34 Drilling Tool Tool Part Available Length Tip Length
35 Tool Part Machining Diameter Radius
Name
Figure Submitt
Ver Designed
No. Tool Type Item name of tool catalog data (source) Item name of tool NC
data (destination)
36 Tool Part Machining Diameter Cutter Diameter
37 Chamfering Tool Max. Cut Depth/Available
Tool Part Cutter Length
Length
38 Max. Cut Depth/Min.
Flat End Mill Tool Part Tip Length
Cutting Width
Tool
40 Max. Cut Depth/Min.
Ball End Mill Tool Part Tip Length
Cutting Width
Tool
42 Tool Part Screw Part Length Tip Length
Tap Tool
43 Tool Part Screw Part Diameter Radius
44 Tool Part Function Length Tip Length
Reamer Tool
46 Holder Part Total Length Tip Length
Boring Tool
47 Holder Part Function Width Radius
48 Max. Cut Depth/Max.
Cutting Width/Min.
Holder Part Tip Length
Face Mill Tool Cutting Width/Cutting
Width/Function Length
49 Holder Part Machining Diameter Radius
*1： When the insert geometry type is a parallelogram or rectangle, the display item “Tip Width” will become
referenced.
*2： This is used as a reference item when reflecting data, but will be displayed as a marker for displaying
dimension data items.
This may not be displayed depending on the tool type.
Name
Figure Submitt
Ver Designed
Due to the addition of the function to sort tool data items, the following description for “2.4.1.6 Customization of
the tool list (tree display) on the tool individual settings screen”was changed (only the added/changed parts are
listed):
 Overview
You can customize the tool list (tree display) in the tool individual settings screen.
To customize the tool list (tree display), define the following item in the customization setting
file.
 Tree name
 Tree order
 Tool data item
 Order of tool data item
Description example customization setting file

#Perform tree customize of Individual Tool Settings: YES or NO
INDIVIDUAL_TREE_CUSTOMIZE=YES
#Perform tool data sorting in customization of individual tree: YES or NO
INDIVIDUAL_TREE_CUSTOMIZE_SORT=YES
#Display item list
TREE_ITEM={
[Tool]
Offset, OFS_NUMBER,TIP
sample1,OFS_NUMBER,TIP,MAG
[Holder]
}
:
Table 2.4.1.6 (b) Definition Types of the Customization Setting File

Enable/disable INDIVIDUAL_TREE_ Describe in upper case from the beginning.
sorting tool data CUSTOMIZE_SORT If “INDIVIDUAL_TREE_CUSTOMIZE_SORT=YES” is
items defined when tree customization is enabled
(INDIVIDUAL_TREE_CUSTOMIZE=YES), sorting tool
data items will be enabled.
Tool data item Symbol name Symbol names are written divided by commas for
each item to be displayed, and continuously after the
defined tree name.
The order of displayed items corresponds to the order
of display item symbols written in the customization
setting file when sorting of tool data items is enabled
(INDIVIDUAL_TREE_CUSTOMIZE_SORT=YES).
See “Table 2.4.1.6 (c) Display Symbol
Correspondence Table” for symbol name types of
tool data items.
Name
Figure Submitt
Ver Designed
B-64647EN/01
INDEX 1
A CONFIGURATION FILES THAT AFFECT THE 2

Adding a shutdown button ................................ 27 ENTIRE iHMI ............................................... 17
Adding an Application to the iHMI ................... 186 Configuring the individual path settings .......... 149
Adding an auxiliary function time ...................... 58 Creating a 3D machine model ......................... 125 3
Adding status icons and character string  Creating a New Operator's Panel Screen ....... 196
display .......................................................... 29 Creating a Program Storage File (Ncprog.bin) 181
Alarm and operator message types that can be CREATING A USER APPLICATION .............. 185 4
added ........................................................... 36 Creating different language messages ............. 50
Amount of memory that can be used in the MTB Creating failure diagnosis messages ................ 42
application ........................................ 345, 347 CREATING PROGRAM STORAGE FILES .... 181 5
APPENDIX ...................................................... 313 Customizable Applications ................................ 15
Application definition file ........................... 17, 57
APPLICATION IDENTIFIER ID ....................... 314
CUSTOMIZING A SCREEN WITH FANUC
PICTURE ................................................... 196 6
Application Manager ....................................... 189 Customizing applications registered with 
AUTOMATIC DATA BACKUP ........................ 216 the iHMI .......................................................... 2
Auxiliary function time setting window .............. 57 Customizing the Home Screen ......................... 27
7
Customizing the Status Display ........................ 29
B
Backing up iHMI data ............................ 222, 226 D 8
Backing Up to External Memory ..................... 217 DATA BACKUP/RESTORE ............................ 206
DEFINITION OF WARNING, CAUTION, NOTE,
C AND MEMO ................................................ s-1 A1
Changing an auxiliary function time .................. 60 Deleting an auxiliary function time .................... 60
Changing an Operator's Panel Screen ........... 199 Description of the Web browser configuration 
Changing the background of the home screen . 27 file ............................................................... 179 A2
Checking the iHMI version .............................. 220 Diagnosable numbers ....................................... 36
Checking whether the EWF is enabled/disabled 
(for PANEL iH Pro only) ............................. 221
Disabling the EWF .......................................... 227
Display settings of the MEM mode base screen 99
Z
CNC OPERATION SCREEN SWITCHING ID Displaying a specific screen when starting 
(subject VALUE) ........................................ 315 the user application .................................... 194
CncAppClient Function Specifications ............ 338 Displaying custom macro variable names ......... 86
CncAppClient Notification Message ................ 342 Displaying custom macro variable numbers and
Conditions to use the machining simulation  values ........................................................... 79
function ........................................................ 87 Displaying the Details of Batch Save and Restore
Configuration file to use the machining cycle Results ....................................................... 214
creation function ........................................... 98
Configuration file to use the machining simulation E
function ........................................................ 88 Editing custom macro variables ........................ 82
Configuration file to use the multi-path edit function Enabling the EWF ........................................... 229
....................................................................... 62 Environment Required for iHMI Customization ... 8
i-1
B-64647EN/01
Environments required to create failure diagnosis M

messages .....................................................37 Machine Alarm Diagnosis Guidance Table 10, 37
Machining simulation screen ............................. 90
F MAINTENANCE DISPLAY SWITCHING ID 
FANUC PICTURE ................................................9 (subject VALUE) ........................................ 316
1 FANUC SCREEN COLOR DEFINITION LIST .333 Maintenance items display switch configuration 
Folder configuration .........................................222 file .............................................................. 170
2 Folder configuration inside the CNC ..................14 MAINTENENCE .............................................. 205
For PANEL iH ..................................................344 Manual information settings file ...................... 173
For PANEL iH Pro ...........................................345 Manual viewer tag list ..................................... 174
FUNCTION SPECIFICATIONS .......................338 Manually setting in the P-CODE variable ........ 114
3 Functions of Modal B Codes (Second Auxiliary MDI KEY CODE MAP FOR iHMI .................... 324
Function) .....................................................276 Memory usage in option functions .................. 347
Functions of Modal C Codes (Third Auxiliary Memory usage in the iHMI basic 
4 Function) .....................................................279 functions ........................................... 344, 346
Functions of the Spindle Rotation Direction 
Icon .............................................................296 N
5 G
Naming rules for manual file update ............... 178
NC tool database management ........................ 54
GENERAL PRECAUTIONS ..............................s-2
6 GENERAL WARNINGS FOR CNC APPLICATION
DEVELOPMENT ..........................................s-3
O
Opening/closing the custom macro variable 
slide .............................................................. 78
7 H
Hiding the modal G codes .................................68
Outputting the display switch settings of the
maintenance items ..................................... 170
Hiding the vertical soft keys ...............................24 Overall iHMI settings ........................................... 6
8 HOW TO CREATE A USER APPLICATION ...188 Overlapping the user application with the iHMI
HOW TO UPDATE THE SOFTWARE .............220 application .................................................. 190
OVERVIEW ......................................................... 1
A1 I
iHMI APPLICATION SETUP OVERVIEW .........14
OVERVIEW OF CREATING A USER
APPLICATION ........................................... 186
iHMI Folder Configuration ..................................14 Overview of Creating an Application ............... 188
A2 iHMI Hardware Performance Table ...................10
iHMI MAINTENANCE OVERVIEW ....................12 P
iHMI SETUP OVERVIEW ....................................2 PARAMETER OF N NUMBER SEARCH IN A
Z iHMI Whole Configuration File ...........................22 MACHINING PROGRAM ........................... 304
Import folder configuration ...............................177 Parameter of Program Content Display .......... 300
Importing/Exporting Logs Collected with the Data PARAMETER OF PROGRAM PROTECTION
Logger Function ..........................................159 KEYS ......................................................... 239
Individual Settings Common to the Applications 24 Parameter of Sequence Numbers .................. 304
Installing the iHMI ................................. 223, 228 PARAMETER OF SUBPROGRAM CALLS .... 238
PARAMETER TO CHANGE THE NUMBER OF
L DIGITS FOR PROGRAM NUMBERS ........ 242
List of output text data .....................................218 PARAMETER TO DISPLAY FEEDRATE
Log file .............................................................164 INFORMATION .......................................... 287
Log item configuration file ................................159 Parameter to Display the Actual Feedrate ...... 289
PARAMETER TO SELECT A DEVICE ........... 243
PARAMETERS ............................................... 231
i-2
B-64647EN/01
Parameters of Axis Name Switching ............... 264 PARAMETERS OF THE MACHINING

Parameters of Display during Program Backward by SIMULATION FUNCTION .......................... 247
Manual Handle Retrace ............................. 302 Parameters of the Spindle Load Meter ........... 296
Parameters of Extended Spindle Names and Parameters of the Spindle Speed Meter ......... 296
Subscripts .................................................. 291 PARAMETERS OF THE TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
Parameters of General Modal Information ...... 280 FUNCTION ................................................. 244 1
Parameters of Increment System 0.1 nm  Parameters to Align Control Axes to 
Display ....................................................... 257 the Top ............................................. 261, 264
PARAMETERS OF MACHINING INFORMATION Parameters to Change the Order of Displaying 2
DISPLAY .................................................... 282 Control Axes ..................................... 262, 265
PARAMETERS OF MACHINING PROGRAM PARAMETERS TO DISABLE EDITING IN THE
DISPLAY .................................................... 298 AUTOMATIC OPERATION STOP STATE 240 3
Parameters of Modal A Codes (Fourth Auxiliary PARAMETERS TO DISABLE EDITING OF
Function) .................................................... 279 PROGRAMS .............................................. 233
Parameters of Modal F Codes ........................ 271 Parameters to Display Axis Names ....... 251, 264 4
Parameters of Modal G Codes ....................... 266 Parameters to Display Coordinate Values ...... 255
Parameters of Modal HD.T and NX.T Codes .. 268 Parameters to Display Extended Axis Names and
PARAMETERS OF MODAL INFORMATION Subscripts ........................................ 253, 264 5
DISPLAY .................................................... 266 Parameters to Preset a Workpiece Coordinate
Parameters of Modal M Codes (First to Fifth M System (Absolute/Overall) ......................... 262
Codes) ....................................................... 275 Parameters to Show/Hide Control Axes 261, 264 6
Parameters of Modal S Codes ........................ 274 PREFACE ........................................................ p-1
Parameters of Modal SRPM, SSPM, and  Preparation ...................................................... 220
SMAX ......................................................... 271 Preview time of the machine collision avoidance 7
Parameters of Modal T Codes ........................ 273 function ....................................................... 153
Parameters of Modal T, D, and H Codes ........ 272 Program Storage File Edit Library (Ncprog.dll) 181
Parameters of Program Numbers ................... 301 Program Storage Files .................................... 181 8
Parameters of Programmable Diameter/Radius
Switching .................................................... 259 R
PARAMETERS OF SEQUENCE NUMBER  RELATED MANUALS ...................................... p-1 A1
STOP ......................................................... 305 RESOURCES REQUIRED FOR EACH 
PARAMETERS OF SERVO LOAD METER FUNCTION ................................................. 344
DISPLAY .................................................... 264 Restoring backed-up iHMI data ............ 225, 228 A2
PARAMETERS OF SPINDLE INFORMATION Restoring Data in a Batch ............................... 213
DISPLAY .................................................... 291 Restoring Data Individually ............................. 214
Parameters of Subprogram Calls .................... 298 Z
Parameters of the Actual Feedrate Speed  S
Meter .......................................................... 289 SAFETY PRECAUTIONS ................................ s-1
Parameters of the Actual Feedrate Unit .......... 287 Saving Data in a Batch .................................... 212
Parameters of the Actual Spindle Speed ........ 295 Saving Data Individually .................................. 214
Parameters of the Current Load Ratio ............ 297 Setting an animation to be used when a slide is
PARAMETERS OF THE CURRENT POSITION/ displayed ...................................................... 25
REMAINING TRAVEL DISTANCE DISPLAY Setting on the MANUAL GUIDE i screen ........ 121
TILES ......................................................... 251 Setting parts placement information ................ 167
PARAMETERS OF THE CUSTOM MACRO Setting program guidance messages .............. 101
VARIABLE LIST SLIDE ............................. 306 Setting the common items ............................... 129
PARAMETERS OF THE MACHINE COLLISION Setting the coordinate axes display and soft key
AVOIDANCE FUNCTION .......................... 308 display .......................................................... 64
i-3
B-64647EN/01
Setting the Machine Alarm Diagnosis ................36 Switching maintenance items display ............. 169
Setting the machine configuration ...................131
Setting the number of divided areas of the multi-path T
display ...........................................................65 Tool management function customization ........ 56
Setting the program manager slide ....................77
1 Setting the spindle rotation direction icon 
U
display ...........................................................70 Uninstalling the iHMI ....................................... 228
2 Setting the start page .......................................180 Updating the iHMI Basic Software for the 
PANEL iH ................................................... 222
Setting the traveling direction guide in the JOG,
HND, INC, and REF mode base screens .....74 Updating the iHMI Basic Software for the 
PANEL iH Pro ............................................ 226
Setting the uniform peripheral speed control mode
3 icon display ...................................................73 User Application .............................................. 187
User application .................................................. 8
Setting the workpiece coordinates slide ............76
SETTING UP BASIC FUNCTIONS ...................27 Using the iHMI Library .................................... 188
4 Setting Up Cycle Time Estimation Function ......57
SETTING UP iHMI APPLICATIONS .................13
Setting up M code input function .....................105
5 Setting Up the CNC Operation Screen ..............62
Setting up the fixed sentence function .............109
Setting Up the iHMI Machining Cycle ..............113
6 Setting Up the iHMI Set-up Guidance .............113
SETTING UP THE IMPROVEMENT 
APPLICATION ............................................159
7 Setting Up the Machine Collision Avoidance
Function ......................................................125
SETTING UP THE MACHINING 
8 APPLICATION ..............................................62
Setting Up the Maintenance Manager .............166
Setting Up the Manual Viewer Function ..........173
A1 SETTING UP THE PLANNING APPLICATION .54
SETTING UP THE UTILITY APPLICATION ....173
A2 Setting Up the Web Browser Function .............179

Setting Up Tool Management Function .............54
Setting various settings of the machine collision
Z avoidance function ......................................127
Settings related to each mode base screen ......68
Setup Overview ...................................................2
Signals available during the execution of the
machine collision avoidance function .........156
Simultaneous Display with Another 
Application ..................................................201
Standard icons list ...........................................168
Starting a specific application from the user
application ...................................................192
Starting an application with a screen specified ..19
Starting iHMI applications from shortcuts ..........19
Starting the Backup Screen .............................207
i-4
B-64647EN/01
REVISION RECORD
Edition Date Contents

01 Oct., 2017 1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
A1
A2
Z
r-1
B-64647EN/01
* B- 6 4 6 4 7 EN/ 0 1 . 0 1 *

Setup Manual 0if-Plus B-64647en - 01 - 01

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Setup Manual 0if-Plus B-64647en - 01 - 01

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

< +HMI

This manual attempts to include information as much as possible.

 Used if supplementary explanations for operation or additional information

* Read this manual carefully, and store it in a safe place.

6 depending on the operation.

A1 setting may cause unexpected behavior of the machine depending on the

GENERAL WARNINGS FOR CNC

Data List Table

2 Work zero offset value and related data,

8 List Table of Applications and Network Functions

A2 Network functions FL-net, EtherNet/IP, PROFINET, Modbus/TCP,

Manual name Specification

2 FANUC Series 30i-MODEL B

5 CNC Screen Display Function OPERATOR'S MANUAL B-63164EN

2 SETTING UP iHMI APPLICATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13 2

3 CREATING A USER APPLICATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .185 3

2.3.2 Customizing the Status Display ..................................................... 29

8 2.5.1.4 Hiding the modal G codes ...................................................... 68

2.5.2 Setting Up the iHMI Machining Cycle ........................................... 113

3.2.2 Using the iHMI Library ................................................................. 188

6 4.2 AUTOMATIC DATA BACKUP .................................................. 216

5.12 PARAMETERS OF MACHINING INFORMATION DISPLAY ... 282

2 5.14 PARAMETERS OF SPINDLE INFORMATION DISPLAY ........ 291

1.1 iHMI SETUP OVERVIEW

4 1.1.1.1 Customizing applications registered with the iHMI

Tool Data +iHMI

 CNC Operation Screen

6  Machine Collision Avoidance

Fig. 1.1.1.1 (f) Registering 3D Model Data

1.1.1.2 Overall iHMI settings

In addition, the following applications can be added to the Home screen:

Fig. 1.1.1.2 (b) Custom Screen

● Custom applications created using C++ or C# (user applications)

Fig. 1.1.1.2 (d) Registering a shortcut key

For details on how to customize, see "2.2 CONFIGURATION FILES THAT

1.1.2 Environment Required for iHMI Customization

This section describes an environment required for iHMI customization.

 For PANEL iH Pro

Table 1.1.2.1 (b) Environment Required to Create an Application That Runs on

1.1.2.3 Machine alarm diagnosis guidance table

1 Table 1.1.2.3 Environment Required for Machine Alarm Diagnosis Guidance

7 1.1.3 iHMI Hardware Performance Table

A1 Item PANEL iH PANEL iH Pro

Item PANEL iH PANEL iH Pro

1.2 iHMI MAINTENANCE OVERVIEW

2.1 iHMI APPLICATION SETUP OVERVIEW ............................................ 14

2.1 iHMI APPLICATION SETUP OVER-

 iHMI application folder

4 described as "%APPPATH%" in this document.)

2.1.1.1 Folder configuration inside the CNC

//CNC_MEM SYSTEM (5) System folder

Fig. 2.1.1.1 Folder configuration inside the CNC

2.1.2 Customizable Applications

The following shows customizable iHMI applications:

Lathe Conversation Allows you to create an NC program only by

Maintenance Manager Allows you to switch the display of manage

Application name Customization overview Icon

1 Maintenance Display Displays the conventional NC screen.

2.2 CONFIGURATION FILES THAT

Table 2.2.1 (a) Description in the <entry> Tag

XML tag Description

The following options can be set for the <entry> tag.

5 alwaysvisible Does not hide the application even if it goes to background.